THIRD EDITION
22_DT_OM_EN_USC
©2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
2022 RAM 1500
OWNER’S MANUAL
2022 RAM 1500
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing
what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important
extension of your Ram vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go
directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
CANADA
MOPAR.COM/OM
U.S.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in
an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that
may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation
or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also
dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull
off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It
is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference
for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle,
visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far
below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public
transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when
you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor
vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and
lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary,
service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when
servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle.
This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make
changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself
to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in
substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet by calling 1-866-726-4636 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................................ 10
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................. 19
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ......................................................108
4 STARTING AND OPERATING ...............................................................................................144
5 MULTIMEDIA .............................................................................................................................. 237
6 SAFETY ......................................................................................................................................... 319
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .....................................................................................................381
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ..................................................................................... 402
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................476
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................487
11 INDEX ..............................................................................................................................................491
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY........................................................ 11
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS........................... 11
CONSUMER INFORMATION — TRUCK-CAMPER
LOADING................................................................. 11
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.......... 13
SYMBOL GLOSSARY.............................................. 13
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ........................................................................ 19
Key Fob .............................................................19
SENTRY KEY ........................................................... 23
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................. 23
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition .........................23
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (GASOLINE) .... 24
How To Use Remote Start................................25
To Exit Remote Start Mode..............................26
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped........................................................26
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped........................................................26
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer
Activation — If Equipped ..................................27
Remote Start Abort Message ..........................27
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL) .......... 27
How To Use Remote Start................................27
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .....28
To Arm The System ..........................................28
To Disarm The System.....................................28
Rearming Of The System .................................29
Security System Manual Override...................29
DOORS ....................................................................29
Manual Door Locks ..........................................29
Power Door Locks — If Equipped.....................30
Power Side Steps — If Equipped .....................30
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry............31
Automatic Unlock Doors On
Exit — If Equipped.............................................33
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped..............33
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors........................................................33
STEERING WHEEL ..................................................34
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column...................34
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped............34
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED.....35
Programming The Memory Feature ................35
Linking And Unlinking The Key Fob
To Memory........................................................35
Memory Position Recall ...................................36
SEATS ......................................................................36
Manual Adjustment
(Front Seats) — If Equipped .............................36
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)....................38
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) —
If Equipped .......................................................38
Heated Seats — If Equipped ...........................40
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .......................41
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers ........................42
Head Restraints ............................................42
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION —
IF EQUIPPED........................................................... 44
Introducing Voice Recognition ........................44
Basic Voice Commands ...................................44
Get Started .......................................................44
Additional Information .....................................45
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS —
IF EQUIPPED........................................................... 45
MIRRORS................................................................ 46
Inside Rearview Mirror.....................................46
Illuminated Vanity Mirror .................................47
Outside Mirrors ................................................48
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors —
If Equipped .......................................................48
Power Mirrors ...................................................48
Power Folding Outside Mirrors For
Standard And Trailer Tow — If Equipped ........49
Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped ..............50
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .........................50
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped .....50
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED............................. 50
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink®.......................................................51
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ............51
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device...................51
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage
Door Opener .....................................................52
Programming HomeLink® To A
Miscellaneous Device ......................................53
Reprogramming A Single
HomeLink® Button ..........................................53
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .........53
Security .............................................................54
Troubleshooting Tips........................................54
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................. 55
Headlight Switch .............................................55
Multifunction Lever .........................................56
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) ......................56
High/Low Beam Switch ..................................56
Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control — If Equipped ......................................56
Flash-To-Pass ..................................................57
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ..............57
Parking Lights And Panel Lights......................57
Automatic Headlights With Wipers..................57
Headlight Delay ................................................57
Lights-On Reminder .........................................57
Fog Lights — If Equipped .................................58
Turn Signals ....................................................58
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped..................58
Cargo Lights/Trailer Spotter Lights/
Trailer Hitch Light With Bed Lights —
If Equipped........................................................58
Battery Saver....................................................59
INTERIOR LIGHTS ..................................................60
Courtesy Lights.................................................60
Illuminated Entry .............................................62
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS...............62
Windshield Wiper Operation............................62
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ................63
CLIMATE CONTROLS..............................................64
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions ..................................................64
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions ..................................................67
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped........................................................69
Climate Voice Recognition — If Equipped.......70
Operating Tips .................................................70
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ...............71
Storage..............................................................71
USB/AUX Control ..........................................76
Electrical Power Outlets .................................78
Power Inverter — If Equipped ..........................80
Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped ............81
WINDOWS .............................................................. 82
Power Windows ................................................82
Automatic Window Features ...........................82
Reset Auto-Up ..................................................83
Window Lockout Switch...................................83
Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped ....83
Manual Sliding Rear Window —
If Equipped .......................................................83
Wind Buffeting .................................................84
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ..................... 84
Single Pane Power Sunroof — If Equipped .....84
Dual Pane Power Sunroof — If Equipped........85
HOOD....................................................................... 87
To Open The Hood............................................87
To Close The Hood ...........................................88
TAILGATE ................................................................ 88
Opening.............................................................88
Closing ..............................................................88
Locking Tailgate ...............................................88
Multifunction Tailgate — If Equipped .............89
Tailgate Removal .............................................90
Bed Step — If Equipped ...................................92
PICKUP BOX .......................................................... 94
Bed Rail Tie-Down System — If Equipped ......95
RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED...................................... 96
Locking And Unlocking RamBox......................97
RamBox Cargo Storage Bins ...........................97
RamBox Safety Warning..................................99
Bed Divider — If Equipped ...............................99
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER —
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................101
Tonneau Cover Components ........................ 101
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Folding For
Driving Or Removal........................................ 102
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation ............. 105
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Cleaning ................. 107
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER —
GASOLINE .............................................................108
Base / Midline Instrument Cluster
Descriptions — Gasoline ............................... 109
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER —
GASOLINE .............................................................110
Premium Instrument Cluster
Descriptions — Gasoline ............................... 111
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER —
DIESEL...................................................................112
Base / Midline Instrument Cluster
Descriptions — Diesel .................................. 113
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER —
DIESEL...................................................................115
Premium Instrument Cluster
Descriptions — Diesel ................................... 116
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY...................... 117
Instrument Cluster Display Location
and Controls .................................................. 117
Oil Life Reset ................................................. 118
Display Menu Items ...................................... 119
Head Up Display (HUD) — If Equipped ........ 126
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Messages .... 127
Displays.......................................................... 128
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Warning
Messages....................................................... 129
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fault Warning
Messages....................................................... 129
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped.................................... 130
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES................. 131
Red Warning Lights....................................... 131
Yellow Warning Lights................................... 134
Yellow Indicator Lights.................................. 138
Green Indicator Lights .................................. 140
White Indicator Lights ................................... 141
Blue Indicator Lights ..................................... 142
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM —
OBD II.................................................................... 142
Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity ................................... 142
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS .............................. 143
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE ......................................144
Automatic Transmission ............................... 145
Tip Start Feature .......................................... 145
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Ignition .................. 145
Normal Starting Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button — Gasoline Engine...... 145
AutoPark ........................................................ 146
If Engine Fails To Start ................................. 147
Normal Starting Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button — Diesel Engine .......... 148
Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ............................ 149
After Starting ................................................. 149
Starting Fluids — Diesel Engine Only ........... 149
NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE .........149
Cold Weather Precautions............................ 150
Engine Idling.................................................. 151
Stopping The Engine..................................... 151
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED..........152
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
GASOLINE ENGINE ..............................................153
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
DIESEL ENGINE....................................................153
PARKING BRAKE .................................................153
Electric Park Brake (EPB) ............................ 153
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION..............................156
Ignition Park Interlock................................... 157
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
(BTSI) System ............................................... 157
8-Speed Automatic Transmission ................ 157
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................162
Four-Position Electronically Shifted
Transfer Case — If Equipped ........................ 162
Five-Position Electronically Shifted
Transfer Case — If Equipped ........................ 164
ACTIVE-LEVEL FOUR CORNER AIR
SUSPENSION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .............167
Description..................................................... 167
Air Suspension Modes .................................. 169
Instrument Cluster Display Messages ......... 169
Operation ....................................................... 170
ACTIVE-LEVEL FOUR CORNER
AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM
(OFF-ROAD GROUP) — IF EQUIPPED .................171
Description..................................................... 171
Air Suspension Modes .................................. 173
Instrument Cluster Display Messages ......... 173
Operation ....................................................... 173
AXLE LOCK SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ................174
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL —
IF EQUIPPED .......................................................175
POWER STEERING ..............................................175
Electric Power Steering ................................ 175
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L
ENGINES ONLY — IF EQUIPPED......................... 176
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED............. 176
Autostop Mode .............................................. 176
Possible Reasons The Engine Does
Not Autostop.................................................. 177
To Start The Engine While In
Autostop Mode .............................................. 177
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/
Start System .................................................. 178
To Manually Turn On The
Stop/Start System......................................... 178
System Malfunction ...................................... 178
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS —
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................ 178
Cruise Control................................................ 178
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ..................... 180
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ....................... 189
ParkSense Sensors....................................... 190
ParkSense Warning Display ......................... 190
ParkSense Display ........................................ 190
Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or
Rear ParkSense............................................. 193
Service The ParkSense Park
Assist System ................................................ 193
Cleaning The ParkSense System ................. 194
ParkSense System Usage Precautions........ 194
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .....................................195
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense
Active Park Assist System............................. 195
Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space
Assistance Operation.................................... 196
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ..............................199
LaneSense Operation ................................... 199
Turning LaneSense On Or Off....................... 200
LaneSense Warning Message...................... 200
Changing LaneSense Status ........................ 202
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ...............202
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................204
Forward Facing Camera With
Tire Lines — If Equipped ............................... 206
TRAILER CAMERAS — IF EQUIPPED .................207
Trailer Surround View Camera System —
If Equipped .................................................... 207
AUX Camera — If Equipped........................... 210
REFUELING THE VEHICLE —
GASOLINE ENGINE ..............................................210
REFUELING THE VEHICLE —
DIESEL ENGINE....................................................212
Avoid Using Contaminated Fuel................... 212
Bulk Fuel Storage — Diesel Fuel .................. 212
Diesel Exhaust Fluid ..................................... 213
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Storage ....................... 213
Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid......................... 213
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
VEHICLE LOADING...............................................215
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) .......... 215
Payload .......................................................... 215
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)................ 215
Tire Size.......................................................... 215
Rim Size ......................................................... 215
Inflation Pressure .......................................... 215
Curb Weight ................................................... 215
Loading .......................................................... 216
TRAILER TOWING ................................................216
Common Towing Definitions......................... 216
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum
Trailer Weight................................................. 219
Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)............... 220
Trailer And Tongue Weight .......................... 220
Trailer Reverse Steering Control .................. 220
Towing Requirements ................................... 222
Towing Tips .................................................... 228
SNOWPLOW .........................................................229
Before Plowing............................................... 229
Snowplow Prep Package Model
Availability...................................................... 229
Over The Road Operation With
Snowplow Attached....................................... 230
Operating Tips ............................................... 230
General Maintenance ................................... 230
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME) ..................................... 231
Towing This Vehicle Behind
Another Vehicle ............................................. 231
Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel
Drive Models.................................................. 232
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel
Drive Models.................................................. 232
DRIVING TIPS....................................................... 235
Driving On Slippery Surfaces ....................... 235
Driving Through Water ................................. 235
Off-Road Driving Tips .................................. 236
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ......................................... 237
CYBERSECURITY ................................................. 237
UCONNECT SETTINGS ........................................ 238
Customer Programmable Features ............. 238
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION ............................... 266
System Overview .......................................... 266
Safety And General Information .................. 268
UCONNECT MODES............................................. 269
Steering Wheel Audio Controls —
If Equipped..................................................... 269
Radio Mode .................................................. 269
Media Mode .................................................. 277
Phone Mode ................................................. 279
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES —
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................289
Is My Vehicle Connected? ............................ 289
Introduction To Connected Vehicle
Services ........................................................ 289
Getting Started With Connected
Vehicle Services ........................................... 291
Using SiriusXM Guardian™ .......................... 292
Manage My SiriusXM Guardian™
Account .......................................................... 304
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS ...........................304
Connected Services SOS FAQs —
If Equipped ................................................... 304
Connected Services Remote Door
Lock/Unlock FAQs ........................................ 304
Connected Services Roadside
Assistance FAQs ........................................... 305
Connected Services Send & Go FAQs —
If Equipped ................................................... 305
Connected Services Vehicle
Finder FAQs .................................................. 305
Connected Services Stolen Vehicle
Assistance FAQs — If Equipped ................... 306
Connected Services Remote Vehicle
Start FAQs ..................................................... 306
Connected Services Remote
Horn & Lights FAQs ....................................... 307
Connected Services Account
FAQs — If Equipped ....................................... 307
Data Collection & Privacy ............................. 309
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES......309
Regulatory And Safety Information .............. 309
PERFORMANCE PAGES — IF EQUIPPED...........310
Timers ............................................................ 311
Gauges........................................................... 311
G-Force........................................................... 312
Dynamometer (Dyno)/Engine....................... 312
Vehicle Dynamics .......................................... 313
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED ...................313
Off-Road Pages Status Bar .......................... 314
Vehicle Dynamics ......................................... 315
Accessory Gauge ........................................... 316
Pitch & Roll .................................................... 317
Suspension .................................................... 318
Forward Facing Camera................................ 318
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ..............................................319
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..................... 319
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ....... 320
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ..........................327
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped .................................................... 327
Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
With Mitigation — If Equipped....................... 333
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) .............................................. 336
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................... 342
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....... 342
Important Safety Precautions ...................... 342
Seat Belt Systems ........................................ 343
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ...... 349
Child Restraints ............................................ 363
SAFETY TIPS ........................................................ 377
Transporting Passengers.............................. 377
Transporting Pets ....................................... 377
Connected Vehicles ...................................... 377
Safety Checks You Should Make
Inside The Vehicle ........................................ 377
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle............................ 379
Exhaust Gas................................................... 380
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ......................... 380
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS......................... 381
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED...... 382
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING......................... 385
Preparations For Jacking .............................. 385
Jack Location................................................. 386
Removal Of Jack And Tools .......................... 386
Removing The Spare Tire.............................. 387
Jacking Instructions ...................................... 389
To Stow The Flat Or Spare ........................... 391
Reinstalling The Jack And Tools................... 392
JUMP STARTING .................................................393
Preparations For Jump Start ........................ 394
Jump Starting Procedure.............................. 394
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY...............................395
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ...........................396
MANUAL PARK RELEASE ...................................397
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ...............................398
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE..........................399
Two-Wheel Drive Models .............................. 400
Four-Wheel Drive Models ............................. 400
Emergency Tow Hooks —
If Equipped .................................................... 401
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS) ...................................................401
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR).........................401
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING —
GASOLINE ENGINE ..............................................402
Maintenance Plan......................................... 403
SCHEDULED SERVICING —
DIESEL ENGINE....................................................407
Maintenance Plan — Diesel Fuel Up
To B5 Biodiesel ............................................ 408
Additional Maintenance — B6 To B20
Biodiesel ........................................................ 411
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ....................................412
3.6L Engine With Stop/Start ....................... 412
5.7L Engine Without Stop/Start................... 413
5.7L Engine With Stop/Start ........................ 414
3.0L Diesel Engine ........................................ 415
Checking Oil Level ......................................... 416
Adding Washer Fluid ................................... 416
Maintenance-Free Battery ........................... 416
Pressure Washing ......................................... 417
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE .....................................417
Engine Oil ..................................................... 417
Engine Oil Filter ........................................... 418
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............................. 418
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter —
Diesel Engine ................................................ 421
Underbody Mounted Fuel Filter
Replacement — Diesel Engine...................... 422
Priming If The Engine Has Run Out
Of Fuel — Diesel Engine ................................ 422
Intervention Regeneration Strategy —
Message Process Flow (Diesel Engine) ....... 423
Diesel Exhaust Fluid...................................... 423
Air Conditioner Maintenance........................ 424
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection................... 426
Body Lubrication ........................................... 427
Windshield Wiper Blades ............................. 427
Exhaust System............................................. 429
Cooling System ............................................. 430
Charge Air Cooler — Inter-Cooler
(Diesel Engine) .............................................. 433
Brake System ............................................... 433
Automatic Transmission .............................. 434
Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle
Fluid Level...................................................... 435
Transfer Case ................................................ 436
Fuses.............................................................. 436
Bulb Replacement ........................................ 448
TIRES..................................................................... 454
Tire Safety Information ................................. 454
Tires — General Information......................... 461
Tire Types....................................................... 465
Spare Tires — If Equipped............................. 465
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care......................... 467
Snow Traction Devices ................................ 468
Tire Rotation Recommendations ................ 470
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ....................471
Treadwear...................................................... 471
Traction Grades............................................. 471
Temperature Grades..................................... 471
STORING THE VEHICLE .......................................472
BODYWORK..........................................................472
Protection From Atmospheric Agents .......... 472
Body And Underbody Maintenance ............. 472
Preserving The Bodywork ............................. 472
INTERIORS ...........................................................474
Seats And Fabric Parts ................................. 474
Plastic And Coated Parts .............................. 475
Leather Surfaces........................................... 475
Glass Surfaces ............................................. 475
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN).........476
BRAKE SYSTEM ..................................................476
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS..................................................476
Torque Specifications ................................. 476
FUEL REQUIREMENTS —
GASOLINE ENGINE ..............................................477
3.6L Engine.................................................... 477
5.7L Engine.................................................... 477
Reformulated Gasoline................................. 477
Materials Added To Fuel .............................. 478
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ........................ 478
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex
Fuel Vehicles.................................................. 478
CNG And LP Fuel System
Modifications ................................................. 478
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline...................... 479
Fuel System Cautions ................................... 479
FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE ........ 479
Diesel Fuel Specifications ............................ 480
Biodiesel Fuel Requirements ....................... 480
FLUID CAPACITIES .............................................. 482
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS................... 483
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................ 486
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE ........................................... 487
Prepare For The Appointment ...................... 487
Prepare A List ................................................ 487
Be Reasonable With Requests..................... 487
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................................ 487
FCA US LLC Customer Center....................... 487
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center............... 487
Mexico............................................................ 488
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands................ 488
Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY).................... 488
Service Contract ........................................... 488
WARRANTY INFORMATION................................489
MOPAR® PARTS .................................................489
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ..........................489
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C............................................ 489
In Canada ...................................................... 489
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ..........................490
GENERAL INFORMATION....................................490
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Ram vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers
differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version
of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering,
transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving
off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial
and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Ú page 235.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its
customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before
driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the
text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced
throughout the Owner's Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in
this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced.
For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an
authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Ram vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care
about your satisfaction.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body modifications or
special equipment installed by van conversion/camper manufacturers/body
builders. US residents refer to the Warranty Information, Section 2.1.C.
Canadian residents refer to the “What Is Not Covered” section of the Warranty
Information. Such equipment includes video monitors, DVD/Blu-Ray™,
heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and service on these
items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
CONSUMER INFORMATION — TRUCK-CAMPER LOADING
This information is provided in fulfillment of the requirement by the United
States Government, Department of Transportation, National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration, that “every manufacturer of trucks that are capable of
accommodating slide-in campers, manufactured on or after April 1, 1973 shall
provide... at the time of original purchase to the first person who purchases the
truck”... information on Truck Camper Loading.
A slide-in camper document is provided in your vehicle’s glove
compartment that contains your Vehicle Identification Number, truck model,
cargo weight rating, and the forward/rearward limit of a camper. To obtain
additional dimensional and technical specifications for your vehicle,
please visit
https://www.ramtrucks.com .
WARNING!
These statements are against operating
procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements are against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation,
operation, and reliability. If not followed, may result
in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier
use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information on
a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
1
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
Figure 1 illustrates the dimensions describing the forward and rearward limits of the zone in which the Center of Gravity (CG) of a slide-in camper must be located,
to provide satisfactory vehicle handling and to prevent overload of the front and rear axles.
Figure 2 illustrates a proper match between truck and camper.
NOTE:
The camper Center of Gravity falls within the specified zone.
A — Forward Limit of Camper CG
B — Rearward Limit of Camper CG
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
13
When the truck is used to carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo load of the
truck consists of the manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the weight of
installed additional camper equipment not included in the manufacturer’s
camper weight figure, the weight of camper cargo, and the weight of
passengers in the camper. The total cargo load should not exceed the truck’s
cargo weight rating and the camper’s CG should fall within the truck’s
recommended CG zone when installed.
Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of
your vehicle. When the truck camper is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the
front and rear wheels separately, to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads
should not exceed either of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR). The total of
the axle loads should not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to get the total weight
below the ratings.
NOTE:
These ratings are also provided on the vehicle certification label located on the
driver’s side B-pillar. See Ú page 215 for more information.
For any additional instructions, please contact your conversion/camper
manufacturer or an authorized dealer.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of
each symbol Ú page 131.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 131
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 132
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 132
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 132
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 133
1
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 133
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 133
Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 133
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 133
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 134
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 134
Red Warning Lights
Tailgate Open Warning Light
Ú page 134
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
Ú page 134
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 134
Vehicle Security Warning Light
Ú page 134
Yellow Warning Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 134
Air Suspension Fault Warning Light
Ú page 135
Red Warning Lights
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
15
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 135
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
Ú page 136
Electric Park Brake Warning Light
Ú page 135
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
Ú page 135
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
Ú page 135
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
Ú page 136
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
Ú page 135
Yellow Warning Lights
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 135
Rear Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light
Ú page 136
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
Ú page 136
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
Ú page 136
Service 4WD Warning Light
Ú page 136
Service LaneSense Warning Light
Ú page 135
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Ú page 137
Yellow Warning Lights
1
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16
Yellow Indicator Lights
Air Suspension Payload Protection Indicator Light
Ú page 138
Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light
Ú page 138
Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light
Ú page 138
Air Suspension Normal Height Indicator Light
Ú page 138
Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height Indicator Light
Ú page 138
Air Suspension Ride Height Raising Indicator Light
Ú page 138
Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering Indicator Light
Ú page 138
Cargo Light Active Indicator Light
Ú page 138
Entry/Exit Indicator Light
Ú page 139
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light
Ú page 138
Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Indicator Light
Ú page 138
NEUTRAL Indicator Light
Ú page 139
Yellow Indicator Lights
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
17
Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light
Ú page 139
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
Ú page 139
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
Ú page 139
4WD Indicator Light
Ú page 139
4WD Low Indicator Light
Ú page 139
4WD High Indicator Light
Ú page 139
Yellow Indicator Lights
Wait To Start Light Indicator Light
Ú page 139
Water In Fuel Indicator Light
Ú page 140
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Light
Ú page 140
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected
Indicator Light
Ú page 140
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light
Ú page 141
Yellow Indicator Lights
1
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18
ECO Mode Indicator Light
Ú page 140
Front Fog Indicator Light
Ú page 140
LaneSense Indicator Light
Ú page 140
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
Ú page 140
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
Ú page 141
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 141
4WD AUTO Indicator Light
Ú page 141
Green Indicator Lights
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light
Ú page 141
Cruise Control Ready Indicator
Ú page 141
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light
Ú page 141
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
Ú page 141
LaneSense Indicator Light
Ú page 141
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 142
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
19
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which
supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE), Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), remote
air suspension lowering (if equipped), and Remote
Start (if equipped). The key fob allows you to lock
or unlock all doors, tailgate, and the RamBox
(if equipped) as well as activate the Panic Alarm
from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m).
The key fob does not need to be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system. The key fob also
contains an emergency key, which is stored in the
rear of the key fob.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if
the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device. This may
result in poor performance.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Wireless
Charging Pad, the key fob may not be detected
if it is placed within 6 inches (15 cm) of the pad
Ú page 81.
With the ignition in the ON position and the
vehicle moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE
commands are disabled.
Key Fob
1 — LED Indicator Light
2 — Unlock
3 — Tailgate Lowering (If Equipped)
4 — Air Suspension Remote Lowering
(If Equipped)
5 — Lock
6 — Remote Start (If Equipped)
7 — Panic
8 — Emergency Key
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be
verified by referring to the instrument cluster
display, which will display directions to follow.
NOTE:
A low key fob battery condition may be indicated by
a message in the instrument cluster display, or by
the LED light on the key fob. If the LED key fob light
no longer illuminates from key fob button pushes,
then the key fob battery requires replacement
Ú page 490.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Tailgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob
once to unlock the driver’s door, or, twice within
five seconds to unlock all doors, the tailgate and
the RamBox (if equipped). To lock all the doors and
the tailgate, push the lock button once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will
flash and the illuminated entry system will be
activated. When the doors are locked, the turn
signals will flash and the horn will chirp.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first
push of the unlock button. The horn chirp when the
lock button is pushed can be programmed on/off
within Uconnect Settings Ú page 238.
Key Left Vehicle Feature
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the
vehicle while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the
ON/RUN or START position, the message “Key Fob
Has Left The Vehicle” will be shown in the
instrument cluster display along with an interior
chime. An exterior audible and visual alert will also
be activated to warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three
times along with a single flash of the vehicle’s
exterior lights.
NOTE:
The doors have to be open and then closed in
order for the vehicle to check for the presence of
a key fob; the Key Left Vehicle feature will not
activate until all of the doors are closed.
These alerts will not be activated in situations
where the vehicle’s engine is left running with
the key fob inside.
Air Suspension (Remote Lowering Of The
Vehicle) — If Equipped
For easy entry and loading, your vehicle
can be lowered by pushing the key fob air
suspension lowering button two times.
When air suspension lowering is
requested using the key fob, the vehicle will send a
series of chirps and flashes to alert the customer
that the operation has begun and will continue
these alerts until it successfully lowers.
The following conditions must be met for the
vehicle to lower remotely:
The vehicle must not already be in Entry/Exit
ride height.
The vehicle battery must be fully charged.
All doors must be closed.
The key fob must be out of the vehicle.
Gear selector must be in PARK.
NOTE:
Ensure the vehicle is clear of all objects, pets, and
people prior to remote lowering.
Canceling Remote Lowering
Vehicle lowering can be canceled at anytime.
When vehicle lowering is canceled, the vehicle will
raise to the next defined level and lock out the
remote lowering feature for five seconds until a
new request is made.
To cancel vehicle lowering, push the key fob air
suspension lowering button one time during the
lowering process. When vehicle lowering is
canceled, the horn will chirp two times and the turn
signal lamps will flash four times. Once raising is
completed, the horn will chirp one time.
NOTE:
More information on air suspension is provided
later in this manual, see Ú page 167.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The replacement battery model is one CR2450
battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin
battery dimensions may not meet the original
OEM coin battery dimensions.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate
for further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
Do not replace the coin battery if the LED on the
key fob above the top row buttons blinks when
a button is pressed. The coin battery should last
a minimum of three years with normal vehicle
usage.
1. Remove the emergency key (1) by pushing
the emergency key release button (2) on the
side of the key fob, and pulling the emergency
key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Hold the key fob with the button side facing
down, and locate the small rectangular gap on
the left side between the housing and the back
cover of the key fob. Use a small screwdriver
(or similar tool) to pry open the left side of the
fob cover while applying pressure until the
cover snaps open.
3. Next, locate the gap on the right side of the key
fob, which is positioned further to the edge
than the left side gap. Pry open the right side,
and remove the back cover.
4. Remove the battery by using your thumb to
slide the battery downward and back toward
the key ring.
Key Fob Battery Location
NOTE:
When replacing the battery, ensure the (+) sign on
the battery is facing upward. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean
it with rubbing alcohol.
1 — Emergency Key
2 — Emergency Key Release Button
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Replace the battery by using your thumb to
push down and slide the battery under the
small lip on the top edge of the opening.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
6. To assemble the key fob case, line up the top
edge of the back cover with the top of the fob,
and press the edges into the interlocking
hinges until all edges snap together with no
large visual gaps.
7. Reinsert the emergency key until it locks
into place.
NOTE:
The key fob battery should only be replaced by
qualified technicians. If the battery requires
replacement, see an authorized dealer.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never
been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to
match the vehicle locks.
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell
battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a
chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell battery is
swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns
in just two hours and can lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swal-
lowed or placed inside any part of the body,
seek immediate medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from chil-
dren. If the battery compartment does not
close securely, stop using the product and
keep it away from children.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
Always remember to place the Keyless
Enter ‘n Go Ignition™ in the OFF position.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed or
activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of
whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore,
only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system cannot reprogram a key fob obtained from
another vehicle.
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on
after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a
problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates
that someone attempted to start the engine with
an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob
is used to start the engine but there is an issue
with the vehicle electronics, the engine will start
and shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than
10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the
electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible by an authorized
dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle
have been programmed to the vehicle electronics
Ú page 490.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as long as
the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several
operating modes that are labeled and will
illuminate when in position. These modes are
OFF, ACC, ON/RUN, and START.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped
Some electrical devices
(e.g. power locks, alarm, etc.) are still available
ACC
Engine is not started
Some electrical devices are available
(e.g. power sunroof, power windows, etc.)
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket Remote Start
systems. Use of these systems may result in
vehicle starting problems and loss of security
protection.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (Accessory)
3 — ON/RUN
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ON/RUN
Driving position
All electrical devices are available
(e.g. climate controls, heated seats, etc.)
START
The engine will start (when foot is on the brake)
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change the mode by
pushing the button, the key fob may have a low or
depleted battery. In this situation, a backup
method can be used to operate the ignition switch.
Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency
key) of the key fob against the START/STOP
ignition button and push to operate the ignition
switch.
Backup Starting Method
NOTE:
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ system if it is located next
to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic
device; these devices may block the key fob’s
wireless signal and prevent the Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ system from starting the vehicle.
For more information on normal engine starting,
see Ú page 144.
When opening the driver's door and the ignition
is in the ON/RUN position (engine not running),
a chime will sound to remind you to place the
ignition in the OFF position. In addition to the
chime, the message “Ignition or Accessory ON”
will display in the cluster.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
(GASOLINE)
This system uses the key fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security.
The system has a range of approximately
328 ft (100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather and to reach a comfortable climate in all
ambient conditions before the customer enters the
vehicle.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in
the ON/RUN position. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range Ú page 490.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the
horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.
Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts
the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and
place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low,
the vehicle will start and then shut down in
10 seconds.
The parking lights will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window and power sunroof
operation (if equipped) are disabled when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion before the Remote Start sequence can be
repeated for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before
the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
Panic button not pushed
Fuel meets minimum requirement
System not disabled from previous
Remote Start event
Vehicle Security system not active
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not
illuminated
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless
and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous
and can cause serious injury or death
when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and
can cause serious injury or death when
inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after a Remote Start, unlock
the doors using the key fob or Passive Entry and
disarm the Vehicle Security system (if equipped).
Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
press the brake pedal and push and release the
START/STOP ignition button.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if
the Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed
again, or if the engine is allowed to run for the
entire 15 minute cycle. Once the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position, the climate controls will
resume the previously set operations
(temperature, blower control, etc.).
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable for two seconds after receiving a
valid Remote Start request.
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry feature, the
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Button” will display in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START/STOP
ignition button.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the
system will automatically activate front defrost for
15 minutes or less. The time is dependent on the
ambient temperature. Once the timer expires, the
system will automatically adjust the settings
depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote
Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next
section for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear
defrost will automatically turn on in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel and driver heated seat
feature will turn on if programmed in the comfort
menu screen within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 238. In warm weather, the driver vented
seat feature will automatically turn on when the
Remote Start is activated and is programmed in
the comfort menu screen. The vehicle will adjust
the climate control settings depending on the
outside ambient temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
The climate controls automatically adjust to an
optimal temperature and mode, dependent on the
outside ambient temperature. When the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position, the climate
controls will resume their previous settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or
below, the climate settings will default to
maximum heat, with fresh air entering the
cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the
vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to
78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be based
on the last settings selected by the driver.
In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or
above, the climate settings will default to
MAX A/C, Bi-Level mode, with Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate
control settings, see Ú page 64.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of
Remote Start, or until the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. The climate control settings will
change, and exit the automatic defaults, if
manually adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is
in Remote Start mode. This includes turning the
climate controls off using the OFF button.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER
D
E–ICER ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C),
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting
Remote Start will resume its previous operation. If
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer
and operation will continue.
REMOTE START ABORT MESSAGE
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
remote start, or exits Remote Start prematurely:
Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Cancelled — Too Cold
Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL)
This system uses the key fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security.
The system has a range of approximately
328 ft (100 m).
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and the key
fob may reduce this range.
The Remote Start system will wait for the Wait
To Start indicator light to extinguish before
cranking the engine. This allows time for the
engine preheat cycle to heat the cylinder air,
and is normal in cold weather. For further infor-
mation on the Wait To Start indicator light and
the preheat cycle, see Ú page 139.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the
horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.
Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts
the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and
place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
All of the following conditions must be met before
the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
Panic button not pushed
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Fuel meets minimum requirement
System not disabled from previous
remote start event
Vehicle Security system not active
Water In Fuel indicator light is not illuminated
Wait To Start indicator light is not illuminated
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not
illuminated
For additional functions of the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 26.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle
doors, hood, tailgate, and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Ignition for unauthorized operation.
While the Vehicle Security system is armed, interior
switches for door locks and tailgate release are
disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the
Vehicle Security system will provide the following
audible and visible signals:
The horn will pulse.
The turn signals will flash.
The Vehicle Security Light, located in the upper
right corner of the instrument cluster display,
will flash.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in
the OFF position.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry,
make sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition
system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock
the vehicle:
Push the lock button on the interior power
door lock switch with the driver and/or
passenger door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a valid key fob avail-
able in the same exterior zone Ú page 31.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using
any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock
the door Ú page 31.
Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to
disarm the system.
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or
disarm the Vehicle Security system. Use of the
door key cylinder when the system is armed will
sound the alarm when the door is opened.
The Vehicle Security system remains armed
when the power tailgate (if equipped) is opened
using the tailgate button on the key fob.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and
can cause serious injury or death when
inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
If Passive Entry (if equipped) is used to unlock
the tailgate, the Vehicle Security system is
disarmed and the rest of the vehicle doors will
remain locked unless all doors are set to unlock
on first press within Uconnect Settings.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the
interior power door lock switches will not unlock
the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create conditions
where the system will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously described arming sequences has
occurred, the Vehicle Security system will arm
regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not.
If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the
alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle
Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
Security system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash,
and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm and no action is
taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system
will turn the horn off after a 29 second cycle
(with five seconds between cycles and up to eight
cycles if the trigger remains active) and then
rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock
the doors using the manual door lock.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
The power door locks can be manually locked from
inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To
lock each door, push the door lock knob on each
door trim panel downward. To unlock the front
doors, pull the inside door handle to the first
detent. To unlock the rear doors, pull the door lock
knob on the door trim panel upward. If the lock
knob is down when the door is closed, the door will
lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside
the vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE:
Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the
Vehicle Security system.
Front Door Lock Knob
Rear Door Lock Knob
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED
The power door lock switches are located on each
front door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock
the doors.
Power Door Lock Switches
The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the
key fob is detected inside the vehicle when the
door lock button on the front door panel is used to
lock the door. This will occur for two attempts.
Upon the third attempt, the doors will lock even if
the key fob is inside.
NOTE:
If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device, the wireless
signal may get blocked, and the driver’s door may
not unlock automatically.
If the door lock switch is pushed while the ignition
is in ACC or ON/RUN and the driver's door is open,
the doors will not lock.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle without first unlocking the door.
The door may be unlocked manually by raising the
lock knob.
POWER SIDE STEPS — IF EQUIPPED
The Power Side Steps will extend a step for easier
entry and exit of the vehicle.
When configured for Auto mode, the Power Side
Steps will deploy when any of the doors are
opened, or when the deploy setting is activated
through the touchscreen. When configured for
Store mode, the steps will not deploy unless the
setting is selected manually through the Controls
menu within the touchscreen.
If the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h), or if
the retract setting is selected within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 238, the steps will retract.
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the event
of a collision, lock the vehicle doors before you
drive as well as when you park and leave the
vehicle.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the keyless ignition is in the OFF position,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock
your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in
the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE
E
NTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s key fob and a feature of Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry. This feature allows
you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without
having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on or off
within Uconnect Settings Ú page 238.
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
Passive Entry system if it is located next to a
mobile phone, laptop, or other electronic device;
these devices may block the key fob’s wireless
signal and prevent the Passive Entry system
from locking/unlocking the vehicle.
Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated
approach (low beams, license plate lamp, posi-
tion lamps) for whichever duration is set
between 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds. Passive Entry
Unlock also initiates two flashes of the turn
signal lamps.
If wearing gloves, or if it has been
raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door
handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected,
resulting in a slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and
no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will relock and (if equipped) will arm the
Vehicle Security system.
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the door handle, grab the handle to
unlock the vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door
handle will unlock the driver door automatically.
Grabbing the passenger door handle will unlock all
doors and the tailgate automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock
when you grab hold of the front driver’s door
handle, depending on the selected setting in the
Uconnect system Ú page 238.
All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle,
the Passive Entry system is equipped with an
automatic door unlock feature which will function if
the ignition is in the OFF position.
There are five situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe
search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry
key fob while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel switch
while the door is open.
When the Vehicle Security system is in pre-arm
or armed status and the tailgate transitions
from open to closed.
When the tailgate transitions from open to
closed and remote start is active.
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
When any of these situations occur, after all open
doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be
executed. If it detects a Passive Entry key fob
inside the vehicle, the vehicle will unlock and alert
the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the
vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors when
any of the following conditions are true:
The doors are manually locked using the door
lock knobs.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then the doors
are closed.
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of a Passive Entry
door handle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Tailgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either front door handle,
pushing the Passive Entry lock button will lock the
vehicle.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
NOTE:
DO NOT grab the door handle when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the
door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you must
wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door
handle. This is done to allow you to check if the
vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle
without the vehicle unlocking.
If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect
Settings, the key protection described in
"Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)" remains active/functional.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the
key fob battery is depleted.
The LED light on the key fob will not blink if
the key fob battery is low or fully depleted,
but a low key fob battery condition will still
support the Passive Entry system function-
ality. When the key fob battery is low, the
instrument cluster will display a message
indicating that the key fob battery is low
Ú page 490.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON
E
XIT — IF EQUIPPED
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles
with power door locks after the following sequence
of actions:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is
enabled within the Uconnect system.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The gear selector was not in PARK, then is
placed in PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The auto door lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds
15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature is
enabled/disabled in the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 238.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children
riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are
equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock
system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat
blade screwdriver, and rotate the dial to the lock or
unlock position. When the system on a door is
engaged, that door can only be opened by using
the outside door handle even if the inside door lock
is in the unlocked position.
Child Lock Control
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using
the outside door handle even though the inside
door lock is in the unlocked position.
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the
inside to make certain it is in the unlocked
position.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the locked position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged,
pull up on the door lock knob (unlocked
position), roll down the window, and open the
door with the outside door handle.
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system on both rear doors, check for effective
engagement by trying to open a door with the
internal handle. Once the Child-Protection Door
Lock system is engaged, it is impossible to open
the doors from inside the vehicle. Before getting
out of the vehicle, be sure to check that there is no
one left inside.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the rear doors cannot
be opened from the inside door handle when the
Child Protection Door Locks are engaged.
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
STEERING WHEEL
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to
lengthen or shorten the steering column.
The tilt/telescoping lever is located on the steering
column, below the multifunction lever.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the control
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering
column, move the steering wheel upward or
downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the
steering column, pull the steering wheel outward
or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, push the control upward until
fully engaged.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
I
F EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating
element that helps warm your hands in
cold weather. The heated steering wheel
has only one temperature setting. Once
the heated steering wheel has been turned on, it
will stay on until the operator turns it off. The
heated steering wheel may not turn on when it is
already warm.
The heated steering wheel button is located on the
center of the instrument panel below the radio
screen, and within the Climate or Controls screen
of the touchscreen.
Press the heated steering wheel button once to
turn the heating element on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 26.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or
driving with the steering column unlocked, could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
conditions must exercise care when using the
steering wheel heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or steering wheel covers of any type or mate-
rial. This may cause the steering wheel heater
to overheat.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to save up to two
different memory profiles for easy recall through a
memory switch. Each memory profile saves
desired position settings for the following features:
Driver’s seat
Easy Entry/Exit seat operation (if equipped)
Adjustable pedals (if equipped)
Side mirrors
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each
can be linked to either memory position 1 or 2.
The driver memory settings switch is located on the
driver door, next to the door handle, and consists
of three buttons:
The set (S) button, which is used to activate the
memory save function.
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall
either of two saved memory profiles.
Memory Settings Switch
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase the
selected profile from memory.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN
position (do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., driver’s seat, outside mirrors,
adjustable pedals (if equipped), and radio
station presets).
3. Push the set (S) button on the memory switch,
and then push the desired memory button
(1 or 2) within five seconds. The instrument
cluster display will display which memory
position has been set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE KEY FOB
T
O MEMORY
Your key fob can be programmed to recall one of
two saved memory profiles.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fob you must select
the “Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” feature
through the Uconnect system Ú page 238.
To program your key fob, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
2. Select a desired memory profile 1 or 2.
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and
release the set (S) button on the memory
switch.
4. Push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly.
“Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the
instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key
fob within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked from your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, followed by
pushing the unlock button on the key fob within
10 seconds.
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in
PARK, a message will display in the instrument
cluster display.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or two,
push the desired memory button number (1 or 2)
or the unlock button on the key fob linked to the
desired memory position.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the
memory buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall.
When a recall is canceled, the driver seat will stop
moving. A delay of one second will occur before
another recall can be selected.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system
of the vehicle.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT
(F
RONT SEATS) — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be adjusted properly and you could
be injured. Adjust the seat only while the
vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally
injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle
is parked.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
Both front seats are adjustable forward or
rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle is
located under the seat cushion at the front edge of
each seat.
Manual Seat Adjustment Bar
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and
slide the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar
once you have reached the desired position. Then,
using body pressure, move forward and rearward
on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
The recline lever is located on the outboard side of
the seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly,
lift the lever, lean back to the desired position and
release the lever. To return the seatback to its
normal upright position, lean forward and lift the
lever. Release the lever once the seatback is in the
upright position.
Manual Recline Lever
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
WARNING!
Do not stand or lean in front of the seat while
actuating the handle. The seatback may swing
forward and hit you causing injury.
To avoid injury, place your hand on the seat-
back and actuate the handle, then position
the seatback in the desired position.
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Bench Seat — If Equipped
The seat is divided into three segments. The
outboard seat portions are each 40% of the total
width of the seat. If equipped, the back of the
center portion (20%) easily folds down to provide
an armrest/center storage compartment.
Center Portion Of Front Bench Seat
Center Portion Folded Forward
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
Reclining Rear Seats — If Equipped
The recliner handle is located on the front of the
rear outboard seat cushions. To adjust the
seatback, lift upward on the handle, and slide the
seat bottom forward. The lower portion of the
seatback will tilt rearward. When you reach the
desired position, release the handle.
Rear Seat Recliner Handle Locations
NOTE:
This feature is not available if vehicle is equipped
with rear bench seat.
POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with eight-way
power driver and passenger seats. The power seat
switches are located on the outboard side of the
driver and passenger seat cushions. There are two
power seat switches that are used to control the
movement of the seat cushion and the seatback.
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top
of the seatback. This could impair visibility or
become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop
or collision.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious injury
or death.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
(Continued)
Power Seat Switches
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward by using the power seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been
reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down
by using the power seat switch. The seat will move
in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up
or down using the power seat switch. The front of
the seat cushion will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward
or rearward by using the power seat switch. The
seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position is
reached.
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Seatback Switch
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat’s path.
WARNING!
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger
seats may also be equipped with a 2-way or a
4-way power lumbar adjustment. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of
the power seat. Push the switch forward to
increase the lumbar support. Push the switch
rearward to decrease the lumbar support.
If equipped with a 4-way adjustment, pushing
upward or downward on the switch will raise and
lower the position of the support.
Power Lumbar Switch
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat
positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver’s seat moves depends on
where you have the driver’s seat positioned when
you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position, the driver’s seat will move about
2.4 inches (6 cm) rearward if the driver’s seat
position is greater than or equal to 2.7 inches
(6.77 cm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will
return to its previously set position when you
place the ignition into the ACC or ON/RUN posi-
tion.
When you remove the key fob from the ignition,
the driver’s seat will move to a position
0.3 inches (0.77 cm) forward of the rear stop if
the driver’s seat position is between 0.9 inches
and 2.7 inches (2.27 cm and 6.77 cm) forward
of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previ-
ously set position when you place the ignition to
the ACC or ON/RUN position.
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled
when the driver’s seat position is less than
0.9 inches (2.27 cm) forward of the rear stop.
At this position, there is no benefit to the driver
by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry
and Easy Exit positions are stored in each memory
setting profile Ú page 35.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or disabled
through the programmable features in the
Uconnect system Ú page 238.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical
condition must exercise care when using the
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over-
heated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The heated seat control buttons are
located on the center stack below the
radio screen, or within the Uconnect
system.
Push the heated seat button once to turn the
HI setting on.
Push the heated seat button a second time to
turn the MED setting on.
Push the heated seat button a third time to turn
the LO setting on.
Push the heated seat button a fourth time to
turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 26.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the two rear outboard
seats may be equipped with heated
seats. There are two heated seat
switches that allow the rear passengers
to operate the seats independently. The heated
seat switches for each heater are located on the
rear of the center console.
You can choose from HI, MED, LO, or OFF heat
settings. Indicator lights in each switch indicate the
level of heat in use.
Push the heated seat button once to turn the
HI setting on.
Push the heated seat button a second time to
turn the MED setting on.
Push the heated seat button a third time to turn
the LO setting on.
Push the heated seat button a fourth time to
turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
VENTILATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Front Ventilated Seats
The ventilated seat control buttons are
located on the center stack below the
radio screen, or within the Uconnect
system. The fans operate at three
speeds, HI, MED and LO.
Press the ventilated seat button once to
choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat button a second time
to choose MED.
Press the ventilated seat button a third time to
choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat button a fourth time to
turn the ventilation off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 26.
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
If equipped, the two outboard rear seats
will have ventilated seats. The rear
ventilated seat control switches are
located on the rear of the center console.
The fans operate at three speeds: HI, MED, and LO.
Push the ventilated seat buttons to toggle through
the speeds, or to turn the feature off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
PLASTIC GROCERY BAG RETAINERS
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles are attached to the underside of the rear
seat cushion. To access these hooks, lift the rear
seat cushion upward.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of
injury by restricting head movement in the event of
a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted
so that the top of the head restraint is located
above the top of your ear.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the
rear of the head restraint face forward) in an
attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of
your head.
Front Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with front four-way driver
and passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button, located at the base of the
head restraint, and push downward on the head
restraint.
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only.
If either of the head restraints require removal, see
an authorized dealer.
Head Restraint Adjustment Button Location
To adjust the head restraint forward, pull the top of
the head restraint toward the front of the vehicle
as desired and release. To adjust the head
restraint rearward, pull the top of the head
restraint to the forward most position and release.
The head restraint will return to the rear most
position.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Upright Position
Forward Adjustment
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a front bench seat,
the center head restraint is not adjustable or
removable.
Rear Head Restraints
The outboard head restraints are non-adjustable,
but can be folded down for improved rearward
visibility. Push the button on the outboard side of
the head restraint to release. To return the head
restraint to its upright position, push up on the
head restraint until it locks back into place.
Release Button
The center head restraint is not adjustable or
removable.
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only.
If any of the head restraints require removal, see
an authorized dealer.
For child restraint tethering, see Ú page 342.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
WARNING!
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Always make sure the
outboard head restraints are in their upright
positions when the seat is to be occupied.
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION —
IF EQUIPPED
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice
Commands and tips you need to know to control
your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR) system.
This system is only available on the Uconnect 3
With 5-inch Display, Uconnect 5 NAV With 8.4-inch
Display, and the Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch
Display.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in the
Apps menu of your 8.4-inch touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect 5 NAV system. If not, you have a
Uconnect 5 with 8.4-inch display system.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following basic Voice Commands can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button or for the Uconnect
5/5 NAV, say the vehicle’s Wake Up word,
“Hey Uconnect”. After the beep, say:
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands.
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
NOTE:
On Uconnect 5 systems, the factory default Wake
Up word is set to “Hey Uconnect” and can be repro-
grammed through the Uconnect Settings.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate
your Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
1. Visit
UconnectPhone.com
to check mobile
device and feature compatibility and to find
phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead. The microphone is
located in the headliner and aimed at the
driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you
must first push either the VR or Phone button,
wait until after the beep, then say your Voice
Command. You can also say the vehicle “Wake
Up” word and state your command. Some
examples of “Wake Up” words include “Hey
Uconnect” or “Hey Ram”.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
5. You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button
and saying a Voice Command from the current
category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2022 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar
Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or
call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a
week)
Canadian residents visit
www.DriveUconnect.ca or call:
1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
SiriusXM Guardian™ services support:
US residents visit www.driveuconnect.com/
sirius-xm-guardian
or call: 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visit https://www.driveu-
connect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian
or call:
1-877-324-9091
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS —
IF EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow
a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel
tilt and seat position.
This feature allows the brake and accelerator
pedals to move toward or away from the driver to
provide improved position with the steering wheel.
The adjustable pedal switch is located on the
instrument panel, below the headlight switch.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is
in REVERSE or when the Cruise Control system or
Adaptive Cruise Control system is on. If there is an
attempt to adjust the pedals when the system is
locked out, the following messages will appear (on
vehicles equipped with an instrument cluster):
Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control
Engaged
Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse
1 — Push To Answer An Incoming Phone Call
2 — For The Uconnect 5/5 NAV System Vehicles
Equipped With Navigation: Push The Voice
Recognition Button To Begin Radio, Media,
Navigation, Climate, Start Or Answer A Phone Call,
And Send Or Receive A Text
2 — For The Uconnect 5/5 NAV System Vehicles
Not Equipped With Navigation: Push The Phone
Button To Answer An Incoming Phone Call
3 — Push The Hang-up Button To End A Call
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Always adjust the pedals to a position that
allows full movement of the pedal.
Further small adjustments may be necessary to
find the best possible seat/pedal position.
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Settings Ú page 35, you can use your key fob or
the memory switch on the driver’s door trim
panel to return the adjustable pedals to saved
positions.
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the
vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in
the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the
driver’s rear view.
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on
or off through the touchscreen.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is
moving. You could lose control and have an
accident. Always adjust the pedals while the
vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable
pedals or impede its ability to move, as it may
cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal
travel may become limited if movement is
stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable
pedal's path.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto
the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth
and wipe the mirror clean.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
Digital Rearview Mirror — If Equipped
The Digital Rearview Mirror provides a high
definition, wide and unobstructed view of the road
behind while driving.
Position the mirror in the regular Automatic
Dimming Mirror mode, then activate the Digital
Rearview Mirror mode.
To activate the Digital Rearview Mirror, pull the
on/off control lever on the bottom of the mirror
rearward toward the driver.
Digital Rearview Mirror
Push the menu button next to the on/off
control/toggle to access the following
mirror options:
Brightness
Tilt
Use the left and right buttons to scroll through
menu options.
When not in use, push the on/off forward toward
the windshield to return the mirror to the regular
Automatic Dimming Mirror.
NOTE:
The Digital Rearview Mirror is not as effective
during nighttime driving in low light applications
due to low ambient light levels. In the event that it
provides the user with less than expected vision,
the mirror can be reverted to a normal reflective
Automatic Dimming Mirror by pushing the
control/toggle forward in the vehicle and putting
the mirror into Automatic Dimming Mirror mode.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRROR
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down
one of the visors and lift the cover.
Lift Cover For Illuminated Mirror
“Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor —
If Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for
additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to
block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
1 — On/Off Control/Toggle
2 — Menu Button
3 — Left Scroll Button
4 — Right Scroll Button
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Extend the sun visor for additional sun
blockage.
“Slide-On-Rod” Extender
NOTE:
The sun visor can also be extended while the sun
visor is against the windshield for additional sun
blockage through the front of the vehicle.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center
of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the
optimal view.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with puddle lamps
under the outside mirrors, they can be turned off
through the Uconnect system Ú page 238.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved
either forward or rearward to resist damage. The
hinges have three detent positions:
Full forward position
Full rearward position
Normal position
OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC DIMMING
M
IRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The driver’s outside mirror and if equipped, the
passenger’s outside mirror, will automatically dim
for glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is
controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror.
The mirrors will automatically adjust for headlight
glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
POWER MIRRORS
The power mirror switch is located on the driver's
side door trim panel.
Power Mirror Controls
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on side
convex mirrors could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
CAUTION!
It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the
full rearward position to resist damage when
entering a car wash or a narrow location.
1 — Left Mirror Selection
2 — Mirror Direction Control
3 — Right Mirror Selection
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select
buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To
adjust a mirror, push the mirror select button for
the mirror that you want to adjust. Using the mirror
control switch, push on any of the four arrows for
the direction that you want the mirror to move.
Power Mirror Movement
Power mirror preselected positions can be
controlled by the optional Driver Memory Settings
feature Ú page 35.
POWER FOLDING OUTSIDE MIRRORS
F
OR STANDARD AND TRAILER TOW —
I
F EQUIPPED
The power folding mirrors can be folded rearward
and unfolded into the normal driving position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and
R (right). Push the switch once and the mirrors will
fold in, push the switch a second time and the
mirrors will return to the normal driving position.
If the mirror is manually folded after a powered
cycle, a potential extra button push is required to
get the mirrors back to the normal driving position.
If the mirror does not fold automatically, check for
ice or dirt buildup at the pivot area, which can
cause excessive drag.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if
the following occurs:
The mirrors are accidentally blocked
while folding.
The mirrors are accidentally manually
folded/unfolded (by hand or by pushing the
power folding mirror switch).
The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal
driving speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold
them by pushing the button (this may require
multiple attempts). This resets them to their
normal driving position.
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TRAILER TOWING MIRRORS —
I
F EQUIPPED
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable
mirror head to provide a greater vision range when
towing extra-wide loads. To change position
inboard or outboard, the mirror head should be
rotated (flipped in or out).
Trailer Towing Position
NOTE:
Fold the trailer towing mirrors prior to entering an
automated car wash.
A small blindspot mirror is located next to the main
mirror and can be adjusted manually.
Blindspot Mirror
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or
ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped) Ú page 64.
TILT SIDE MIRRORS IN REVERSE —
I
F EQUIPPED
This feature provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will assist with the driver’s
ground visibility. The outside mirrors will move
slightly downward from the present position when
the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside
mirrors will then return to the original position
when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE.
If the vehicle is equipped with Driver Memory
Settings, this feature will be linked to the
programmable settings.
NOTE:
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 238.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® Buttons
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
HomeLink® replaces up to
three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motor-
ized gates, lighting, or home
security systems. The HomeLink® unit is
powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
overhead console or sunvisor designate the
three different HomeLink® channels.
To operate HomeLink®, push and release any
of the programmed HomeLink® buttons. These
buttons will activate the devices they are
programmed to with each press of the corre-
sponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located above
the center button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security
system is active Ú page 490.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the Radio Frequency signal, it is
recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device that is being
programmed to the HomeLink® system. Make
sure your hand-held transmitter is programmed to
activate the device you are trying to program your
HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
garage before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels
of your HomeLink® before you use it for the first
time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until
the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed
when programming HomeLink® for the first time.
Do not erase channels when programming addi-
tional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether
the device has a rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a
good indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically,
devices manufactured after 1995 have rolling
codes. A device with a rolling code will also have a
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the
antenna is attached to the device. The button may
not be immediately visible when looking at the
device. The name and color of the button may vary
slightly by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button
you normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not
have a rolling code. These devices will also not
have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to
activate your garage door opener motor, refer to
the following steps:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels
when programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program, while
keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold the
garage door opener transmitter button you are
trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink®
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly.
Once this happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is
plugged in before moving on to the rolling
code/non-rolling code final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling
code final step 2, after completing rolling code
final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button. This can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the
garage door opener motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button three times
(holding the button for two seconds each
time). If the garage door opener motor
operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor
does not operate, repeat the final steps for the
rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the HomeLink® indicator
light. If the HomeLink® indicator light stays
on constantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor
does not operate, repeat the steps from the
beginning.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the universal
transmitter. Do not program the transmitter
if people or pets are in the path of the door
or gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or
confined area while programming the trans-
mitter. Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous
when inhaled and can cause you and others to
be severely injured or killed.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a
miscellaneous device follows the same procedure
as programming to a garage door opener
Ú page 52. Be sure to determine if the device has
a rolling code, or non-rolling code before beginning
the programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require trans-
mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission, which may not be long
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some
U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the
same manner. The procedure may need to be
performed multiple times to successfully pair the
device to your HomeLink® buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has
been previously trained, without erasing all the
channels, refer to the following procedure. Be sure
to determine whether the new device you want to
program the HomeLink® button to has a rolling
code, or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
without starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button
until the HomeLink® indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A
Garage Door Opener” Ú page 52, and follow
all remaining steps.
CANADIAN /GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United
States that require the transmitter signals to
“time-out” after several seconds of transmission:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission, which may not be
long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal
during programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out
in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating of
the garage door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™,
place the ignition in the RUN position. Make sure
while programming HomeLink® with the engine on
that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that
the garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button
you wish to program while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink®
button while you push and release (cycle) your
hand-held transmitter every two seconds until
HomeLink® has successfully accepted the
frequency signal. The indicator light will flash
slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change
flash rates. When it changes, it is
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or
longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pushed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each
remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device
for programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button
until the indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step
2 and follow all remaining steps.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or
turn in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons
for 20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note
that all channels will be erased. Individual
channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled
when the Vehicle Security system is active.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming
HomeLink®, here are some of the most common
solutions:
Replace the battery in the garage door opener
hand-held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the garage door
opener to complete the training for a
rolling code.
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the
Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or
assistance.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the
garage while programming the transceiver.
Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the universal
transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if
people, pets or other objects are in the path of
the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with
a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by Federal safety
standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do
not use a garage door opener without these
safety features.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights,
automatic headlights (if equipped), instrument
panel light dimming, cargo light/trailer spotter
lights (if equipped), and fog lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a head-
light switch with an AUTO and ON detent but
without an OFF detent. Headlights will be deacti-
vated when the headlight switch is placed in the
parking lights position. However, the Daytime
Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along with
the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be
deactivated when the parking brake is engaged.
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is on,
the parking lights, taillights, license plate light and
instrument panel lights are also turned on. To turn
off the headlights, rotate the headlight switch back
to the O (off) position.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise from the parking lights and
instrument panel lights position to the first detent
to turn on headlights, parking lights, and
instrument panel lights. Rotate the headlight
switch to the second detent for the AUTO position.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight
and fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter
and less susceptible to stone breakage than
glass lights. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as
glass and therefore different lens cleaning
procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Fog Light Switch
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
5 — Push Cargo Light Switch
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Fog Switch
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
5 — Push Cargo Light Switch
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other abrasive materials
to clean the lenses.
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of
the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS)
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) come on
whenever the engine is running, and the low
beams are not on. The lights will remain on until
the ignition is placed in the OFF or ACC position, or
the parking brake is engaged.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime
Running Lights will automatically deactivate
when the front fog lights are turned on.
If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased, the Daytime Running
Lights can be turned on and off using the Ucon-
nect system Ú page 238.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights
may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side
of the vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on
that side), or on both sides of the vehicle
(when the hazard warning lights are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beams.
Pulling the multifunction lever back will turn the
low beams on.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP
C
ONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at night
by automating high beam control through the use
of a camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror
or a windshield mounted camera. These cameras
detect vehicle specific light and automatically
switch from high beams to low beams until the
approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
can be turned on or off by selecting “ON” under
“Auto Dim High Beams” within your Uconnect
Settings Ú page 238, as well as turning the
headlight switch to the AUTO position.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to
the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstruc-
tions on the windshield or camera lens will
cause the system to function improperly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Head-
lamp Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must
be re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See
a local authorized dealer.
To opt out of the Advanced Auto High Beam
Sensitivity Control (default) and enter
Reduced High Beam Sensitivity Control
(not recommended), toggle the high beam lever
six full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of
placing the ignition in the ON position.
The system will return to the default setting
upon placing the ignition in the OFF position.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights
by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you.
This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on,
and remain on, until the lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns the headlights on
or off according to ambient light levels. To turn
the system on, rotate the headlight switch to the
AUTO position.
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature
is also on. This means the headlights will stay on
for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition
into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
headlights off, turn the headlight switch out of the
AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights
will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
PARKING LIGHTS AND PANEL LIGHTS
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel
lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To
turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight
switch back to the O (off) position.
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a head-
light switch with an AUTO and ON detent but
without an OFF detent. Headlights will be deacti-
vated when the headlight switch is placed in the
parking lights position. However, the Daytime
Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along with
the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be
deactivated when the parking brake is engaged.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS WITH WIPERS
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic
Headlights, it also has this
customer-programmable feature. When your
headlights are in the automatic mode and the
engine is running, they will automatically turn on
when the wiper system is on. This feature is
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 238.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Rain Sensing
Wiper system Ú page 63, and it is activated, the
headlights will automatically turn on after the
wipers complete five wipe cycles within
approximately one minute. They will turn off
approximately four minutes after the wipers
completely stop.
NOTE:
When your headlights come on during the daytime,
the instrument panel lights will automatically dim
to the lower nighttime intensity.
HEADLIGHT DELAY
To assist when exiting the vehicle, the headlight
delay feature will leave the headlights on for up to
90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the
ignition is placed in the OFF position while the
headlight switch is on, and then the headlight
switch is cycled off. Headlight delay can be
canceled by either turning the headlight switch
on then off, or by placing the ignition in the
ON position.
NOTE:
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system Ú page 238.
The headlight delay feature is automatically
activated if the headlight switch is left in the
AUTO position when the ignition is placed in the
OFF position.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are
left on after the ignition is placed in the OFF
position, the vehicle will chime when the driver’s
door is opened.
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or low beam headlights and push the fog
light switch located within the headlight switch.
Pushing the fog light switch a second time will turn
the front fog lights off.
Fog Light Button
Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
The fog lights will operate only when the parking
lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are on
low beam. An indicator light located in the
instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog
lights are on. The fog lights will turn off when the
button is pushed a second time, when the
headlight switch is rotated to the O (off) position, or
the high beam is selected.
If the fog lights are off, one of the fog lights will
illuminate depending on the direction in which the
vehicle is turning. This will provide increased
visibility while turning, depending on the angle of
the steering wheel.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to
activate the turn signals. The arrows on each side
of the instrument cluster flash to show proper
operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective
outside light bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal will flash three times then automatically
turn off.
CARGO LIGHTS/TRAILER SPOTTER
L
IGHTS/TRAILER HITCH LIGHT WITH
B
ED LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The cargo light, bed lights, trailer spotter lights, and
trailer hitch light are turned on by pushing the
cargo light button located on the lower half of the
headlight switch.
Cargo/Bed Lights Button On Headlight Switch
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
Cargo/Bed Lights Button On Headlight Switch
(Vehicles Sold In Canada)
Cargo Lights
When the vehicle is stationary, these lights can
also be turned on using the switch located just
inside the pickup box, on the lower part of the bed
light lens. A telltale will illuminate in the instrument
cluster display when these lights are on. Pushing
the switch a second time will turn the lights off.
Bed Light Switch (Without RamBox)
The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) will turn
on for approximately 30 seconds when a key fob
unlock button is pushed, as part of the Illuminated
Entry feature.
When these lights are activated using the button
on the headlight switch the cargo lights, trailer
spotter lights, and trailer hitch light will remain
illuminated when the vehicle transmission is in
PARK, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE. The lights will
turn off when the vehicle transmission is placed
in DRIVE.
When the vehicle is placed in the REVERSE
position, the trailer hitch light will turn on
automatically. The trailer hitch light will turn off
when the vehicle is placed in the DRIVE position.
NOTE:
The bed lights are not affected by gear selection.
NOTE:
For vehicles shipped to or sold in the states of Cali-
fornia or Mississippi, the cargo, bed, and mirror
spotter lights will not work while the vehicle is in
motion. In every other state, the cargo and mirror
spotter lights will turn off when the vehicle is in
motion, but the bed light will remain on.
BATTERY SAVER
Timers are set to both the interior and exterior
lights to protect the life of your vehicle’s battery.
After 10 minutes, if the ignition is OFF and any door
is left open or the dimmer control is rotated all the
way up to the topmost position, the interior lights
will automatically turn off.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is ON.
The headlights will automatically turn off after
eight minutes while the ignition is in the OFF
position.
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERIOR LIGHTS
COURTESY LIGHTS
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the
doors are opened or the Dome ON button is
pushed on the overhead console. If your vehicle is
equipped with Remote Keyless Entry and the
unlock button is pushed on the key fob, the
courtesy and dome lights will turn on. When a door
is open and the interior lights are on, and the Dome
Defeat button on the overhead console is pressed,
the interior lights will turn off.
Front Map/Reading Lights
The overhead console lights can also be operated
individually as reading lights by pushing the
corresponding buttons.
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
Three types of rear courtesy/reading lights are
available for your vehicle.
Push button on/off
Push lens on/off
Push round puck lens on/off
(if equipped with Dual Pane Sunroof)
1 — Reading Light On/Off Buttons
2 — Dome Defeat Button
3 — Dome ON Button
1 — Driver’s Reading Light On/Off Button
2 — Dome Defeat Button
3 — Passenger’s Reading Light On/Off Button
4 — Dome On Button
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
NOTE:
The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until the
switch is pushed a second time, so be sure they
have been turned off before exiting the vehicle.
If the interior lights are left on after the ignition is
turned off, they will automatically turn off after
10 minutes.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer controls are inboard and adjacent to
the headlight switch located on the left side of the
instrument panel.
Dimmer Controls
Dimmer Controls (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating
the instrument panel dimmer control upward will
increase the brightness of the instrument panel
lights. Rotating the ambient dimmer control will
adjust the interior and ambient light levels when
the headlights are on.
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control
downward to the O (off) position, and the interior
lights will remain off when the doors are open.
Rotating the instrument panel dimmer control all
the way upward, past the detent, will turn on the
interior lights. The interior lights will remain on
when the dimmer control is in this position.
Dimming Of The Uconnect Touchscreen
The brightness of the Uconnect touchscreen can
be dimmed using the instrument panel dimmer
control when the parking lights or headlights
are on.
When Display Mode is set to Auto within the
Uconnect system, the brightness will automatically
adjust from daytime intensity to nighttime intensity
(and vice versa) based on ambient light levels
outside of the vehicle.
NOTE:
The brightness of the Uconnect touchscreen
cannot be adjusted when the instrument panel
dimmer control is rotated to the upper most
detent, even when Display Mode is set to Auto
within the Uconnect Settings.
When Display Mode is set to Manual, the
brightness of the Uconnect touchscreen will adjust
to the set brightness (1 - 6) when the headlights
are either on or off. For more information on these
Uconnect Settings, see Ú page 238.
1 — Ambient Light Control (If Equipped)
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
1 — Ambient Light Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
key fob to unlock the doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lamps
located beneath the outside mirrors (if equipped).
The lights will fade to off after approximately
30 seconds, or they will immediately fade to off
once the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN
position from the OFF position.
The front courtesy overhead console and door
courtesy lights will not turn off if the Dome ON
button on the overhead console is pushed.
The overhead and door courtesy lights will turn off
after 10 minutes when the ignition is placed in the
OFF position to protect the battery.
The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
Dome Defeat button on the overhead console is
pushed.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with Illuminated
Approach lights under the outside mirrors, they will
also be turned off by pushing the Dome Defeat
button.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located
on the multifunction lever on the left side of the
steering column. The front wipers are operated by
rotating a switch, located on the end of the lever.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Intermittent Wipers
The intermittent feature of this system was
designed for use when weather conditions make a
single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between
cycles, desirable. For maximum delay between
cycles, rotate the control knob upward to the first
detent.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the
knob until it enters the low continual speed
position. The delay can be regulated from a
maximum of about 18 seconds between cycles, to
a cycle every one second. The delay intervals will
double in duration when the vehicle speed is
10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push the washer
knob, located on the end of the multifunction lever,
inward and hold. Washer fluid will be sprayed and
the wiper will operate for two to three cycles after
the washer knob is released.
If the washer knob is pushed while in the delay
range, the wiper will operate for several seconds
after the washer knob is released. It will then
resume the intermittent interval previously
selected. If the washer knob is pushed while in the
off position, the wiper will turn on and cycle
approximately three times after the washer knob is
released.
1 — Push End Inward (Hold For Washer Or Short
Press For Mist)
2 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture
that meets or exceeds the temperature range of
your climate. This rating information can be found
on most washer fluid containers.
Mist
When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray
from a passing vehicle is needed, push the washer
knob, located on the end of the multifunction lever,
inward briefly and release. The wipers will cycle
one time and automatically shut off.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on
the windshield. The wash function must be used in
order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement,
see Ú page 427.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the
windshield and automatically activates the wipers.
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of
four detent positions to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with
the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is
the least sensitive, and wiper delay detent position
four is the most sensitive.
Wiper delay position three should be used for
normal rain conditions.
Positions one and two can be used if the driver
desires less wiper sensitivity. Position four can be
used if the driver desires more sensitivity. Place
the wiper switch in the O (off) position when not
using the system.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when
the wiper switch is in the low or high-speed
position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function
properly when ice, or dried salt water is present
on the windshield.
Use of products containing wax or silicone may
reduce Rain Sensing performance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and
off using the Uconnect system Ú page 238.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features
for the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate
under the following conditions:
Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition
is first placed in the ON position, the Rain
Sensing system will not operate until the wiper
switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h), or the outside temperature is
greater than 32°F (0°C).
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission
is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing
system will not operate until the wiper switch is
moved, vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h), or the gear selector is moved out of
the NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with a Remote Start system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden
icing of the windshield during freezing weather,
warm the windshield with the defroster before
and during windshield washer use.
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate
the temperature, air flow, and direction of air
circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are
located on the touchscreen, on the sides of the
touchscreen, or on the instrument panel below the
radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 5 or 5 NAV With 8.4-inch Display
Automatic Temperature Controls
Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display
Automatic Temperature Controls
NOTE:
Icons and descriptions can vary based upon
vehicle equipment.
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on
the touchscreen to change the current
setting to the coldest output of air.
The MAX A/C indicator illuminates when
MAX A/C is on. Pressing the button again will cause
the MAX A/C operation to exit.
NOTE:
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
performance.
The MAX A/C button is only available on the
touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate to change the current setting.
The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C
is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate, to change the system between
Recirculation mode and outside air
mode. The Recirculation indicator and the A/C
indicator illuminate when the Recirculation button
is pressed. Recirculation can be used when
outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or
high humidity are present. Recirculation can be
used in all modes. Recirculation may be
unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed
out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on
the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
deselected manually without disturbing the mode
control selection. Continuous use of the
Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy
and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
this mode is not recommended. Recirculation
mode may automatically adjust to optimize
customer experience for warming, cooling,
dehumidification, etc.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
feature may be unavailable if conditions exist that
could create fogging on the inside of the
windshield.
Auto Button
Set your desired temperature and press
AUTO. AUTO will achieve and maintain
your desired temperature by
automatically adjusting the blower speed
and air distribution. Air Conditioning (A/C) may be
active during AUTO operation to improve
performance. AUTO mode is highly recommended
for efficiency.
You can turn AUTO on in one of two ways:
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen.
Push the button on the faceplate.
Toggling this function will cause the system to
switch between manual mode and automatic
mode Ú page 69.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push and
release the button on the faceplate, to
change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator
illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air comes
from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the
blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting and
defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode
button, the climate system will return to the
previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push and
release the button on the faceplate, to
turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear
Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners
on the interior surface of the window. Use a
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can
be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And
Down Buttons
These buttons provide the driver and passenger
with independent temperature control.
Push the red button (or rotate knob if
equipped) on the faceplate, press the red
button on the touchscreen, or press and
slide the temperature bar towards the
red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings.
Push the blue button (or rotate knob if
equipped) on the faceplate, press the
blue button on the touchscreen, or press
and slide the temperature bar towards
the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for
cooler temperature settings.
NOTE:
The numbers within the temperature display will
only appear if the system is equipped with an
automatic climate control system.
Up and down buttons are only available on vehi-
cles equipped with a 12-inch display.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature
on/off. The SYNC indicator illuminates
when SYNC is on. SYNC synchronizes the
passenger temperature setting with the driver
temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s
temperature setting while in SYNC will
automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of
air forced through the climate control
system. There are seven blower speeds
available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation.
The speeds can be selected using either the
blower control knob on the faceplate or the
buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower
setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn
the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower
setting and the large blower icon to increase the
blower setting. Blower can also be selected by
pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode
buttons on the touchscreen, or pushing
the Mode button on the faceplate, to
change the airflow distribution mode.
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so
air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets, defrost outlets, and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these outlets
can be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. The air vanes of the center
outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister
outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
and side window demister outlets. This
setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the
windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on the
touchscreen, or push the OFF button on
the faceplate (if equipped) to turn the
Climate Control on/off.
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Manual Temperature Controls
MAX A/C Setting
Set the temperature control knob to the
MAX A/C setting to change the current
setting to the coldest output of air.
Moving the temperature control knob
away from the MAX A/C setting causes the
MAX A/C operation to exit.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air
Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator
illuminates when A/C is on.
NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in
Mix, Floor or Defrost mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower
speed if needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C
condenser (located in front of the radiator), for
an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a
gentle water spray from the front of the radiator
and through the condenser.
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Recirculation Button
Push the Recirculation button to change
the system between recirculation mode
and outside air mode. The Recirculation
indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate
when the Recirculation button is pressed.
Recirculation can be used when outside
conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in
all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be
unavailable if conditions exist that could create
fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C
can be deselected manually without disturbing the
mode control selection. Continuous use of the
Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy
and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
this mode is not recommended.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls, the
Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode
to improve window cleaning operation.
Recirculation is disabled automatically if this mode
is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while
in this mode causes the LED in the control button
to blink and then turn off.
Front Defrost Setting
Turn the mode control knob to the Front
Defrost mode setting. Air comes from the
windshield and side window demist
outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level may increase.
Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature
settings for best windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost
Control button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
illuminates when the rear window defroster is on.
The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after 10 minutes.
Temperature Control
Temperature Control regulates the temperature of
the air forced through the climate system.
The temperature increases as you turn
the temperature control knob clockwise.
The temperature decreases as you turn
the temperature control knob
counterclockwise.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of
air forced through the climate control
system. There are seven blower speeds
available. The blower speed increases as
you turn the blower control knob clockwise from
the lowest blower setting. The blower speed
decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
Mode Control
Turn the mode control knob or press the
mode control button (if equipped) to
adjust airflow distribution. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners
on the interior surface of the window. Use a
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can
be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these outlets
can be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. The air vanes of the center
outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister
outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
and side window demister outlets. This
setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the
windshield.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC) — I
F EQUIPPED
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the
AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would
like the system to maintain by adjusting the
driver and passenger temperature control
buttons. Once the desired temperature is
displayed, the system will achieve and
automatically maintain that temperature.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature, mode,
and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly
as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in US or
Metric units by selecting the US/Metric
customer-programmable feature within
Uconnect Settings Ú page 238.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the blower
fan will remain on low until the engine warms up.
The blower will increase in speed and transition
into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system is
being used in the manual mode.
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CLIMATE VOICE RECOGNITION —
I
F EQUIPPED
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the
beep, say one of the following commands:
“Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did you know: Voice Command for Climate may
only be used to adjust the interior temperature of
your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to
adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if
equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with
a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper
corrosion protection and to protect against engine
overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling
system is functioning properly and the proper
amount, type, and concentration of coolant is
used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during
Winter months is not recommended, because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control
system when the vehicle is being stored for an
extended period of time, see Ú page 472.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild,
rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase
the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods,
as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of
the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as
leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may
reduce airflow, and if they enter the air distribution
box, they could plug the water drains. In Winter
months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to
service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced
when needed.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system
may automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin
comfort. Customer settings will be maintained
upon return to an engine running condition.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
Operating Tips Chart
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel and
features both an upper and lower storage area.
Glove Compartment
If equipped with a covered upper glove
compartment, push the release button to open.
To open the lower glove compartment, pull the
release handle.
Door Storage — If Equipped
Front Door Storage
Storage areas are located in the door trim panels.
Rear Door Storage
Storage areas are located in the door trim panels.
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather
And Vehicle
Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode), (A/C) on,
and blower on high. Roll down
the windows for a minute to
flush out the hot air. Adjust
the controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and set the
mode control to
(Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny
Operate in (Bi-Level Mode).
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode) and turn
(A/C) on to keep
windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode). If windshield
fogging starts to occur, move
the control to (Mix Mode).
1 — Upper Glove Compartment Release Button
(If Equipped)
2 — Upper Glove Compartment
3 — Lower Glove Compartment
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove
compartment in the open position. Driving with
the glove compartment open may result in injury
in a collision.
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Center Storage Compartment —
If Equipped
The center storage compartment is located
between the driver and passenger seats. The
storage compartment provides an armrest and
contains both an upper and lower storage area.
Center Storage Compartment
Pull on the upper handle on the front of the
armrest to raise the cover. The upper storage area
contains a USB power outlet that can be used to
power small electrical devices.
Center Storage Compartment
Upper Storage USB Outlet
WARNING!
This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on
the armrest could be seriously injured during
vehicle operation, or a collision.
In a collision, the latch may open if the total
weight of the items stored exceeds about
10 lb (4.5 kg). These items could be thrown
about endangering occupants of the vehicle.
Items stored should not exceed a total
of 10 lb (4.5 kg).
1 — Upper Console Handle
2 — Lower Console Handle
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
With the upper lid closed, pull on the lower handle
to open the lower storage bin. The lower bin
contains a power inverter. There is also a “fill line”
located along the rear inside wall of the lower bin.
Contents above the “fill line” may interfere with
cupholder placement if equipped with a premium
center console.
Forward Portion Of Lower Storage Bin
Premium Center Console — If Equipped
The premium center console is equipped with two
front storage bins located in front of the center
storage compartment. These storage bins may be
equipped with tandem doors. Push the front bin to
access the cupholders. Or push the rear bin to
access the coin holder/small storage bin.
Center Console Tandem Doors— If Equipped
Tandem Doors Open Position
1 — Wireless Charging Pad
2 — Power Inverter
3 — Storage Area
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position. Driving
with the console compartment lid open may
result in injury in a collision.
1 — Push Front Bin Access
2 — Push Rear Bin Access
1 — Front Bin Open
2 — Rear Bin Open
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Push the release button at the front of the
cupholder bin to slide tray rearward to access the
front lower storage bin, or forward to access the
rear lower storage bin.
Push Release Button To Slide Tray
Overhead Sunglass Storage
At the front of the overhead console, a
compartment is provided for the storage of one
pair of sunglasses.
From the closed position, push the door latch to
open the compartment.
Overhead Sunglass Door
Front Bench Seat Storage — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with a front bench seat,
storage can be found by folding down the center
seatback. A console storage area and cupholders
are available.
Front Bench Seat Storage
With the seatback in the upright position, lift the
center seat bottom to access additional storage
underneath the seat.
Below Seat Bottom Storage
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
There is a storage drawer located in the lower
center of the instrument panel (if equipped). It can
be released by pushing the access button above it.
Pull drawer outward to the fully open position.
Storage Drawer Access Button
Rear Console Storage — If Equipped
The center portion of the 40/20/40 rear seat will
fold forward for rear seat cupholders and a storage
compartment. Lift up on the console latch to
access the storage compartment.
Rear Console Latch Location
Seatback Storage
Located in the back of both the driver and
passenger front seats are pockets that can be
used for storage.
Seatback Storage
Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin —
If Equipped
In-floor storage bins are located in front of the
second row seats and can be used for extra
storage. The storage bins have removable liners
that can be easily removed for cleaning.
To open the in-floor storage bin, lift upward on the
handle of the latch and open the lid.
In-Floor Storage Bin Latch
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The front seat may have to be moved forward to
fully open the lid.
Opened Storage Bin
Each storage bin also contains two hooks for
securing cargo. These hooks should be used to
secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving.
In-Floor Storage Bin Hooks
NOTE:
The maximum load limit for each hook
is 250 lb (113 kg).
Storage Under Rear Seat — If Equipped
To access the storage under the rear seats,
unlatch the lock mechanism in the center of the
seat base by rotating it to either side, and fold the
front of the seat base forward.
Folding Down Front Of Seat Base
Flip the inside of the base upward into the upright
position, locking into place, creating and extended
storage area.
Fully Extended Storage Area
NOTE:
The rear seats do not need to be folded up to
access this feature.
USB/AUX C ONTROL
Located on the center stack, just below the
instrument panel, is the main media hub. There
are four total USB ports: Two Mini-USBs (Type C)
and two Standard USBs (Type A). There is also an
AUX port located in the middle of the USB ports.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port may
activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
features, if equipped. For further information, refer
to “Android Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in the
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
1 — Lock Mechanism
2 — Front Of Seat Base
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
NOTE:
Two devices can be plugged in at the same time,
and both ports will provide charging capabilities.
Only one port can transfer data to the system at a
time. A pop-up will appear and allow you to select
the device transferring data.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A
USB port and another device is plugged into the
Type C USB port, a message will appear and allow
you to select which device to use.
Center Stack USB/AUX Media Hub
The third and fourth USB ports are located behind
the center console, above the power inverter. Both
are charge only.
Rear USB Ports
Applicable to only Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 8.4-inch
Display, and Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display
radios, different scenarios are listed below when a
non-phone device is plugged into the smaller and
larger USB ports, and when a phone device is
plugged into the smaller and larger USB ports:
“A new device is now connected.
Previous connection was lost”.
“(Phone Name) now connected.
Previous connection was lost”.
“Another device is in use through the same
USB port. Please disconnect the first device to
use the second device”.
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only
USB ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into
a Media USB port, a message will display on the
touchscreen that the device is not supported by
the system.
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may
cause the connection to a previous device to
be lost.
1 — Standard USB Type A Port #1
2 — AUX Port
3 — Standard USB Type A Port #2
1 — Rear Charge Only USB Ports 1
2 — Rear Charge Only USB Ports 2
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If equipped, your vehicle may also contain a USB
port located on the top tray of the vehicle’s center
console.
If equipped, two Mini-USB ports (Type C), two
Standard USB ports (Type A), and one AUX port
may be located to the left of the center stack, just
below the climate controls.
Center Console USB/AUX Media Hub
Some USB ports support media and charging.
You can use features, such as Apple CarPlay®,
Android Auto™, Pandora®, and others while
charging your phone.
NOTE:
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may
cause the connection to a previous device to
be lost.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement or visit
UconnectPhone.com .
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet can
provide power for in-cab accessories designed for
use with the standard “cigarette lighter” style plug.
The 12 Volt power outlets and 5 Volt (2.5 Amp) USB
Port (Charge Only) have a cap attached to the
outlet indicating “12V DC”, together with either a
key symbol, battery symbol, or USB symbol.
A key symbol indicates that the ignition must be in
the ON/RUN or ACC positions for the outlet to
provide power. The battery symbol indicates that
the outlet is connected to the battery, and can
provide power at all times.
An auxiliary power outlet can be found in the tray
on top of the center stack. This power outlet
only works when the ignition is in the ON/RUN or
ACC position.
Power Outlet — Top Of Center Stack
1 — Standard USB Type A Ports
2 — Mini-USB Type C Ports
3 — AUX Port
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum power of
160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the
160 Watts (13 Amps) power rating is
exceeded, the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlets as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
The auxiliary power outlet can be changed to
battery powered at all times by switching the power
outlet fuses in the Internal Power Distribution
Center located under the driver’s side instrument
panel.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
When the vehicle is turned off, be sure to unplug
any equipment as to not drain the battery of the
vehicle. All accessories connected to the outlet(s)
should be removed or turned off when the vehicle
is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
1 — F54 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Battery
Fed Position
2 — F54 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Ignition
Fed Position
3 — F48 Fuse 10 A Red Port Power or Rear USB
(Charge Only)
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery, even when
not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventu-
ally, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine
from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will
discharge the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories,
or long periods of the vehicle not being started
(with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle
must be driven a sufficient length of time
to allow the generator to recharge the
vehicle's battery.
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
A 115 Volt (400 Watts maximum) inverter may be
located inside the center console towards the right
hand side. This inverter can power cellular phones,
electronics and other low power devices requiring
power up to 400 Watts. Certain video game
consoles exceed this power limit, as will most
power tools.
Center Console Power Inverter Outlet
There is also a second 115 Volt (400 Watts
maximum) power inverter located on the rear of
the center console. This inverter can power cellular
phones, electronics and other low power devices
requiring power up to 400 Watts. Certain video
game consoles exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
All power inverters are designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
400 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter shuts
down. Once the electrical device has been
removed from the outlet the inverter should reset.
Rear Center Console Power Inverter Outlet
NOTE:
400 Watts is the maximum for the inverter, not
each outlet. If three outlets are in use, 400 Watts
is shared amongst the devices plugged in.
If equipped with a front bench seat, there may be
a 115 Volt (400 Watts maximum) inverter located
to the right of the center stack, just below the
climate controls. This inverter can power cellular
phones, electronics and other low power devices
requiring power up to 400 Watts. Certain video
game consoles exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
Center Stack Power Inverter
To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in a device.
The outlet turns off when the device is unplugged.
NOTE:
The Center Stack Power Inverter is only
available on vehicles equipped with a front
bench seat.
The power inverter only turns on if the ignition is
in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
Due to built-in overload protection, the power
inverter shuts down if the power rating is
exceeded.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD —
I
F EQUIPPED
Wireless Charging Pad
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi
wireless charging pad located inside of the center
console. This charging pad is designed to
wirelessly charge your Qi enabled mobile phone.
Qi is a standard that allows wireless charging of
your mobile phone.
Your mobile phone must be designed for
Qi wireless charging. If the phone is not equipped
with Qi wireless charging functionality, an
aftermarket sleeve or a specialized back plate can
be purchased from your mobile phone provider or
a local electronics retailer. Please see your
phone’s owner’s manual for further information.
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an
anti-slip mat, a cradle to hold your mobile phone in
place, and an LED indicator light.
LED Indicator Status:
NOTE:
Using a phone case may interfere with wireless
charging.
No Light: Charging pad is idle or searching
for a device.
Blue Light: Device is detected, and is charging.
Red Light/Flashing: Internal error, or foreign
object is detected.
NOTE:
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN or START
position and all vehicle doors must be closed for
the wireless charging pad to operate.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
The key fob should not be placed on the
charging pad or within 6 inches (15 cm) of it.
Doing so can cause excessive heat buildup and
damage to the fob. Placing the fob in close
proximity of the charging pad blocks the fob from
being detected by the vehicle and prevents the
vehicle from starting.
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
The window controls on the driver's door control all
the door windows.
Power Window Switches
The passenger door windows can also be operated
by using the single window controls on the
passenger door trim panel. The window controls
will operate only when the ignition is in the ACC
or ON/RUN position.
To open the window part way (manually), push the
window switch down briefly and release.
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the
OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature. The timing is programmable within
Uconnect Settings Ú page 238.
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and front passenger door power window
switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the
window switch down briefly, then release, and the
window will go down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push
down on the switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up briefly and release; the
window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
switch briefly and release it when you want the
window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go
back down. Remove the obstacle and use the
window switch again to close the window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly
during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch
lightly and hold to close the window manually.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by
the windows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers
and all objects from the window path before
closing.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
RESET AUTO-UP
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window probably needs to be reset. To reset
Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up
for an additional two seconds after the
window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open
the window completely and continue to hold
the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on
the rear passenger doors. To disable the window
controls, push and release the window lockout
button (the indicator light on the button will turn
on). To enable the window controls, push and
release the window lockout button again (the
indicator light on the button will turn off).
Window Lockout Switch
POWER SLIDING REAR WINDOW —
I
F EQUIPPED
The switch for the power sliding rear window is
located on the overhead console. Push the switch
rearward to open the glass. Pull the switch forward
to close the glass.
Rear Window Switch
MANUAL SLIDING REAR WINDOW —
I
F EQUIPPED
A locking device in the center of the window helps
to prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle.
Squeeze the lock to release the window.
Manual Rear Window Lock
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception
of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound
in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting
with the windows down, or the sunroof (if
equipped) in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be
minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting
occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
SINGLE PANE POWER SUNROOF —
I
F EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located on the
overhead console between the courtesy/reading
lights.
Power Sunroof Switches
Opening And Closing The Sunroof
Express Open/Close
Push the switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will open
automatically from any position. The sunroof will
open fully and stop automatically.
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close
automatically from any position. The sunroof will
close fully and stop automatically.
During Express Open or Express Close operation,
any other movement of the sunroof switch will stop
the sunroof.
1 — Opening/Closing Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children. Do not leave
the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ACC or
ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the
power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may
result in serious injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body
parts, or any object, to project through the
sunroof opening. Injury may result.
WARNING!
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
Manual Open/Close
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
rearward to full open.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in
the forward position.
Any release of the switch during open or close
operation will stop the sunroof movement.
The sunroof will remain in a partially opened
position until the switch is operated and
held again.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when
Express or Manual Open operation is initiated the
sunshade will automatically open to the half open
position prior to the sunroof opening.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
opening of the sunroof during Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically
retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will
disable and the sunroof must be closed in
Manual Mode.
Venting Sunroof
Push and release the Vent button within one half
second and the sunroof will open to the vent
position. This is called “Express Vent”, and it will
occur regardless of sunroof position. During
Express Vent operation, any other actuation of the
switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However,
the sunshade will open automatically as the
sunroof opens.
NOTE:
The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof
is open.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up
to approximately 10 minutes after the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature.
NOTE:
Ignition Off timing is programmable through the
Uconnect system Ú page 238.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and
clear out any debris that may have collected in the
tracks.
DUAL PANE POWER SUNROOF —
I
F EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located on the
overhead console between the courtesy/reading
lights.
Power Sunroof Switches
1 — Opening/Closing Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof
3 — Opening/Closing Sunshade
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Opening And Closing The Sunroof
The sunroof has two programmed automatic stops
for the sunroof open position; a comfort stop
position and a full open position. The comfort stop
position has been optimized to minimize wind
buffeting.
Express Open/Close
Push the switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will open
automatically from any position. The sunroof will
open fully and stop automatically.
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close
automatically from any position. The sunroof will
close fully and stop automatically.
During Express Open or Express Close operation,
any other movement of the sunroof switch will stop
the sunroof.
Manual Open/Close
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
rearward to full open.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in
the forward position.
Any release of the switch during open or close
operation will stop the sunroof movement. The
sunroof will remain in a partially opened position
until the switch is operated and held again.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when
Express or Manual Open operation is initiated the
sunshade will automatically open to the half open
position prior to the sunroof opening.
Opening And Closing The Power Sunshade
The sunshade has two programmed positions: half
open and full open positions. When operating the
sunshade from the closed position, the sunshade
will always stop at the half open position
regardless of express or manual open operation.
The switch must be actuated again to continue on
to full open position.
If the sunroof is open or vented, the sunshade
cannot be closed beyond the half open position.
Pushing the sunshade close switch when the
sunroof is open/vented and the sunshade is at half
open position will first automatically close the
sunroof prior to the sunshade closing.
Express Open/Close
Push the sunshade switch rearward and release it
within one-half second, the sunshade will open to
the half open position and stop automatically.
Push and release the switch again from the half
open position and the sunshade will open to the
full open position and stop automatically.
Push the sunshade switch forward and release it
within one-half second and the sunshade will close
automatically.
During Express Open or Express Close operation,
any other actuation of the sunroof switches will
stop the sunshade in a partially open position.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children. Do not leave
the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ACC or
ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the
power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may
result in serious injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body
parts, or any object, to project through the
sunroof opening. Injury may result.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the sunshade switch rearward, the
sunshade will open to the half open position and
stop automatically. Push and hold the sunshade
switch again and the sunshade will open to the full
open position.
Push and hold the switch forward and the
sunshade will close and stop at full closed position.
Releasing the switch while the sunshade is in
motion will stop the sunshade in a partially open
position.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
opening of the sunroof during Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically
retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will
disable and the sunroof must be closed in
Manual Mode.
Venting Sunroof
Push and release the Vent button within one half
second and the sunroof will open to the vent
position. This is called “Express Vent” and it will
occur regardless of sunroof position. During
Express Vent operation, any movement of the
switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE:
If the sunshade was not already open, it will auto-
matically open prior to the roof opening to the vent
position.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up
to approximately 10 minutes after the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature.
NOTE:
Ignition Off timing is programmable through the
Uconnect system Ú page 238.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and
clear out any debris that may have collected in the
tracks.
HOOD
TO OPEN THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located below the
steering wheel at the base of the instrument
panel.
Hood Release Lever Location
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Reach into the opening beneath the center of
the hood and push the safety latch lever to the
left to release it, before raising the hood.
Safety Latch Location
TO CLOSE THE HOOD
Hoods equipped with gas props are closed from
the point where the props no longer hold the hood
open.
TAILGATE
OPENING
The tailgate may be opened by pushing the tailgate
release pad located on the tailgate door.
The tailgate damper strut will lower the tailgate to
the open position (if equipped).
Electronic Tailgate Release — If Equipped
The key fob may be equipped with an
electronic release feature for the
tailgate, allowing hands-free tailgate
opening. To activate, push and release
the Tailgate Release button on the key fob twice
within five seconds. The tailgate door will unlatch,
and slowly lower into the open position.
If equipped, a button on the center overhead
console inside the vehicle can be used to release
the tailgate. An indicator light may also signal when
the tailgate is open.
For the tailgate to lower, the vehicle must be
stationary and in PARK or NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
The optional Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Ú page 101
may prevent electronic tailgate release. The
Tonneau Cover must be removed or folded up
before releasing the tailgate.
CLOSING
To close the tailgate, push it upward until both
sides are securely latched.
LOCKING TAILGATE
The tailgate can be locked using the key fob
lock button.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Use a firm downward push at
the front center of the hood to ensure that both
latches engage.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
MULTIFUNCTION TAILGATE —
I
F EQUIPPED
The 60/40 multifunction tailgate has two swing
doors to allow for closer access to the pickup box
with the doors open.
Opening
The tailgate must be latched closed to open the
swing doors. Push the paddle down, then pull the
release handle beneath the tailgate lowering
handle. This opens the 60 split door.
60 Split Door Release Handle
Once the 60 split swing door is opened, pull the
release handle on the inboard side of the 40 split
door to open.
40 Split Door Release Handle
Closing
Always close the 40 split door first, then close the
60 split door. The swing doors must be securely
latched before the tailgate can be lowered.
NOTE:
When the swing doors are open, the
maximum load placed on a door cannot
exceed 180 lb (82 kg).
Pull back on the swing doors firmly after closing
to ensure they are securely latched. Similar to
the side door ajar light inside the cab, the bed
light above the rear window will remain on if the
tailgate doors are not fully closed.
WARNING!
To prevent serious injury or death:
Always keep hands away from the hinge sides
of the swing doors and where the doors meet
when opening and closing the doors. Your
hand or someone else’s hand could be
pinched.
Never operate the vehicle with the swing
doors open.
Never hang from or sit on the swing doors.
CAUTION!
Always check both swing doors are latched
before starting vehicle.
Vehicle damage may occur if doors are not
securely latched.
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TAILGATE REMOVAL
NOTE:
Removing the tailgate will disable the rearview
camera function.
To remove the tailgate, refer to the following
instructions:
1. Open the tailgate to a 45° angle.
2. Lift up on the right side of the tailgate, lifting it
off of the pivot.
Lift Right Side Off Of Pivot
3. Without latching, rotate the tailgate to nearly
closed. Then, while providing support to the
tailgate, slide it slowly to the right, removing
the tailgate from the left pivot.
NOTE:
Rest the tailgate on the bumper so that the entire
tailgate is secure and supported.
Slide Tailgate To The Right
4. Let the tailgate rest on the support cables
while having the tailgate naturally slide
forward on the bumper.
Tailgate Only Supported By Cables
5. Remove the connector bracket from the sill by
pushing inward in the locking tab.
Connector Bracket Location
WARNING!
For vehicles equipped with a multifunction
tailgate, the tailgate weighs 115 lb (52 kg) and
should be removed by at least two people. Injury
to the customer or damage to the tailgate may
occur if one person tries to remove the
multifunction tailgate.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
Locking Tab
6. Disconnect the wiring harness by pushing on
the two release tabs, ensuring the connector
bracket does not fall into the sill.
Connected Wiring Harness
Disconnected Body Side Harness
7. Connect the body side plug (provided in
the glove compartment) to the body side
wiring harness and insert the bracket back
into the sill.
Body Side Plug (One Piece)
8. Connect the tailgate plugs (provided in the
glove compartment) to the tailgate wiring
harness to ensure that the terminals do not
corrode.
Tailgate Plugs (Two Pieces)
1 — First Release Tab
2 — Second Release Tab
1 — Large Plug
2 — Small Plug
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
9. Tape the tailgate harness and bracket against
the forward-facing surface of the tailgate. This
will prevent damaging the connector and
bracket when storing or reinstalling the
tailgate.
10. Raise the tailgate slightly, and remove the
support cables by releasing the lock tang from
the pivot.
NOTE:
Make sure tailgate is supported by you and/or a
second person when removing support cables.
Locking Tang
11. Remove the tailgate from the vehicle.
NOTE:
Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck
pickup box.
If the tailgate is closed with the wire harness
disconnected, the tailgate can only be opened
by removing the inside panel and unlatching the
locking mechanism manually.
BED STEP — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an extendable
bed step to provide easier entry and exit into the
truck bed.
If your vehicle is equipped with a standard tailgate,
the step will be located on the driver’s side of the
tailgate. If equipped with a multifunction tailgate,
the step will be located below the center of the
tailgate.
Bed Step For Standard Tailgate
Bed Step Location
To extend the bed step, place your foot on the
protruding foot tab located on the left edge of the
bed step, and push rearward. A small amount of
force will release the spring load and extend the
bed step out and away from the tailgate.
WARNING!
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is
deadly, the exhaust system on vehicles
equipped with “Cap or Slide-In Campers” should
extend beyond the overhanging camper
compartment and be free of leaks.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
Bed Step Components (Standard Tailgate)
Bed Step Extended
NOTE:
Once the spring load is overcome, the bed step will
extend out quickly, so be sure to stand in a position
that will avoid coming into contact with the step as
it extends.
To stow the bed step back under the tailgate, push
the bed step forward with your foot until the bed
step is retracted by the spring load.
Bed Step For Multifunction Tailgate
Bed Step Location
To extend the bed step, place your foot on the top
center of the bed step, and push down while
pulling rearward. A small amount of force will
release the spring load and extend the bed step
out and away from the tailgate.
Bed Step Extended
1 — Bed Step
2 — Foot Tab
WARNING!
Do not attempt to stow the bed step with your
hands. The low clearance space between the
bed step and the rear bumper as the bed step
returns to the stowed position could result in
injury to your hands or fingers.
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
NOTE:
Once the spring load is overcome, the bed step will
extend out quickly. Be sure to stand in a position
that will avoid coming into contact with the step as
it extends.
To stow the bed step back under the tailgate, push
the bed step forward with your foot until the bed
step is retracted by the spring load.
PICKUP BOX
The pickup box has many features designed for
utility and convenience.
Pickup Box Features
NOTE:
If you are installing a Toolbox, Ladder Rack or
Headache Rack at the front of the Pickup Box, you
must use Mopar® Box Reinforcement Brackets
that are available from an authorized dealer.
You can carry wide building materials (sheets of
plywood, etc.) by building a raised load floor.
Place lumber across the box in the indentations
provided above the wheel housings and in the
bulkhead dividers to form the floor.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to stow the bed step with your
hands. The low clearance space between the
bed step and the rear bumper as the bed step
returns to the stowed position could result in
injury to your hands or fingers.
1 — Upper Load Floor Indents
2 — Bulk Head Dividers
3 — Cleats
WARNING!
The pickup box is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should
sit in seats and use seat belts.
Care should always be exercised when oper-
ating a vehicle with unrestrained cargo.
Vehicle speeds may need to be reduced.
Severe turns or rough roads may cause
shifting or bouncing of the cargo that may
result in vehicle damage. If wide building
materials are to be frequently carried, the
installation of a support is recommended. This
will restrain the cargo and transfer the load to
the pickup box floor.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
There are stampings in the sheet metal on the
inner side bulkheads of the box in front of and
behind both wheel housings. Place wooden boards
across the box from side to side to create separate
load compartments in the pickup box.
There are four tie-down cleats bolted to the lower
sides of the pickup box that can sustain loads up
to 1,000 lb (450 kg) total.
BED RAIL TIE-DOWN SYSTEM —
I
F EQUIPPED
There are two adjustable cleats on each side of the
bed that can be used to assist in securing cargo.
Adjustable Cleats
Each cleat must be located and tightened down in
one of the detents, along either rail, in order to
keep cargo properly secure.
To move the cleat to any position on the rail, turn
the nut counterclockwise, approximately three
turns. Then pull out on the cleat and slide it to the
detent nearest the desired location. Make sure the
cleat is seated in the detent and tighten the nut.
Adjustable Cleat Assembly
If you wish to carry more than 600 lb (272 kg)
of material suspended above the wheelhouse,
supports must be installed to transfer the
weight of the load to the pickup box floor or
vehicle damage may result. The use of proper
supports will permit loading up to the rated
payload.
Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward in
an accident causing serious or fatal injury.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
The maximum load per cleat should not exceed
250 lb (113 kg), or 500 lb (227 kg) total per rail,
and the angle of the load on each cleat should
not exceed 45 degrees above horizontal, or
damage to the cleat or cleat rail may occur.
1 — Utility Rail Detent
2 — Cleat Retainer Nut
3 — Utility Rail Cleat
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cleat Removal (Standard Box Rail)
To remove the cleats from the utility rail, slide the
cleat forward to access the cut out at the end of the
box rail, then remove the cleat.
Slide Cleat Forward To Remove
Cleat Removal (With Tonneau Cover)
To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove
the end cap screw located in the center of the end
cap, using a #T30 Torx head driver. Remove the
end cap and slide the cleat off the end of the rail.
End Cap Screw Location With Tonneau Cover
Cleat Removal (Without Tonneau Cover)
Remove the end cap by pushing upward on the
release button located beneath the end cap while
pulling the cap away from the rail. The cleat can
now be removed by sliding it off the end of the rail.
End Cap Release Button Without Tonneau Cover
Pull End Cap Away From Rail
RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED
The RamBox system is an integrated pickup box
storage and cargo management system consisting
of three features:
Cargo storage bins
Cargo divider
Bed rail tie-down system Ú page 95
NOTE:
Bed rail tie-down system is also available for
vehicles not equipped with a RamBox.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING RAMBOX
Push and release the lock or unlock button on the
key fob to lock and unlock all doors, the tailgate
and the RamBox Ú page 19. To unlatch the
storage bin manually, insert the emergency key
into the keyhole and turn clockwise. Always return
the key to the upright (vertical) position before
removing it from the keyhole.
RAMBOX CARGO STORAGE BINS
Cargo storage bins are located on both sides of the
pickup box. The cargo storage bins provide
watertight, lockable, illuminated storage for up to
150 lb (68 kg) of evenly distributed cargo.
RamBox Cargo Storage Bins
To open a storage bin with the RamBox unlocked,
push and release the button located on the lid. The
RamBox lid will open upward to allow hand access.
Lift the lid to fully open.
NOTE:
RamBox will not open when the button is pushed if
the RamBox is locked.
RamBox Button And Keyhole Lock
CAUTION!
Ensure cargo bin lids are closed and latched
before moving or driving vehicle.
Loads applied to the top of the bin lid should
be minimized to prevent damage to the lid and
latching/hinging mechanisms.
Damage to the RamBox bin may occur due to
heavy/sharp objects placed in bin that shift
due to vehicle motion. In order to minimize
potential for damage, secure all cargo to
prevent movement and protect inside
surfaces of bin from heavy/sharp objects with
appropriate padding.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the following items could cause
damage to the vehicle:
Assure that all cargo inside the storage bins is
properly secured.
Do not exceed cargo weight rating of 150 lb
(68 kg) per bin.
1 — Keyhole Lock
2 — Button
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The interior of the RamBox will automatically
illuminate when the lid is opened. The timing can
be adjusted within Uconnect Settings Ú page 238.
Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs
(to allow water to drain from bins). To remove plug,
pull up on the edge. To install, push plug downward
into drain hole.
RamBox Drain Plug Removal
NOTE:
Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo
dividers. These accessories (in addition to other
RamBox accessories) are available from Mopar®.
If equipped, a 115 Volt (400 Watts maximum)
inverter may be located inside the RamBox of your
vehicle. The inverter can be turned on by the
Instrument Panel Power Inverter switch located to
the left of the steering wheel. The RamBox inverter
can power cellular phones, electronics and
other low power devices requiring power up to
400 Watts. Certain video game consoles exceed
this power limit, as will most power tools.
RamBox Power Inverter
The Instrument Panel Power Inverter switch is only
found on vehicles equipped with a RamBox. The
switch only controls on/off operation of the power
outlet in the RamBox; it does not control on/off
operation of the power outlets located inside the
cabin of the vehicle.
Instrument Panel Power Inverter Switch
CAUTION!
Leaving the lid open for extended periods of time
could cause the vehicle battery to discharge. If
the lid is required to stay open for extended
periods of time, it is recommended that the bin
lights be turned off manually using the on/off
switch.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
RAMBOX SAFETY WARNING
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent
personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
RamBox Emergency Release Lever
As a security measure, an Emergency Release
Lever is built into the storage bin cover latching
mechanism.
In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be
opened from inside of the bin by pulling on the
glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the storage bin
cover latching mechanism.
Emergency Release Lever
BED DIVIDER — IF EQUIPPED
The bed divider has two functional positions:
Divider Position
Storage Position
Divider Position
The divider position is intended for managing your
cargo and assisting in keeping cargo from moving
around the bed. There are 11 divider slots along
the bed inner panels which allow for various
positions to assist in managing your cargo.
To install the bed divider into a divider position,
perform the following:
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked
using the vehicle key and rotate the center
handle vertically to release the divider side
gates.
Center Handle And Lock
WARNING!
Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
Do not allow children to have access to the
storage bins. Once in the storage bin, young
children may not be able to escape. If trapped
in the storage bin, children can die from suffo-
cation or heat stroke.
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie-down.
1 — Center Handle Lock
2 — Handle
3 — Unlocked Position
4 — Locked Position
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. With the side gates open, position the divider
so the outboard ends align with the intended
slots in the sides of the bed.
Aligning Gate To Slots
3. Rotate the side gates closed so that the
outboard ends are secured into the intended
slots of the bed.
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure
the side gates in the closed position.
Side Gates Closed
5. Lock the center handle to secure the panel
into place.
Storage Position
The storage position for the bed divider is at the
front of the truck bed which maximizes the bed
cargo area when not in use.
To install the bed divider into the storage position,
perform the same steps as you would for the
divider position, except position the divider fully
forward in the bed against the front panel.
Storage Position
The outboard ends should be positioned in front of
the cargo tie-down loops.
Cargo Tie-Down Loop
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED
The Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover can be installed on the
truck bed to protect your gear and cargo.
TONNEAU COVER COMPONENTS
Folded Tonneau Cover Components
Tonneau Cover Latch Components
Position One
(Front Latches Latched And Stowage Straps Secured)
Position Two (Front And Rear Latches Latched)
1 — Stowage Strap
2 — Tonneau Cover Bumper Folded
1 — Handle
2 — Slide Locking Lever
3 — Locating Bumper
4 — Truck Flange Bead
5 — Latch Bumper
6 — J Hook
1 — Panel 1
2 — Panel 2
3 — Panel 3
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER FOLDING
F
OR DRIVING OR REMOVAL
To remove the Tonneau Cover use the
following steps:
1. Open the tailgate to access the rear pair of
Tonneau Cover latches located on the
underside of the Cover.
Location Of Rear Latches
Slide Locking Lever Inward
2. Slide the locking lever toward the inside of the
truck bed to release the J Hook and pull the
handle downward into the released position.
Unlatching Latch
Released Position
Hold The Bumper And Push The Handle Up
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
3. Holding the bumper, push the fully released
latch to the center and push up. Push the
handle firmly, locking it into the stowed
position. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the
opposite side latch.
Stowed Position
Lift Panel 3 And Fold Onto Panel 2
4. Lift up on Panel 3 and fold it onto Panel 2.
Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together
NOTE:
When folding the second and third panels, the
sections MUST be held together to avoid damage
to the cover material. Fold the panel gently. Do not
allow the panels to drop under their own weight.
Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage
5. Lift up on the second and third panel and fold
them onto the first panel.
Stowage Strap Clipped
6. Unsnap the stowage strap and clip. Repeat for
both straps to prevent the Tonneau Cover
panels from unfolding.
Position One
(Front Latches Latched And Stowage Straps Secured)
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Be sure the Tonneau Cover has been folded
completely, and the stowage straps are engaged,
before removing.
Fully Folded Tonneau Cover
NOTE:
The vehicle can be driven with the Tonneau Cover
in the folded position or can be completely
removed.
Slide Locking Lever Inward
7. Slide the locking lever toward the inside of the
truck bed to release the J Hook and pull the
handle downward into the released position.
Unlatching Latch
Released Position
Hold The Bumper And Push The Handle Up
CAUTION!
The folded Tonneau Cover must be latched by
both front latches and both front stowage straps
or damage to the Tonneau Cover or vehicle may
occur while driving.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105
8. Holding the bumper, push the fully released
latch to the center and push up. Push the
handle firmly, locking it into the stowed
position. Repeat Steps 2 & 3 for the opposite
side latch.
9. With two people, remove the cover.
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER
I
NSTALLATION
To install the Tonneau Cover follow these steps:
1. Position the Tonneau Cover on the truck bed
and center using the locating bumpers.
2. Locate the front pair of Tonneau Cover latches
on the underside of the Cover. Slide the
locking lever toward the inside of the truck bed
and release the latch from the stowed
position, and pull the handle downward into
the released position. Do this for both the left
and right side.
Location of Front Latches
Slide Locking Lever Towards Inside Of Truck
Unlatching Latch
Released Position
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Swing the J Hook from the handle and push
the handle to the center and up, ensuring that
the J Hook is under the truck flange. Push up
on the handle firmly, locking it into the latched
position.
J Hook Under Truck Flange
NOTE:
Make sure the bumper is in front of the truck
flange bead.
Pull Handle Downward
4. Pull down on the handle to ensure the Slide
Locking Lever is fully engaged. Do this for both
the left and right side.
5. Unclip the stowage straps, and re-snap them
to the bow.
6. Unfold the Tonneau Cover to the second panel
position.
Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage
NOTE:
When folding the second and third panels, the
sections MUST be held together to avoid damage
to the cover material. Fold the panel gently. Do not
allow the panels to drop under their own weight.
Second Panel Position
1 — Front Of Truck
2 — J Hook
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107
NOTE:
Unfold the panel gently, and do not allow the
panels to drop under their own weight.
7. Completely unfold the Tonneau Cover.
Position Two (Fully Unfolded)
8. Repeat steps 2 through 3 for the rear pair of
latches.
9. Pull down on the handle to ensure the Slide
Locking Lever is fully engaged. Do this for both
the left and right side.
NOTE:
Also check to ensure the latch yellow bumpers are
forward of the bead on the underside of the truck
flange. Make sure that the Tonneau Cover is posi-
tioned fully forward, so that the bumper clears the
bead.
Pull Up On Tonneau Cover Corners
10. Gently pull up on all four corners of the
Tonneau Cover to ensure that it is properly
latched.
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER CLEANING
For proper cleaning of the Tonneau Cover, use
Mopar® Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and
Mopar® Leather & Vinyl Conditioner/Protectant.
CAUTION!
The vehicle cannot be driven when the Tonneau
Cover is in the second panel position.
CAUTION!
It is the driver’s responsibility to ensure the
Tonneau Cover is properly installed on the
vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure can
result in detachment of the Tonneau Cover
from the vehicle and/or damage to the
vehicle/Tonneau Cover.
2
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS — GASOLINE
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Voltmeter
When the vehicle is in the RUN state, the
gauge indicates the electrical system
voltage. The pointer should stay within the
normal range if the battery is charged. If the
pointer moves to either extreme left or right
and remains there during normal driving,
the electrical system should be serviced.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with Stop/Start, a reduced
voltage may be present during an Autostop.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, this
display shows the instrument cluster
display messages Ú page 117.
The display always shows one of the main
menu items after ignition on.
4. Oil Pressure Gauge
The pointer should always indicate the oil
pressure when the engine is running.
A continuous high or low reading under
normal driving conditions may indicate a
lubrication system malfunction. Immediate
service should be obtained from an autho-
rized dealer.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with Stop/Start, an oil
pressure indication of zero is normal during an
Autostop.
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
6. Temperature Gauge
The pointer shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. The pointer positioned within the
normal range indicates that the engine
cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather,
up mountain grades, or when towing a
trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed
the upper limits of the normal operating
range.
7. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position.
The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the
fuel door is located.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats
Ú page 431.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
the pointer remains on the “H,” turn the engine
off immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
3
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS — GASOLINE
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, this
display shows the instrument cluster
display messages Ú page 117.
The display always shows one of the main
menu items after ignition on.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Temperature Gauge
The pointer shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. The pointer positioned within the
normal range indicates that the engine
cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather,
up mountain grades, or when towing a
trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed
the upper limits of the normal operating
range.
5. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position.
The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the
fuel door is located.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats
Ú page 431.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
the pointer remains on the “H,” turn the engine
off immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
3
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS — DIESEL
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Engine Coolant Temperature
This gauge shows the engine coolant
temperature. The gauge pointer will likely
show higher temperatures when driving in
hot weather, up mountain grades, or in
heavy stop and go traffic. If the red Warning
Light turns on while driving, safely bring the
vehicle to a stop, and turn off the engine.
DO NOT operate the vehicle until the cause
is corrected.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, this
display shows the instrument cluster
display messages Ú page 117.
The display always shows one of the main
menu items after ignition on.
4. Oil Pressure Gauge
The pointer should always indicate some oil
pressure when the engine is running.
A continuous high or low reading under
normal driving conditions may indicate a
lubrication system malfunction. Immediate
service should be obtained from an
authorized dealer.
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats
Ú page 431.
WARNING!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range.
If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the
engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
3
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge
The DEF Gauge displays the actual level of
Diesel Exhaust Fluid in the DEF tank. DEF is
required to maintain normal vehicle opera-
tion and emissions compliance. If some-
thing is wrong with the gauge, a DEF
Warning Message or Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) will be displayed Ú page 129.
NOTE:
• The gauge may take up to five seconds to
update after adding a gallon or more of
Diesel Exhaust Fluid to the DEF tank. If you
have a fault related to the DEF system, the
gauge may not update to the new level. See
an authorized dealer for service.
• The DEF gauge may also not immediately
update after a refill if the temperature of the
DEF fluid is below 12°F (-11°C). The DEF
line heater will possibly warm up the DEF
fluid and allow the gauge to update after a
period of run time. Under very cold condi-
tions, it is possible that the gauge may not
reflect the new fill level for several drives.
• Outside temperature can affect DEF
consumption. In cold conditions, 12°F
(-11°C) and below, the DEF gauge needle
can stay on a fixed position and may not
move for extended periods of time. This is a
normal function of the system.
7. Fuel Gauge
The gauge shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the
fuel filler door is located.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 115
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL
3
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS — DIESEL
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, this
display shows the instrument cluster
display messages Ú page 117.
The display always shows one of the main
menu items after ignition on.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge
The DEF Gauge displays the actual level of
Diesel Exhaust Fluid in the DEF tank. DEF is
required to maintain normal vehicle opera-
tion and emissions compliance. If some-
thing is wrong with the gauge, a DEF
Warning Message or Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) will be displayed Ú page 129.
NOTE:
• The DEF tank on these vehicles is designed
with a large amount of full reserve. So the
level sensor will indicate a full reading even
before the tank is completely full. To put it
another way, there’s additional storage
capacity in the tank above the Full mark
that’s not represented in the gauge.
You may not see any movement in the
reading – even after driving up to
2,000 miles (3,219 km) in some cases.
• The gauge may take up to five seconds to
update after adding a gallon or more of
DEF to the DEF tank. If you have a fault
related to the DEF system, the gauge may
not update to the new level. See an
authorized dealer for service.
• The DEF gauge may also not immediately
update after a refill if the temperature of the
DEF fluid is below 12°F (-11°C). The DEF
line heater will possibly warm up the DEF
fluid and allow the gauge to update after a
period of run time. Under very cold condi-
tions, it is possible that the gauge may not
reflect the new fill level for several drives.
• Outside temperature can affect DEF
consumption. In cold conditions, 12°F
(-11°C) and below, the DEF gauge needle
can stay on a fixed position and may not
move for extended periods of time. This is a
normal function of the system.
5. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the
fuel filler door is located.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument
cluster display, which offers useful information to
the driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode,
opening/closing of a door will activate the display
for viewing, and display the total miles, or
kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important
information about your vehicle’s systems and
features. Using a driver interactive display located
on the instrument panel, your instrument cluster
display can show you how systems are working and
give you warnings when they are not. The steering
wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through
the main menus and submenus. You can access
the specific information you want and make
selections and adjustments.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
L
OCATION AND CONTROLS
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display that is located in the instrument
cluster.
Premium Instrument Cluster Display/Controls Location
The system allows the driver to select information
by pushing the following instrument cluster display
control buttons located on the left side of the
steering wheel.
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
1 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Screen
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button
3
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
Using the up or down arrow button allows
you to cycle through the Main Menu Items.
Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
Using the left or right arrow button allows you
to cycle through the submenu items of the Main
menu item.
NOTE:
Holding the up / down or left /
right arrow button will loop the user through
the currently selected menu or options
presented on the screen.
Main menu and submenus wrap for continuous
scrolling.
Upon returning to a main menu, the last
submenu screen viewed within that main menu
will be displayed.
OK Button:
For Digital Speedometer:
Pushing the OK button changes units
(mph or km/h).
For Screen Setup:
OK button allows user to enter menu and
submenus.
Within each submenu layer, the up and
down arrow buttons will allow the user to
select the item of interest.
Pushing the OK button makes the selection and
a confirmation screen will appear (returning the
user to the first page of the submenu).
Pushing the left arrow button will exit each
submenu layer and return to the main menu.
OIL LIFE RESET
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required”
message will display in the instrument cluster
display for five seconds after a single chime has
sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change
interval. The engine oil change indicator system is
duty cycle based, which means the engine oil
change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display
each time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, push
and release the OK or arrow buttons. To reset the
oil change indicator system (after performing the
scheduled maintenance), refer to the following
procedure:
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position
(do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu to
“Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the right arrow button to
access the ”Oil Life” screen.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 119
4. Push and hold the OK button to reset oil life. If
conditions are met, the gauge and numeric
display will update to show 100%. If conditions
are not met a pop-up message of “To reset oil
life engine must be off with ignition in run” will
be displayed (for five seconds), and the user
will remain at the Oil Life screen.
5. Push and release the up or down arrow
button to exit the submenu screen.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
DISPLAY MENU ITEMS
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the desired selectable menu icon is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the speedometer menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the OK button to cycle the
display between mph and km/h.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Vehicle Info menu icon is displayed
in the instrument cluster display. Push and release
the left or right arrow button to scroll
through the information submenus and push and
release the OK button to select or reset the
resettable submenus.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Air Suspension — If Equipped
Coolant Temperature — If Equipped
Trans Temperature
Oil Temperature
Oil Pressure — If Equipped
Oil Life
Battery Voltage — If Equipped
Gauge Summary — If Equipped
Coolant Temp
Trans Temp
Oil Temp
Oil Pressure
Engine Hours
Off Road – If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Off Road menu icon is displayed in
the instrument cluster display. Push and release
the left or right arrow button to scroll
through the information submenus.
Drivetrain
Front Wheel Angle: displays the graphical
and numerical value of calculated average
front wheel angle from the steering wheel
orientation.
Transfer Case Lock Status: displays “Lock”
graphic only during 4WD High, 4WD High
Part Time, 4WD Low status.
Axle Lock And Sway Bar Status (If
Equipped): displays front and rear or rear
only axle locker graphic, and sway bar
connection graphic with text message
(connected or disconnected).
3
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Pitch And Roll
Displays the pitch and roll of the vehicle in
the graphic with the angle number on the
screen.
NOTE:
When vehicle speed becomes too high to display
the pitch and roll, “- -” will display in place of the
numbers, and the graphic will be grayed out. A
message indicating the necessary speed for the
feature to become available will also display.
Driver Assist — If Equipped
The Driver Assist menu displays the status of the
ACC and LaneSense systems.
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Driver Assist menu is displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature
The instrument cluster display displays the current
ACC system settings. The information displayed
depends on ACC system status.
Push the ACC on/off button (located on the
steering wheel) until one of the following displays
in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the
steering wheel) and the following will display in the
instrument cluster display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster Ú page 180.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the
following:
Distance Setting Change
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
LaneSense — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current
LaneSense system settings. The information
displayed depends on LaneSense system status
and the conditions that need to be met
Ú page 141.
Performance Features — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Performance icon/title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push
and release the left or right arrow button to
scroll through the performance feature submenus.
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the
Performance Features is intended for
off-highway or track use only and should not be
done on any public roadways. It is recommended
that these features be used in a controlled
environment and within the limits of the law. The
capabilities of the vehicle as measured by the
performance pages must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which can
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121
The Performance Features include the following:
Speed Timers
0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h) Timer
Best
Last
Current
0-100 MPH (0-160 km/h) Timer
Best
Last
Current
3
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Drag Timers
0-60 feet (0-20 meters)/Reaction Timer
Best
Last
Current
NOTE:
Reaction Time result is shown only on the 60 ft timer tab.
0-330 feet (0-100 meters) Timer
Best
Last
Current
1/8 Mile (200 meters) Timer
Best
Last
Current
0-1000 feet (0-300 meters) Timer
Best
Last
Current
1/4 Mile (400 meters) Timer
Best
Last
Current
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Fuel Economy menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and hold the OK button to reset Average Fuel
Economy.
Current Fuel Economy
Average Fuel Economy
Range To Empty
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trip menu item is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
right or left arrow button to enter the
submenus of Trip A and Trip B. The Trip A or Trip B
information will display the following:
Distance
Average Fuel Economy
Elapsed Time
Push and hold OK button to reset all information.
Stop/Start — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Stop/Start icon/title is highlighted
in the instrument cluster display. The screen will
display the Stop/Start status.
Braking Distance
Distance
From Speed
G-Forces
Current
Peak
Lap Timer Shows times for Last, Best, and Current laps ran.
Lap History Will list the last four laps with the best lap highlighted in green.
Top Speed Shows the top speed of the vehicle.
3
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trailer Tow — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trailer Tow menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push
and release the right or left arrow button to
cycle through the following trailer tow information:
Trip (trailer specific) Distance: Push and hold
the OK button to reset the distance.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM):
Braking Output
Trailer Type
ITBM Gain
Trailer Light Check: Push and hold the OK
button to begin the Trailer Light Test sequence
Ú page 226.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring: The Instrument
Cluster Display will display the Trailer Tire Pres-
sure for a connected trailer with sensors that
match the active trailer profile. When a low tire
is present, the low tire value will be displayed in
red, and the affected low tire will have a red
glow. “Trailer Tire Low“ will be displayed on the
center bottom of the Instrument Cluster Display
screen.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Audio Menu icon/title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. This
menu will display the audio source information,
including the Song name, Artist name, and audio
source with an accompanying graphic.
Phone Call Status
When a call is incoming, a Phone Call Status
pop-up will display on the screen. The pop-up will
remain until the phone is answered or ignored.
NOTE:
The call status will temporarily replace the
previous media source information displayed on
the screen. When the pop-up is no longer
displayed, the display will return to the last used
screen.
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Messages Menu item is
highlighted. This feature shows the number of
stored warning messages. Push and release the
right or left arrow button to cycle through
stored messages.
Settings
Head Up Display (HUD) – If Equipped
NOTE:
The HUD feature Settings are available at any
vehicle speed Ú page 126.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Settings Menu Icon/Title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the OK button to enter the
submenus and follow the prompts on the screen
as needed. The Settings feature allows you to
change what information is displayed in the
instrument cluster as well as the location that
information is displayed.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125
NOTE:
The Settings feature is only available when the
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph.
Current Gear
Off (D)
On (D1, D2, D3,...)
Odometer
No Decimal Point
Decimal Point
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)
Cancel
Restore
Upper Left or Right
None Time Current Econ
Compass Range Trip A Distance
Outside Temp Average Econ Trip B Distance
Trailer Trip –
If Equipped
Oil Pressure –
If Equipped
Oil
Temperature –
If Equipped
Trailer Brake –
If Equipped
Coolant
Temp –
If Equipped
Battery
Voltage –
If Equipped
Transmission
Temperature –
If Equipped
Oil Life –
If Equipped
Favorite Menus
Speedometer Vehicle Info Performance
Off Road
Driver Assist
(show/hide) –
If Equipped
Fuel Economy
(show/hide)
Trip Info
(show/hide)
Trailer Tow –
If Equipped
(show/hide)
Audio
(show/hide)
Messages
(Stored)
Settings Diagnostics
Left Side and Right Side – If Equipped
None
Range To
Empty
Average Econ
Oil Temp
Transmission
Temp
Coolant Temp
Oil Life Menu Icon
Lower Left and Lower Right – If Equipped
None Time Current Econ
Compass
Range To
Empty
Trip A Distance
Outside Temp Average Econ Trip B Distance
Trailer Trip –
If Equipped
Trailer Brake –
If Equipped
Oil Pressure
Coolant
Temperature
Oil
Temperature
Battery
Voltage
Transmission
Temperature
Oil Life
3
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
HEAD UP DISPLAY (HUD) —
I
F EQUIPPED
NOTE:
The HUD feature Settings are available at any
vehicle speed. Some information like speed limit or
Driver Assist may not appear on the HUD unless
your vehicle is equipped Traffic Sign Assist or
Driver Assist systems.
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Settings Menu icon/title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the left or right arrow
button until the HUD Menu icon/title is highlighted
in the instrument cluster display. Push and release
the OK button to enter HUD. Use the up or
down arrow button to select a setting, then
push and release the OK button to adjust the
setting.
Content and Layout
When “Display On” is selected, the HUD will
display on the windshield. When it is not
selected, no display on the windshield.
HUD ON/OFF
Simple: Speed, Speed Limit
Standard: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation
When “Standard” mode is selected, the HUD
image is split into thirds with the speed limit
indicator shown to the left, vehicle speed in the
center, and turn-by-turn navigation to the right.
Advanced: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation,
Driver Assist (ACC/Cruise, LaneSense,
Highway Assist/Highway Assist+), Gear
Advanced Mode
When “Advanced” mode is selected, the HUD
displays the vehicle speed, turn-by-turn naviga-
tion, speed limit, driver assist function(s), and
current gear.
Custom
Custom HUD Layout
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127
Custom 1: Speed, Speed Limit
Custom 2: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation
Custom 3: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation,
Driver Assist (ACC/Cruise, LaneSense,
Highway Assist/Highway Assist+)
Custom 4: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation,
Driver Assist (ACC/Cruise, LaneSense,
Highway Assist/Highway Assist+), Gear
Display Height
Brightness
NOTE:
The HUD basic settings (Brightness, Display
Height and Non Custom layouts), are controlled
through the Settings Screen in the Instrument
Cluster Ú page 117.
HUD custom content layout preferences can be
selected through your touchscreen. For more
information, please refer to your Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF)
M
ESSAGES
This engine meets all required diesel engine
emissions standards. To achieve these emissions
standards, your vehicle is equipped with a
state-of-the-art engine and exhaust system. These
systems are seamlessly integrated into your
vehicle and managed by the Powertrain Control
Module (PCM). The PCM manages engine
combustion to allow the exhaust system’s catalyst
to trap and burn Particulate Matter (PM)
pollutants, with no input or interaction on your part.
Your vehicle has the ability to alert you to
additional maintenance required on your vehicle or
engine. Refer to the following messages that may
be displayed on your instrument cluster:
Exhaust Filter XX% Full Safely Drive at Highway
Speeds to Remedy — This message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster if the
exhaust particulate filter reaches 80% of its
maximum storage capacity. Under conditions of
exclusive short duration and low speed driving
cycles, your diesel engine and exhaust
after-treatment system may never reach the
conditions required to cleanse the filter to
remove the trapped PM. If this occurs, the
“Exhaust Filter XX% Full Safely Drive at Highway
Speeds to Remedy” message will be displayed
in the instrument cluster display. If this
message is displayed, you will hear one chime
to assist in alerting you of this condition.
By simply driving your vehicle at highway speeds
for up to 20 minutes, you can remedy the condi-
tion in the particulate filter system and allow
your diesel engine and exhaust after-treatment
system to cleanse the filter to remove the
trapped PM and restore the system to normal
operating condition.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn, such as grass or
leaves, and those items that come into contact
with your exhaust system. Do not park or
operate your vehicle in areas where your
exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
3
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Exhaust System — Regeneration In Process
Exhaust Filter XX% Full — This message indi-
cates that the DPF is self-cleaning. Maintain
your current driving condition until regeneration
is completed.
Exhaust System — Regeneration Completed —
This message indicates that the DPF
self-cleaning is completed. If this message is
displayed, you will hear one chime to assist in
alerting you of this condition.
Exhaust Service Required — See Dealer Now —
This messages indicates regeneration has been
disabled due to a system malfunction. At this
point the engine Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) will register a fault code, the instrument
panel will display a MIL light.
Exhaust Filter Full — Power Reduced
See Dealer — This message indicates the PCM
has derated the engine to limit the likelihood of
permanent damage to the after-treatment
system. If this condition is not corrected and a
dealer service is not performed, extensive
exhaust after-treatment damage can occur.
To correct this condition it will be necessary to
have your vehicle serviced by an authorized
dealer.
NOTE:
Failing to follow the oil change indicator, changing
your oil and resetting the oil change indicator by
0 miles remaining will prevent the diesel exhaust
filter from performing it's cleaning routine. This will
shortly result in a Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
and reduced engine power. Only an authorized
dealer will be able to correct this condition.
DISPLAYS
When the appropriate conditions exist, the
instrument cluster display displays the following
messages:
System Setup Unavailable – Vehicle Not in Park
System Setup Unavailable – Vehicle in Motion
Exhaust Filter Full Safely Drive at Highway
Speeds To Remedy
Exhaust Filter XX% Full – Power Reduced
See Dealer
Exhaust Service Required – See Dealer Now
Exhaust System – Filter XX% Full Service
Required See Dealer
Exhaust System – Regeneration In Process
Exhaust Filter XX% Full
Exhaust System – Regeneration Completed
Engine Will Not Restart in XXXX mi DEF Low
Refill Soon
Engine Will Not Restart in XXXX mi Refill DEF
Engine Will Not Restart Refill DEF
Service DEF System See Dealer
Incorrect DEF Detected See Dealer
Engine Will Not Restart in XXX mi Service DEF
See Dealer
Engine Will Not Restart Service DEF System
See Dealer
CAUTION!
See an authorized dealer, as damage to the
exhaust system could occur soon with continued
operation.
CAUTION!
See an authorized dealer, as damage to the
exhaust system could occur soon with continued
operation.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID (DEF)
W
ARNING MESSAGES
Your vehicle will begin displaying warning
messages when the DEF level reaches a driving
range of approximately 500 miles (800 km). If the
following warning message sequence is ignored,
your vehicle may not restart unless DEF is added
with in the displayed mileage shown in the cluster
message.
Engine Will Not Restart in XXXX mi DEF Low
Refill Soon — This message will display when
DEF driving range is less than 500 miles, DEF
fluid top off is required within the displayed
mileage. The message will be displayed in the
cluster during vehicle start up with the current
allowed mileage and accompanied by a single
chime. The remaining mileage can be pulled up
anytime in the “Messages” list within the
instrument cluster display.
Engine Will Not Restart in XXXX mi Refill DEF —
This message will display when DEF driving
range is less than 200 miles. It is also displayed
at 150 miles and 100 miles. DEF fluid top off is
required within the displayed mileage. The
message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster display during vehicle start up with an
updated distance mileage, and it will be accom-
panied by a single chime.
Starting at 100 miles, remaining range will be
continuously displayed while operating the
vehicle. Chimes will also accompany the 75, 50
and 25 mile remaining distances. The DEF Low
telltale will be on continuously until DEF fluid is
topped off.
Engine Will Not Restart Refill DEF — This
message will display when the DEF driving range
is less than one mile, DEF fluid top off is
required or the engine will not restart. The
message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster display during vehicle start up, and it will
be accompanied by a single chime. The DEF Low
telltale will be illuminated continuously until
DEF fluid tank is filled with a minimum of two
gallons of DEF.
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID (DEF) FAULT
W
ARNING MESSAGES
There are different messages which are displayed
if the vehicle detects that the DEF system has been
filled with a fluid other than DEF, has experienced
component failures, or when tampering has been
detected.
When the DEF system needs to be serviced the
following warnings will display:
Service DEF System See Dealer — This message
will display when the fault is initially detected
and each time the vehicle is started.
The message will be accompanied by a single
chime and the Malfunction Indicator Light. We
recommend you drive to the nearest authorized
dealer and have your vehicle serviced immedi-
ately. If not corrected in 50 miles, vehicle will
enter the “Engine Will not restart in XXX mi
Service DEF See dealer” warning stage and
message.
Incorrect DEF Detected See Dealer — This
message will display if the DEF system has
detected the incorrect fluid has been introduced
to the DEF tank. The message will be accompa-
nied by a single chime. We recommend you
drive to your nearest authorized dealer and
have your vehicle serviced immediately. If not
corrected in 30 miles, vehicle will enter the
“Engine Will not restart in XXX mi Service DEF
See dealer” warning stage and message.
3
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Will Not Restart in XXX mi Service DEF
See Dealer — This message is first displayed if
the fault detected is not serviced after 50 miles
of operation. It is also displayed at 150 miles,
125 miles and 100 miles. System service is
required within the displayed mileage. The
message will be displayed during vehicle start
up with an updated distance mileage, and it will
be accompanied by a single chime. Starting at
100 miles, remaining range will be continuously
displayed while operating the vehicle. Chimes
will also accompany the 75, 50 and 25 mile
remaining distances. We recommend you drive
to the nearest authorized dealer and have your
vehicle serviced immediately.
Engine Will Not Restart Service DEF System See
Dealer — This message will display if DEF
system issue detected is not serviced during the
allowed period. Your engine will not restart
unless your vehicle is serviced by an authorized
dealer. This message will be displayed when
under 1 mile until engine will not start and each
time the vehicle is started, and will be continu-
ously displayed. The message will be accompa-
nied by a single chime. Your Malfunction
Indicator Light will be continuously illumined.
We highly recommend you drive to the nearest
authorized dealer if the message appears while
engine is running.
Engine Will Not Start Service DEF System See
Dealer — This message will display when the
fault detected is not serviced after the Engine
will not restart Service DEF System See Dealer
message is displayed on the next subsequent
restart. Your engine will not start unless your
vehicle is serviced by an authorized dealer. The
message will be accompanied by a single
chime. Your Malfunction Indicator Light will be
continuously illuminated. If the message
appears and you can not start the engine, we
recommend having your vehicle towed to the
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery
Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of
the electrical system and status of the vehicle
battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will
take place to extend the driving time and distance
of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or
turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a risk
of battery depletion to the point where the vehicle
may stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not
restart after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message
“Battery Saver On Some Systems May Have
Reduced Power” will appear in the instrument
cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a
low state of charge and continues to lose electrical
charge at a rate that the charging system cannot
sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from load
reduction. The charging system performs a diag-
nostic on the charging system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may
indicate a problem with the charging system
Ú page 132.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
affected by load reduction:
Heated Seats / Vented Seats / Heated Wheel
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
115 Volts AC Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
more of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system because
the electrical loads are larger than the capability
of charging system. The charging system is still
functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads
(e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior
lights, overloaded power outlets +12 Volts,
115 Volts AC, USB ports) during certain driving
conditions (city driving, towing, frequent
stopping).
Installing options like additional lights, upfitter
electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms
and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by
long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended period
of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was not
charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical load
left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appliances
like vacuum cleaners, game consoles and
similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On” or
“Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
Turn off redundant lights
(interior or exterior).
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB ports.
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature).
Check the audio settings (volume).
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review
specifications if any (load and Ignition Off Draw
currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles
(distance, driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if
the message is still present during consecutive
trips and the evaluation of the vehicle and
driving pattern did not help to identify the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when applicable.
These indications are indicative and precautionary
and as such must not be considered as exhaustive
and/or alternative to the information contained in
the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the
information in this chapter in the event of a failure
indication. All active telltales will display first if
applicable. The system check menu may appear
different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional
and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and will
turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb
check when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the
air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the
fault is cleared. If the light is either not on during
startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
3
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake
light turns on it may indicate that the
parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level
is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock
Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full
mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates
a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or
that a problem with the Brake Booster has been
detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) /
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this
case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the
brake booster, the ABS pump will run when
applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation
may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual
brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning
Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level
in the master cylinder has dropped below a
specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD
failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along
with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS
system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF
position to the ON/RUN position. The light should
illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
should then turn off unless the parking brake is
applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does
not illuminate, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake
is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays
on while the engine is running, there may
be a malfunction with the charging
system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door
is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single
chime.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have
failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You
could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked
immediately.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the EPS system
Ú page 175.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the ETC system.
If a problem is detected while the vehicle
is running, the light will either stay on or
flash depending on the nature of the problem.
Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed
in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains on with the vehicle running,
your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see
an authorized dealer for service as soon as
possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a
bulb check. If the light does not come on during
starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an
overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too high,
this indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the
upper limit, a continuous chime will sound for four
minutes or until the engine is able to cool,
whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C)
system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal,
turn the engine off immediately and call for service
Ú page 396.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
hood is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate, and a
chime will sound, to indicate low engine
oil pressure. If the light and chime turn on
while driving, safely stop the vehicle and
turn off the engine as soon as possible. After the
vehicle is safely stopped, restart the engine and
monitor the Oil Pressure Warning Light. If the Oil
Pressure Warning Light is still illuminated, turn the
engine OFF and contact an authorized dealer for
further assistance. Do not operate the vehicle until
the cause is corrected. If the lamp is no longer
illuminated, the engine can be operated but it is
recommended to take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be
checked under the hood.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could
pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service
should be obtained as soon as possible.
3
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine
as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to
return to normal levels.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled,
a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When
driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will flash or remain on continuously and a chime
will sound Ú page 342.
Tailgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
tailgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
Trailer Brake has been disconnected.
Transmission Temperature Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn
of a high transmission fluid temperature.
This may occur with strenuous usage
such as trailer towing. If this light turns
on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or
slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK or
NEUTRAL, until the light turns off. Once the light
turns off, you may continue to drive normally.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
vehicle security system is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle is
disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the ACC system.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
Ú page 180.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over,
come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission damage
or transmission failure.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135
Air Suspension Fault Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate when a fault is
detected with the air suspension system.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The
light will turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required as
soon as possible. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally,
assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position,
have the brake system inspected by an authorized
dealer.
Electric Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the Electric Park Brake is not
functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the
ESC system is Active. The ESC Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is
activated. It should go out with the engine running.
If the ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously
with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this warning light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers)
at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
cator Light come on momentarily each time the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an
ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC
system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
Service LaneSense Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
LaneSense system is not operating and
requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level is less than a quarter
tank, and the Distance to Empty is less
than 50 miles, this light will turn on and
remain on until fuel is added.
A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel
Warning.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
3
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The MIL is a part of an Onboard
Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is in
the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the
bulb does not come on when turning the ignition
switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition
checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas
cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light
after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if
the light stays on through several typical driving
styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive
normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to
alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced
by an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this
occurs.
Rear Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate when a rear axle locker fault has
been detected.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the FCW System.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
Ú page 333.
Service Stop/Start System Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start system is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact
an authorized dealer for service.
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal
a fault with the 4WD system. If the light
stays on or comes on during driving, it
means that the 4WD system is not
functioning properly and that service is required.
We recommend you drive to the nearest service
center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the Cruise Control System is not
functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver,
occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the
vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel
economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing,
severe catalytic converter damage and power
loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that the
tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal
tire duration and fuel consumption may not be
guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label.
If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one minute
and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a
tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using
the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may result
when using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket
wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket
tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
3
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height
Indicator Light— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set to the
Aerodynamic setting.
Air Suspension Normal Height Indicator
Light— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set to the Normal
setting Ú page 167.
Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set to the Off-Road
1 setting Ú page 167.
Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set to the Off-Road
2 setting Ú page 167.
Air Suspension Payload Protection
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the maximum payload may
have been exceeded or load leveling
cannot be achieved at its current ride
height. Protection Mode will automatically be
selected to “protect” the air suspension system, air
suspension adjustment is limited due to payload.
Air Suspension Ride Height Raising
Indicator Light— If Equipped
This light will blink and alert the driver
that the vehicle is changing to a higher
ride height.
Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering
Indicator Light— If Equipped
This light will blink and alert the driver
that the vehicle is changing to a lower
ride height.
Cargo Light On Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the cargo light is activated by pushing the
cargo light button on the headlight
switch.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate
that Forward Collision Warning is off.
Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Indicator
Light — If Equipped
The Low DEF Indicator will illuminate if
the vehicle is low on DEF Ú page 213.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the 4WD
power transfer case is in the NEUTRAL
mode and the front and rear driveshafts
are disengaged from the powertrain.
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the rear axle
lock has been activated.
Entry/Exit Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the vehicle
is automatically lowered from ride height
position downward for easy entry and exit
of the vehicle Ú page 167.
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
TOW/HAUL mode is selected.
Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate when Trailer Merge Assist has
been activated Ú page 327.
4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the four-wheel drive mode, and the
front and rear driveshafts are
mechanically locked together forcing the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the 4WD Low mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range
provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide
increased torque at the wheels Ú page 162.
4WD High Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the 4WD High mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Wait To Start Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate for
approximately two seconds when the
ignition is turned to the RUN position. Its
duration may be longer based on colder
operating conditions. Vehicle will not initiate start
until telltale is no longer displayed.
NOTE:
The Wait To Start telltale may not illuminate if the
intake manifold temperature is warm enough.
3
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Water In Fuel Indicator Light — If Equipped
The Water In Fuel Indicator Light will
illuminate when there is water detected
in the fuel filter. If this light remains on,
DO NOT start the vehicle before you drain
the water from the fuel filter to prevent engine
damage, and please see an authorized dealer.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and
a vehicle in front is detected
Ú page 180.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
No Target Detected Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when the ACC is SET
and there is no vehicle in front detected
Ú page 180.
ECO Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when ECO mode is
active.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the front fog lights are on.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates
solid green when both lane markings
have been detected and the system is
“armed” and ready to provide visual and
torque warnings if an unintentional lane departure
occurs Ú page 199.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
the parking lights or headlights are
turned on.
CAUTION!
The presence of water in the fuel system circuit
may cause severe damage to the injection
system and irregular engine operation. If the
indicator light is illuminated, contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to bleed
the system. If the above indications come on
immediately after refuelling, water, or Adblue®
UREA has probably been poured into the tank:
switch the engine off immediately and contact
an authorized dealer.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal lamps
will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the
multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up
(right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
If equipped with fog lamps, the fog lamp on the
side of the activated turn signal will also illumi-
nate to provide additional light when turning.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light —
If Equipped With Premium Instrument
Cluster Display
This light will turn on when the cruise
control is set Ú page 178.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop”
mode Ú page 176.
4WD AUTO Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the four-wheel drive auto mode, and
the front axle is engaged, but the
vehicle's power is sent to the rear wheels.
Four-wheel drive will be automatically engaged
when the vehicle senses a loss of traction
Ú page 162.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the vehicle
equipped with ACC has been turned on
but not set Ú page 180.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator
This indicator light will illuminate when
the cruise control is ready, but not set
Ú page 178.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator shows when the HDC
feature is turned on. The lamp will be on
solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only
be armed when the transfer case is in the
“4WD Low” position and the vehicle speed is less
then 20 mph (32 km/h). If these conditions are not
met while attempting to use the HDC feature, the
HDC indicator light will flash on/off.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, but
not armed, the LaneSense indicator light
illuminates solid white. This occurs when
only left, right, or neither lane line has
been detected. If a single lane line is detected, the
system is ready to provide only visual warnings if
an unintentional lane departure occurs on the
detected lane line Ú page 199.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light —
If Equipped With Base/Midline Instrument
Cluster Display
This light will turn on when the cruise
control is set Ú page 178.
3
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam headlights
are on. With the low beams activated,
push the multifunction lever forward
(toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high
beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high
beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to
pass” scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine
emissions well within current government
regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
information to assist your service technician in
making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually
be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information
related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need
to access this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system Ú page 237.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control
system. It could also affect fuel economy and
driveability. The vehicle must be serviced
before any emissions tests can be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection
port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or
service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be
impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to
pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions
control system. Failure to pass could prevent
vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies
the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is
functioning and is not on when the
engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready.
The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle
was recently serviced, recently had a depleted
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II
system should be determined not ready for the
I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station.
To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready,
you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the
ON position, you will see the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until
you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine.
This means that your vehicle's OBD II
system is not ready and you should not
proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain
fully illuminated until you place the ignition
in the off position or start the engine.
This means that your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready and you can proceed to
the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see
an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing
more than drive your vehicle as you normally would
in order for your OBD II system to update. A
recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during
normal vehicle operation you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station.
The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the
MIL is on with the engine running.
3
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
GASOLINE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten
your seat belt.
The starter should not be operated for more
than 10-second intervals. Waiting at least 10 to
15 seconds between such intervals will protect the
starter from overheating.
DIESEL ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat
belts.
The starter is allowed to crank for up to 25-second
intervals. Waiting at least two minutes between
such intervals will protect the starter from
overheating.
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure
the keyless ignition node is in the OFF posi-
tion, remove the key fob from the vehicle and
lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or
ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then shift the automatic trans-
mission into PARK and apply the parking
brake.
Always make sure the ENGINE START/STOP
button is in the OFF position, key fob is
removed from the vehicle and vehicle is
locked.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving chil-
dren in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could
be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
NOTE:
Engine start-up in very low ambient temperature
could result in evident white smoke. This condition
will disappear as the engine warms up.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Start the engine with the transmission in PARK
position. Apply the brake before shifting into any
driving range.
NOTE:
This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must
be pressed to shift out of PARK.
If equipped with an 8-speed transmission,
starting the vehicle in NEUTRAL is not possible
unless the Manual Park Release has been
activated Ú page 397.
TIP START FEATURE
Do not press the accelerator. Cycle the ignition
switch briefly to the START position and release it.
The starter motor will continue to run and will
automatically disengage when the engine is
running.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as
the Remote Start/Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ key fob is
in the passenger compartment.
NORMAL STARTING USING ENGINE
START/STOP B
UTTON — GASOLINE
E
NGINE
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing
the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle
fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
prior to the engine starting, push the button
again.
To Turn Off The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
The ignition will return to the OFF position.
2. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds or three short pushes in a row with
the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h)
before the engine will shut off. The ignition will
remain in the ACC position until the gear
selector is in PARK and the button is pushed
twice to the OFF position.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or
ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
The engine is allowed to crank as long as
25 seconds. If the engine fails to start during
this period, please wait at least two minutes
for the starter to cool before repeating start
procedure.
If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on,
DO NOT START engine before you drain the
water from the fuel filter to avoid engine
damage Ú page 421.
WARNING!
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once
with the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h),
the instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle
Not In Park” message and the engine will
remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of
the PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE:
If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once with the
vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h), the engine
will shut off and the ignition will remain in the ACC
position. If vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h), the vehicle may AutoPark
Ú page 146.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot Off The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar
to an ignition switch. It has three positions: OFF,
ACC, and ON/RUN. To change the ignition positions
without starting the vehicle and use the
accessories, follow these directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
place the ignition to the ACC position.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to place the ignition to the
ON/RUN position.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third
time to return the ignition to the OFF position.
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist with
placing the vehicle in PARK should the situations
on the following pages occur. It is a back-up system
and should not be relied upon as the primary
method by which the driver shifts the vehicle into
PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage
are outlined on the following pages.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off
the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an
8-speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Ignition is switched from ON/RUN to ACC
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ equipped vehicles, the
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will
change to ACC position. After 30 minutes the
ignition switches to OFF automatically, unless the
driver turns the ignition switch OFF.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the
vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may
AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an
8-speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Driver’s door is ajar
Brake pedal is not pressed
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to place
the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL
CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying
that a solid (not blinking) “P” is indicated in
the instrument cluster display and near the
gear selector. If the “P” indicator is blinking,
your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your
vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system and
should not be relied upon as the primary
method by which the driver shifts the vehicle
into PARK.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
The message “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then
Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
displayed in the instrument cluster, causing the
“AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift to Gear”
message to not be seen. In these cases, the gear
selector must be returned to “P” to select desired
gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is
1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to
P” will be displayed in the instrument cluster if
vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
4WD LOW — If Equipped
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the
vehicle in 4WD LOW.
The message “AutoPark Disabled” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given when
all of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is not in PARK
Driver’s door is ajar
Vehicle is in 4WD LOW
The message “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning
chime will continue until you shift the vehicle into
PARK or the driver’s door is closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle is in
PARK by looking for the "P" in the instrument
cluster display and near the gear selector. As an
added precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed
the “Normal Starting” procedure, it may be
flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and hold it there while the engine is
cranking. This should clear any excess fuel in case
the engine is flooded.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for
10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs,
release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h),
the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until
the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL
position can roll. As an added precaution, always
apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result
in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to
get it started. Vehicles equipped with an auto-
matic transmission cannot be started this
way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started,
ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start
from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 393.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run,
but not have enough power to continue running
when the ignition button/key is released. If this
occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator
pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the ignition button/key once
the engine is running smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after a
10 second period of engine cranking with the
accelerator pedal held to the floor, wait 10 to
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
NORMAL STARTING USING ENGINE
START/STOP B
UTTON — DIESEL
E
NGINE
Observe the instrument panel telltales when
starting the engine.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK (P).
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing
the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
NOTE:
A delay of the start, up to five seconds is possible
under very cold conditions. The Wait to Start
telltale will be illuminated during the pre-heat
process. When the engine Wait To Start light goes
off the engine will automatically crank.
3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle
fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 25 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
prior to the engine starting, push the button
again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obtained without pumping or pressing the accel-
erator pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
The ignition will return to the OFF position.
2. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds or three short pushes in a row with
the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h)
before the engine will shut off. The ignition will
remain in the ACC position until the gear
selector is in PARK and the button is pushed
twice to the OFF position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once
with the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h),
the instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle
Not In Park” message and the engine will
remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of
the PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE:
If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once with the
vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h), the engine
will shut off and the ignition will remain in the ACC
position. If vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h), the vehicle may AutoPark
Ú page 146.
CAUTION!
If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on,
DO NOT START the engine before you drain the
water from the fuel filter to avoid engine damage
Ú page 421.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
STARTING AND OPERATING 149
(Continued)
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar
to an ignition switch. It has three positions: OFF,
ACC, and ON/RUN. To change the ignition modes
without starting the vehicle and use the
accessories, follow these directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
place the ignition to the ACC position.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to place the ignition to the
ON/RUN position.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third
time to return the ignition to the OFF position.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
(B
ELOW –22°F O R −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures,
use of an externally powered electric engine block
heater (available from an authorized dealer) is
recommended.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it
will decrease as the engine warms up.
STARTING FLUIDS — DIESEL ENGINE
O
NLY
The engine is equipped with a glow plug preheating
system. If the instructions in this manual are
followed, the engine should start in all conditions
and no type of starting fluid should be used.
NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE
Observe the following when the diesel engine is
operating.
All message center lights are off.
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off.
Engine Oil Pressure telltale is not illuminated.
Voltmeter operation:
The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at
various engine temperatures. This is caused by the
glow plug heating system. The number of cycles
and the length of the cycling operation is controlled
by the engine control module. Glow plug heater
operation can run for several minutes, once the
heater operation is complete the voltmeter needle
will stabilize.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up
may cause serious injury or death.
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure
the wireless ignition node is in the OFF posi-
tion, remove the key fob from the vehicle and
lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or
ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 STARTING AND OPERATING
COLD WEATHER PRECAUTIONS
Operation in ambient temperature below 32°F
(0°C) may require special considerations. The
following charts suggest these options:
Fuel Operating Range
NOTE:
Use Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD) Fuels ONLY.
Fuel Operating Range Chart
*Number 1 ULSD Fuel should only be used where
extended arctic conditions below (0°F/-18°C)
exist.
NOTE:
Use of Climatized ULSD Fuel or Number 1 ULSD
Fuel results in a noticeable decrease in fuel
economy.
Climatized ULSD Fuel is a blend of Number
2 ULSD and Number 1 ULSD Fuels which
reduces the temperature at which wax crystals
form in fuel.
The fuel grade should be clearly marked on the
pump at the fuel station.
The engine requires the use of ULSD Fuel. Use
of incorrect fuel could result in engine and
exhaust system damage Ú page 479.
If Climatized or diesel Number 1 ULSD Fuel is
not available, and you are operating below
(20°F/-6°C), in sustained arctic conditions,
Mopar® Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment
(or equivalent) is recommended to avoid gelling
(see Fuel Operating Range Chart).
Engine Oil Usage
For the correct engine oil viscosity Ú page 483.
Winter Front Cover
Winter Front Cover
A Winter front or cold weather cover can be used in
ambient temperatures below 32°F (0°C),
especially during extended idle conditions. This
cover is equipped with four flaps for managing
total grille opening in varying ambient
temperatures. If a Winter front or cold weather
cover is to be used the flaps should be in the full
open position to allow air flow to the cooling
module and automatic transmission oil cooler.
When ambient temperatures drop below 0°F
(-17°C) the four flaps need to be closed. A suitable
cold weather cover is available from a Mopar®
dealer.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
Engine Warm-Up
Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is
cold. When starting a cold engine, bring the engine
up to operating speed slowly to allow the oil
pressure to stabilize as the engine warms up.
If temperatures are below 32°F (0°C), operate the
engine at moderate speeds for five minutes before
full loads are applied.
ENGINE IDLING
Avoid prolonged idling. Long periods of idling may
be harmful to your engine because combustion
chamber temperatures can drop so low that the
fuel may not burn completely. Incomplete
combustion allows carbon and varnish to form on
piston rings, cylinder head valves, turbochargers,
and injector nozzles.
Also, the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase,
diluting the oil and causing rapid wear to the
engine.
STOPPING THE ENGINE
After full load operation, idle the engine for a few
minutes before shutting it down. This idle period
will allow the lubricating oil and coolant to carry
excess heat away from the turbocharger. Refer to
the following chart for proper engine shutdown.
NOTE:
Under certain conditions the engine Stop/Start functionality may be temporarily disabled and the engine fan will run after the engine is turned off to protect the
engine. These conditions are under high load and high temperature conditions.
Driving Condition Load Turbocharger Temperature
Idle Time (min.) Before Engine
Shutdown
Stop and Go Empty Cool None
Stop and Go Medium 0.5
Highway Speeds Medium Warm 1.0
City Traffic Maximum GCWR 1.5
Highway Speeds Maximum GCWR 2.0
Uphill Grade Maximum GCWR Hot 2.5
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 STARTING AND OPERATING
Do Not Operate The Engine With Low Oil
Pressure
If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Light turns on while
driving, stop the vehicle and shut down the engine
as soon as possible. After the vehicle is safely
stopped, restart the engine and monitor the lamp.
If the lamp is still illuminated, shut the engine off,
contact an authorized dealer, and do not operate
the vehicle until the cause is corrected. If the lamp
is no longer illuminated, the engine can be
operated, but should be taken to an authorized
dealer as soon as possible for further inspection.
NOTE:
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not show how much oil is
in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked
under the hood.
Do Not Operate The Engine With Failed
Parts
All engine failures give some warning before the
parts fail. Some important observations are:
Engine misfiring or vibrating severely
Sudden loss of power
Unusual engine noises
Fuel, oil or coolant leaks
Sudden change, outside the normal operating
range, in the engine operating temperature
Excessive smoke
Oil pressure drop
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
Engine Block Heater Cord Location
The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the
heater cord to a ground-fault interrupter protected
110–115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded,
three-wire extension cord.
For diesel engines, its use is recommended
for environments that routinely fall below -10°F
(-23°C). It should be used when the vehicle has not
been running for long periods of time and should
be plugged in two hours prior to start. Its use
is required for cold starts with temperatures
under -20°F (-28°C).
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures,
use of an externally powered electric engine block
heater (available from an authorized dealer) is
recommended.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the
hood on the passenger side of the vehicle next to
the engine coolant reservoir.
CAUTION!
If oil pressure falls to less than normal readings,
shut the engine off immediately. Failure to do so
could result in immediate and severe engine
damage.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
GASOLINE ENGINE
A long break-in period is not required for the engine
and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your
vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h)
are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within
the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good
break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low
gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory
is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant.
Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated
climate conditions under which vehicle operations
will occur. For the recommended viscosity and
quality grades Ú page 483.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first
few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in
and not interpreted as a problem. Please check
your oil level with the engine oil indicator often
during the break-in period. Add oil as required.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
DIESEL ENGINE
The diesel engine does not require a break-in
period due to its construction. Normal operation is
allowed, providing the following recommendations
are followed:
Warm up the engine before placing it under
load.
Do not operate the engine at idle for prolonged
periods.
Observe vehicle oil pressure and temperature
indicators.
Check the coolant and oil levels frequently.
Vary throttle position at highway speeds when
carrying or towing significant weight.
NOTE:
Light duty operation such as light trailer towing or
no load operation will extend the time before the
engine is at full efficiency. Reduced fuel economy
and power may be seen at this time.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory
is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant.
Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated
climate conditions under which vehicle operations
will occur. For the recommended viscosity and
quality grades Ú page 483.
NOTE:
NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS
MUST NEVER BE USED.
PARKING BRAKE
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB that offers
simple operation, and some additional features
that make the parking brake more convenient and
useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent
the vehicle from rolling while parked. Before
leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is applied. Also, be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK.
You can engage the parking brake in two ways:
Manually, by applying the parking brake switch.
Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake
feature in the Customer Programmable
Features section of the Uconnect settings.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral
Oil in the engine or damage may result.
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
The parking brake switch is located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel
(below the headlamp switch).
Electric Park Brake Switch
To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on the
switch momentarily. You may hear a slight sound
from the back of the vehicle while the parking
brake engages. Once the park brake is fully
engaged, the BRAKE telltale light in the instrument
cluster and an indicator on the switch will
illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal while
you apply the parking brake, you may notice a
small amount of brake pedal movement. The
parking brake can be applied even when the
ignition switch is OFF but the BRAKE telltale light
will not illuminate, however, it can only be released
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The EPB fault light will illuminate if the EPB switch
is held for longer than 20 seconds in either the
released or applied position. The light will extin-
guish upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the
parking brake will automatically engage whenever
the transmission is placed into PARK. If your foot is
on the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount
of brake pedal movement while the parking brake
is engaging.
The parking brake will release automatically when
the ignition is ON, the transmission is in DRIVE or
REVERSE, the driver seat belt is buckled, and an
attempt is made to drive away.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition
switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Put your
foot on the brake pedal, then push the parking
brake switch down momentarily. You may hear a
slight whirring sound from the back of the vehicle
while the parking brake disengages. You may also
notice a small amount of movement in the brake
pedal. Once the parking brake is fully disengaged,
the BRAKE telltale light in the instrument cluster
and the LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply
the parking brake before placing the gear selector
in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission
locking mechanism may make it difficult to move
the gear selector out of PARK.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury
or damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
STARTING AND OPERATING 155
If exceptional circumstances should make it
necessary to engage the parking brake while the
vehicle is in motion, maintain upward pressure on
the EPB switch for as long as engagement is
desired. The BRAKE telltale light will illuminate,
and a continuous chime will sound. The rear stop
lamps will also be illuminated automatically while
the vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is
in motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is
brought to a complete stop using the parking
brake, when the vehicle reaches approximately
3 mph, (5 km/h) the parking brake will remain
engaged.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB
system, a yellow EPB fault light will illuminate. This
may be accompanied by the BRAKE telltale light
flashing. In this event, urgent service of the EPB
system is required. Do not rely on the parking
brake to hold the vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The Electric Park Brake (EPB) can be programmed
to be applied automatically whenever the vehicle is
at a standstill and the automatic transmission is
placed in PARK. Auto Park Brake is enabled and
disabled by customer selection through the
Customer Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect Settings Ú page 255.
Any single Auto Park Brake application can be
bypassed by pushing the EPB switch to the release
position while the transmission is placed in PARK.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park
Brake (EPB) system that will engage the parking
brake automatically if the vehicle is left unsecured
while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
The parking brake will automatically engage if all of
the following conditions are met:
The vehicle is at a standstill.
There is no attempt to press the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal.
The seat belt is unbuckled.
The driver door is open.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing
the EPB switch while the driver door is open. Once
manually bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled
again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h)
or the ignition is turned to the OFF position and
back to ON again.
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by an
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs
for which you have the knowledge and the right
equipment. You should only enter Brake Service
Mode during brake service.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to
brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may
allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage
or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake
engaged, or repeated use of the parking brake
to slow the vehicle, may cause serious damage
to the brake system. Be sure the parking brake
is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do
so can lead to brake failure and a collision.
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be
necessary for you or your technician to push the
rear piston into the rear caliper bore. With the
Electric Park Brake (EPB) system, this can only be
done after retracting the EPB actuator.
Fortunately, actuator retraction can be done easily
by entering the Brake Service Mode through the
Uconnect Settings in your vehicle. This
menu-based system will guide you through the
steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator in
order to perform rear brake service.
Service Mode has requirements that must be met
in order to be activated:
The vehicle must be at a standstill.
The parking brake must be unapplied.
The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
While in Service Mode, the EPB fault lamp will flash
continuously while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
When brake service work is complete, the following
steps must be followed to reset the park brake
system to normal operation:
Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
Apply the EPB Switch.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for
which you have the knowledge and the right
equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle
to a competent mechanic.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indi-
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the
ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis-
sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
WARNING!
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be in
PARK before the ignition can be turned to the OFF
position. This helps the driver avoid inadvertently
leaving the vehicle without placing the
transmission in PARK. This system also locks the
transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in
the OFF position.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the
ignition is in the ACC position (even though the
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission is
in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC
position) before exiting the vehicle.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) S YSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle
is stopped or moving at low speeds.
8-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Rotary Shifter — If Equipped
The transmission is controlled using a rotary
electronic gear selector located on the instrument
panel. The transmission gear range (PRND) is
displayed both above the gear selector and in the
instrument cluster. To select a gear range, simply
rotate the gear selector. You must press the brake
pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK
(or NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or
moving at low speeds). To shift past multiple gear
ranges at once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply
rotate the gear selector to the appropriate detent.
Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission gear
(for example, driver selects PARK while driving),
the position indicator will blink continuously until
the selector is returned to the proper position, or
the requested shift can be completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts
its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along
with environmental and road conditions. The
transmission electronics are self-calibrating;
therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition,
and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above
idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions. Manual
downshifts can be made using the Electronic
Range Select (ERS) shift control. Pushing the
GEAR “-”/GEAR “+” switches (on the steering
wheel) while in the DRIVE position will select the
highest available transmission gear, and will
display that gear limit in the instrument cluster as
1, 2, 3, etc. Ú page 160. Some models will display
both the selected gear limit, and the actual current
gear, while in ERS mode.
Electronic Transmission Gear Selector
Console Shifter — If Equipped
The transmission gear range is displayed both
beside the gear selector and in the instrument
cluster. To select a gear range, push the lock
button on the gear selector and move the selector
rearward or forward. To shift the transmission out
of PARK (P), the engine must be running and the
brake pedal must be pressed. You must also press
the brake pedal to shift from NEUTRAL (N) into
DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R) when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds. Select the
DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
The transmission electronics are self-cali-
brating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a
normal condition, and precision shifts will
develop within a few hundred miles (kilome-
ters).
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission
gear (for example, driver selects PARK while
driving), the position indicator will blink continu-
ously until the selector is returned to the proper
position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts
its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along
with environmental and road conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and SPORT (S) (AutoStick)
shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using
the AutoStick shift control. Toggling the gear
selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the
SPORT (AutoStick) position (beside the DRIVE
position), or tapping the paddle shifters (+/-)
(if equipped), will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the
instrument cluster Ú page 161.
Gear Selector
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed
forward), it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-)
position (beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick
mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is
displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the gear
selector to the right (into the DRIVE position) for
access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting
from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before acceler-
ating. This is especially important when the engine
is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK
while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb
on an uphill grade.
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the engine off.
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
The following indicators should be used to ensure
that you have properly engaged the transmission
into the PARK position:
Look at the transmission gear position display
and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P),
and is not blinking.
With the brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come
to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running.
Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission
into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
Before moving the transmission gear selector
out of PARK, you must start the engine, and
also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing
traffic or road conditions. You might lose control
of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
can cause severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing Ú page 232.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 399.
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The
transmission automatically upshifts through all
forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such
as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong
head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), select
TOW/HAUL mode or use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control to select a lower gear
range Ú page 160. Under these conditions, using
a lower gear range will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures
(-22°F [-30°C] or below), transmission operation
may be modified depending on engine and
transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable
level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically
for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected
that could result in transmission damage,
Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated.
In this mode, the transmission may operate only in
certain gears, or may not shift at all.
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded
and the engine may stall. In some situations, the
transmission may not re-engage if the engine is
turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the
instrument cluster will inform the driver of the
more serious conditions, and indicate what actions
may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after
engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a
desired location (preferably, at an authorized
dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If
not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
engine turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at
your earliest possible convenience. An authorized
dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the
condition of your transmission. If the transmission
cannot be reset, an authorized dealer service is
required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation —
If Equipped
The ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the
highest available gear when the transmission is in
DRIVE and ERS mode is not active. For example, if
you set the transmission gear limit to FOURTH
gear, the transmission will hold that gear and not
shift above FOURTH gear, but will shift through the
lower gears normally.
NOTE:
ERS will only upshift during a FIRST to SECOND
gear shift when in 4WD LOW. All other ranges will
hold the gear.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at
any vehicle speed. When the transmission gear
selector is in DRIVE, the transmission will operate
automatically, shifting between all available gears.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
Tapping the “-” button (on the steering wheel) will
activate ERS mode, display the current gear in the
instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top
available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping the “-”
or “+” button will change the top available gear.
Electronic Range Select (ERS)
To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the “+”
button until the gear limit display disappears from
the instrument cluster.
AutoStick — If Equipped
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving you
more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to
maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable
upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall
vehicle performance. This feature can also provide
you with more control during passing, city driving,
cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing, and many other situations.
Paddle Shifters
Operation
In AutoStick mode, you can use the gear selector
(in the SPORT position), or the paddle shifters, to
manually shift the transmission. To activate
AutoStick mode, move the gear selector into the
SPORT (S) position (beside the DRIVE position), or
tap one of the paddle shifters on the steering
wheel. Tapping the “-” shift paddle to enter
AutoStick mode will downshift the transmission to
the next lower gear, while tapping “+” to enter
AutoStick mode will retain the current gear. The
current transmission gear will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
AutoStick mode has the following operational
benefits:
The transmission will automatically downshift
as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging)
and will display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically downshift to
FIRST gear when coming to a stop. After a stop,
the driver should manually upshift “+” the
transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.
You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or
SECOND gear (or THIRD gear, in 4WD LOW).
Tapping “+” (at a stop) will allow starting in
SECOND gear. Starting out in SECOND or THIRD
gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
1 — Shift Up “+”
2 — Shift Down “–”
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could
lose their grip and the vehicle could skid,
causing a collision or personal injury.
1 — “-” Paddle
2 — “+” Paddle
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to overspeed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too
low of a vehicle speed.
Holding the “-” paddle pressed, or holding the
gear selector in the “-” position, will downshift
the transmission to the lowest gear possible at
the current speed.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
when AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift mode
if a fault or overheat condition is detected.
NOTE:
When Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control is
enabled, AutoStick is not active.
To disengage AutoStick, return the gear selector to
the DRIVE position, or press and hold the “+”
paddle shifter (and the gear selector is already in
DRIVE) until "D" is once again indicated in the
instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of
AutoStick at any time without taking your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode
Select TOW/HAUL mode when driving in conditions
such as: driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer,
carrying a heavy load, etc. This mode will improve
performance and reduce the potential for
transmission overheating or failure due to
excessive shifting.
TOW/HAUL Switch
The TOW/HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL
mode has been activated. Pushing the switch a
second time restores normal operation. Normal
operation is always the default at engine start-up.
If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the switch must be
pushed each time the engine is started.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —
IF EQUIPPED
FOUR-POSITION ELECTRONICALLY
S
HIFTED TRANSFER CASE —
I
F EQUIPPED
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is
operated by the 4WD Control Switch
(Transfer Case Switch), located on the
instrument panel.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could
lose their grip and the vehicle could skid,
causing a collision or personal injury.
WARNING!
Do not use the TOW/HAUL feature when driving
in icy or slippery conditions. The increased
engine braking can cause the rear wheels to
slide, and the vehicle to swing around with the
possible loss of vehicle control, which may
cause an accident possibly resulting in personal
injury or death.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
Four-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case
This electronically shifted transfer case provides
four positions:
Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD) — This
range is for normal street and highway driving
on dry hard surfaced roads. Driving the vehicle
in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits
as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.
Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4WD HIGH) —
This range provides torque to the front drive-
shaft (engages four-wheel drive) which allows
front and rear wheels to spin at the same speed.
This provides additional traction for loose or
slippery road surfaces only.
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW) — This
range provides low speed four-wheel drive. It
maximizes torque (increased torque over 4WD
HIGH) to the front driveshaft; allowing front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
This range provides additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose or slippery
road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h) in this range.
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the
front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain.
To be used for flat towing behind another
vehicle Ú page 232.
NOTE:
The 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions are
designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
Driving in the 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW posi-
tions on dry, hard surfaced roads may cause
increased tire wear and damage to the driveline
components.
The transfer case N (Neutral) button is located
in the center of the 4WD Control Switch and is
pushed by using a ballpoint pen or similar
object. The transfer case N (Neutral) position is
to be used for recreational towing only
Ú page 232.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
(4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW) are located in the
instrument cluster and indicate the current and
desired transfer case selection. When you select a
different transfer case position, the indicator lights
will do the following:
1. The current position indicator light will
turn off.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash
until the transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and
remain on.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the N (Neutral) position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case N (Neutral) position disengages both the
front and rear drive shaft from the powertrain,
and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indi-
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the transfer case does not shift into the desired
position, one or more of the following events may
occur:
1. The indicator light for the current position will
remain on.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will
continue to flash.
3. If the transfer case will not shift, a message
will appear on the cluster stating the 4WD shift
has canceled.
NOTE:
Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new
transfer case position have been met. To retry the
selection, push the current position, wait five
seconds, and retry selection.
The SERV 4WD Warning Light monitors the
electronic shift four-wheel drive system. If this light
remains on after engine start-up or illuminates
during driving, it means that the four-wheel drive
system is not functioning properly and that service
is required.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause
damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the
engine speed is approximately three times that of
the 2WD or 4WD HIGH positions at a given road
speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine and
do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference in
tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning
and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road
conditions permit.
Shifting Procedure
If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, then
the transfer case will not shift. The position indi-
cator light for the previous position will remain
on and the newly selected position indicator
light will continue to flash until all the require-
ments for the selected position have been met.
If all the requirements to select a new transfer
case position have been met, then the current
position indicator light will turn off and the
selected position indicator light will flash until
the transfer case completes the shift. When the
shift is complete, the position indicator light for
the selected position will stop flashing and
remain on.
FIVE-POSITION ELECTRONICALLY
S
HIFTED TRANSFER CASE —
I
F EQUIPPED
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is
operated by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer
Case Switch), which is located on the instrument
panel.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the SERV 4WD Warning Light
is illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake
may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause
personal injury or death.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
Five-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case
Five-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case — GT Models
This electronically shifted transfer case provides
five positions:
Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD) — This
range is for normal street and highway driving
on dry hard surfaced roads. Driving the vehicle
in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits
as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.
Four-Wheel Drive Automatic High Range
(4WD AUTO) — This range sends power to the
front wheels automatically when the vehicle
senses a loss of traction. This range may be
used during varying road conditions.
Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4WD HIGH) —
This range provides torque to the front drive-
shaft (engages four-wheel drive) which allows
front and rear wheels to spin at the same speed.
This provides additional traction for loose or
slippery road surfaces only.
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW) —
This range provides low speed four-wheel drive.
It maximizes torque (increased torque over 4WD
HIGH) to the front driveshaft; allowing front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This
range provides additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose or slippery
road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h) in this range.
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the
front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain.
To be used for flat towing behind another
vehicle Ú page 232.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the N (Neutral) position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case N (Neutral) position disengages both the
front and rear drive shaft from the powertrain,
and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indi-
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
The 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions are
designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
Driving in the 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW posi-
tions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause
increased tire wear and damage to the driveline
components.
The transfer case N (Neutral) button is located
in the center of the 4WD Control Switch and is
pushed by using a ballpoint pen or similar
object. The transfer case N (Neutral) position is
to be used for recreational towing only
Ú page 232.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD
HIGH, 4WD LOW, and 4WD AUTO) are located in
the instrument cluster and indicate the current
and desired transfer case selection. When you
select a different transfer case position, the
indicator lights will do the following:
1. The current position indicator light will turn
off.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash
until the transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and
remain on.
If the transfer case does not shift into the desired
position, one or more of the following events may
occur:
1. The indicator light for the current position will
remain on.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will
continue to flash.
3. If the transfer case will not shift, there will be a
cluster message stating the 4WD shift has
canceled.
NOTE:
Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new
transfer case position have been met. To retry the
selection, push the current position, wait five
seconds, and retry selection.
The SERV 4WD Warning Light monitors the
electronic shift four-wheel drive system. If this light
remains on after engine start-up or illuminates
during driving, it means that the four-wheel drive
system is not functioning properly and that service
is required.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause
damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the
engine speed is approximately three times that of
the 2WD, 4WD AUTO or 4WD HIGH positions at a
given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference in
tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning
and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road
conditions permit.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the SERV 4WD Warning Light
is illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake
may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause
personal injury or death.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
Shifting Procedure
If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, then
the transfer case will not shift. The position indi-
cator light for the previous position will remain
on and the newly selected position indicator
light will continue to flash until all the require-
ments for the selected position have been met.
If all the requirements to select a new transfer
case position have been met, then the current
position indicator light will turn off and the
selected position indicator light will flash until
the transfer case completes the shift. When the
shift is complete, the position indicator light for
the selected position will stop flashing and
remain on.
ACTIVE-LEVEL FOUR CORNER AIR
SUSPENSION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
DESCRIPTION
The air suspension system provides full-time
load-leveling capability along with the benefit of
being able to adjust vehicle height by using the
toggle switch.
Air Suspension Switch
Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approxi-
mately 2 inches [51 mm]) – This position is
intended for off-road use only where maximum
ground clearance is required. To enter OR2,
push the height selector switch up twice from
the NRH position or once from the OR1 position
while vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
While in OR2, if the vehicle speed exceeds
25 mph (40 km/h) the vehicle height will be
automatically lowered to OR1. Off-Road 2 may
not be available due to vehicle payload, an
instrument cluster message will be displayed
when this occurs Ú page 117.
Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approxi-
mately 1 inch [26 mm]) – This position should
be the primary position for all off-road driving
until Off-Road 2 (OR2) is needed. A smoother
and more comfortable ride will result. To enter
OR1, push the height selector switch up once
from the NRH position while the vehicle speed is
below 35 mph (56 km/h). When in the OR1
position, if the vehicle speed remains between
40 mph (64 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) for
greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed
exceeds 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle will be
automatically lowered to NRH. Off-Road 1 may
not be available due to vehicle payload, an
instrument cluster message will be displayed
when this occurs Ú page 117.
1 — Off-Road 2 Indicator (Customer Selectable)
2 — Off-Road 1 Indicator (Customer Selectable)
3 — Normal Ride Height Indicator
(Customer Selectable)
4 — Aero Height Indicator (Customer Selectable)
5 — Entry/Exit Height Indicator
(Customer Selectable)
CAUTION!
If the vehicle is in Off-Road 1 or Off-Road 2
setting, be aware of your surroundings, you may
not have the clearance required for certain
areas and vehicle damage may occur.
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard
position of the suspension and is meant for
normal driving.
Aero Height (Lowers the vehicle approximately
0.6 inch [15 mm]) – This position provides
improved aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle.
The vehicle will automatically enter Automatic
Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains
between 62 mph (100 km/h) and 66 mph
(106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the
vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h).
The vehicle will return to NRH from Aero Mode if
the vehicle speed remains between 30 mph
(48 km/h) and 35 mph (56 km/h) for greater
than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls
below 30 mph (48 km/h).
NOTE:
Automatic Aero mode will be disabled if a
trailer is detected to prevent shifting loads.
Speed thresholds for raising/lowering the
vehicle automatically at higher speeds only
apply if Automatic Aero Mode is enabled in
your Uconnect Radio settings.
To enter Aero Height manually push the height
selector switch down once from NRH at any
vehicle speed. To return to NRH push the height
selector switch up once while vehicle speed is
less than 56 mph (90 km/h).
NOTE:
Automatic Aero Mode may be disabled through
vehicle settings in the instrument cluster display
Ú page 117 or through your Uconnect Radio (if
equipped) Ú page 238.
Entry/Exit Height (Lowers the vehicle approxi-
mately 2 inches [51 mm]) – This position lowers
the vehicle for easier passenger entry and exit
as well as lowering the vehicle for easier loading
and unloading of cargo. To enter Entry/Exit
Mode, push the height selector switch down
once from the NRH while the vehicle speed is
below 33 mph (53 km/h). Once the vehicle
speed goes below 15 mph (24 km/h) the
vehicle height will begin to lower. If the vehicle
speed remains between 15 mph (24 km/h) and
25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than 60 seconds,
or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h)
the Entry/Exit change will be canceled. To return
to Normal Height Mode, push the height
selector switch up once while in Entry/Exit or
drive the vehicle over 15 mph (24 km/h).
NOTE:
Entry/Exit Height may be achieved using the
Remote Lowering feature on your key fob for easier
entry/loading Ú page 19.
The system requires that the ignition be in the
ON/RUN position or the engine running for all user
requested changes. When lowering the vehicle, all
of the doors must be closed. If a door is opened at
any time while the vehicle is lowering, the change
will not be completed until the open door(s) is
closed.
This system uses a lifting and lowering pattern
which keeps the headlights from incorrectly
shining into oncoming traffic. When raising the
vehicle, the rear of the vehicle will move up first
and then the front. When lowering the vehicle, the
front will move down first and then the rear.
After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that
the air suspension system operates briefly; this is
normal. The system is correcting the position of the
vehicle to ensure a proper appearance.
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air
suspension system has a feature which allows the
automatic leveling to be disabled Ú page 117.
CAUTION!
When in Entry/Exit Height, be aware of your
surroundings, you may not have the clearance
required for certain areas and vehicle damage
may occur.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
NOTE:
Default Ride Height:
Select Aero Height or Normal Ride Height as
the default for all vehicle speeds and oper-
ation. This is the selected height that the
suspension will level for speed changes
(e.g. raising from Entry/Exit Height at
speed, lowering from Off-Road Height
at speed, etc.).
Default ride height can be changed by
manually adjusting the Air Suspension
switch to Normal Ride Height or Aero Ride
Height and staying in the selected height for
2.5 seconds. It will be stored as the default
ride height and the height will be main-
tained until a new default ride height is
selected.
If equipped with a touchscreen radio, all enabling/
disabling of air suspension features must be done
through the radio Ú page 238.
AIR SUSPENSION MODES
The air suspension system has multiple modes to
protect the system in unique situations. The engine
should be running to change between Air
Suspension Modes.
Automatic Aero Mode
To improve aerodynamics, the air suspension
system has a feature which will put the vehicle into
Aero Height automatically at higher speeds
Ú page 117.
Automatic Aero Mode may be disabled through
vehicle settings in the Uconnect Radio (if
equipped) Ú page 238.
Tire Jack Mode
To assist with changing a tire, the air suspension
system has a feature which allows the automatic
leveling to be disabled Ú page 238.
Transport Mode
For towing your vehicle with four wheels off the
road, the air suspension system has a feature
which will put the vehicle into Entry/Exit height and
disable the automatic load leveling system
Ú page 238.
Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment, this mode
must be enabled which will put the vehicle into
NRH and disable automatic leveling Ú page 238.
Protection Strategy
In order to protect the air suspension system, the
vehicle will disable load leveling as required
(suspension overloaded, battery charge low, etc.).
Load leveling will automatically resume as soon as
system operation requirements are met. See an
authorized dealer if system does not resume.
NOTE:
For towing with air suspension Ú page 216.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
M
ESSAGES
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message
will appear in the instrument cluster display
Ú page 117.
An audible chime will be heard whenever a system
error has been detected.
See an authorized dealer for system service if
normal operation does not resume.
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high pressure
volume of air to operate the system. To avoid
personal injury or damage to the system, see an
authorized dealer for service.
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 STARTING AND OPERATING
OPERATION
Air Suspension Switch
The indicator lamps 1 through 5 will illuminate to
show the current position of the vehicle. Flashing
indicator lamps will show a position which the
system is working to achieve. When raising, if
multiple indicator lamps are flashing, the highest
flashing indicator lamp is the position the system is
working to achieve. When lowering, if multiple
indicators are flashing, the lowest solid indicator
lamp is the position the system is working to
achieve.
Pushing the height selector up once will move the
suspension one position higher from the current
position, assuming all conditions are met
(i.e., ignition in ON/RUN position, engine running,
speed below threshold, etc.). The height selector
switch can be pushed up multiple times, each push
will raise the requested level by one position up to
a maximum position of OR2 or the highest position
allowed based on current conditions (i.e., vehicle
speed, etc.).
Pushing the height selector down once will move
the suspension one position lower from the current
level, assuming all conditions are met (i.e., ignition
in ON/RUN position, engine running, doors closed,
speed below threshold, etc.). The height selector
switch can be pushed down multiple times, each
push will lower the requested level by one position
down to a minimum of Entry/Exit Mode or the
lowest position allowed based on current
conditions (i.e., vehicle speed, etc.).
Automatic height changes will occur based on
vehicle speed and the current vehicle height. The
indicator lamps and instrument cluster display
messages will operate the same for automatic
changes and user requested changes.
Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 5, 4, 3, 2
and 1 will be illuminated.
Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 5, 4, 3 and
2 will be illuminated.
Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamps
5, 4 and 3 will be illuminated.
Aero Height– Indicator lamps 5 and 4 will be
illuminated.
Entry/Exit – Indicator lamp 5 will be illuminated.
Entry/Exit can be requested up to 33 mph
(53 km/h). If vehicle speed is reduced to, and
kept below, 15 mph (24 km/h) indicator lamp 4
will flash and indicator lamp 5 will remain solid
until Entry/Exit is achieved at which point indi-
cator lamp 4 will turn off.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
STARTING AND OPERATING 171
Automatic Aero Mode – Indicator lamps 5 and 4
will be illuminated.
Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illu-
minated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving
the vehicle or disabling in the Uconnect settings.
Tire/Jack Mode – Indicator lamps 5 and 1 will
be illuminated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by
driving the vehicle or disabling in the Uconnect
settings.
Wheel Alignment Mode – Indicator lamps 3, 4,
and 5 will be illuminated. Wheel Alignment
Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle or
disabling in the Uconnect settings.
ACTIVE-LEVEL FOUR CORNER
AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM
(OFF-ROAD GROUP) — IF EQUIPPED
DESCRIPTION
The air suspension system provides full-time
load-leveling capability along with the benefit of
being able to adjust vehicle height by using the
toggle switch.
Rebel Air Suspension Controls
Off-Road (OR) (Raises the vehicle approximately
1 inch [26 mm]) – This position is intended for
off-roading use only where maximum ground
clearance is required. To enter OR, push the
height selector switch up once from the NRH
position while vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h). While in OR, if the vehicle speed
exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the vehicle height
will be automatically lowered to NRH. Off-Road
may not be available due to vehicle payload, an
instrument cluster display message will be
shown when this occurs Ú page 117.
Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard
position of the suspension and is meant for
normal driving.
Aero Height (Lowers the vehicle approximately
0.6 inches [15 mm])
– This position provides
improved aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle.
The vehicle will automatically enter Automatic
Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains
between 62 mph (100 km/h) and 66 mph
(106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the
vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h).
The vehicle will return to NRH from Aero Mode if
the vehicle speed remains between 30 mph
(48 km/h) and 35 mph (56 km/h) for greater
than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls
below 30 mph (48 km/h).
1 — Off-Road Indicator (Customer Selectable)
2 — Normal Ride Height Indicator
(Customer Selectable)
3 — Aero Height Indicator (Customer Selectable)
4 — Entry/Exit Height Indicator
(Customer Selectable)
CAUTION!
If the vehicle is in Off-Road setting, be aware of
your surroundings, you may not have the
clearance required for certain areas and vehicle
damage may occur.
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Automatic Aero mode will be disabled if a
trailer is detected to prevent shifting loads.
Speed thresholds for raising or lowering the
vehicle only apply if Automatic Aero Mode is
enabled through vehicle settings on your
Uconnect Radio.
To enter Aero Height manually push the
height selector switch down once from NRH
at any vehicle speed. To return to NRH push
the height selector switch up once while
vehicle speed is less than 56 mph
(90 km/h).
Automatic Aero Mode may be disabled
through vehicle settings on your Uconnect
Radio.
Entry/Exit Height (Lowers the vehicle approxi-
mately 3 inches [73 mm])
– This position lowers
the vehicle for easier passenger entry and exit as
well as lowering the vehicle for easier loading and
unloading of cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode,
push the height selector switch down twice from
the NRH while the vehicle speed is below 33 mph
(53 km/h). Once the vehicle speed goes below
15 mph (24 km/h) the vehicle height will begin to
lower. If the vehicle speed remains between
15 mph (24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h) for
greater than 60 seconds, or the vehicle speed
exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the Entry/Exit change
will be canceled. To return to Normal Height
Mode, push the height selector switch up twice
while in Entry/Exit or drive the vehicle over
15 mph (24 km/h). Entry/Exit Height may not be
available due to vehicle payload, an instrument
cluster display message will be shown when this
occurs
Ú
page 117.
The system requires that the ignition be in the
ON/RUN position or the engine running for all user
requested changes. When lowering the vehicle, all
of the doors must be closed. If a door is opened at
any time while the vehicle is lowering, the change
will not be completed until the open door(s) is
closed.
This system uses a lifting and lowering pattern
which keeps the headlights from incorrectly
shining into oncoming traffic. When raising the
vehicle, the rear of the vehicle will move up first
and then the front. When lowering the vehicle, the
front will move down first and then the rear.
After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that
the air suspension system operates briefly; this is
normal. The system is correcting the position of the
vehicle to ensure a proper appearance.
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air
suspension system has a feature which allows the
automatic leveling to be disabled Ú page 238.
NOTE:
Default Ride Height:
Select Aero Height or Normal Ride Height as
the default for all vehicle speeds and oper-
ation. This is the selected height that the
suspension will level for speed changes
(e.g. raising from Entry/Exit Height at speed,
lowering from Off-Road Height at speed,
etc.).
Default ride height can be changed by
manually adjusting the Air Suspension
switch to Normal Ride Height or Aero Ride
Height and staying in the selected height for
2.5 seconds. It will be stored as the default
ride height and the height will be main-
tained until a new default ride height is
selected.
If equipped with a touchscreen radio, all enabling/
disabling of air suspension features must be done
through the radio Ú page 238.
CAUTION!
When in Entry/Exit Height, be aware of your
surroundings, you may not have the clearance
required for certain areas and vehicle damage
may occur.
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high pressure
volume of air to operate the system. To avoid
personal injury or damage to the system, see an
authorized dealer for service.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
STARTING AND OPERATING 173
AIR SUSPENSION MODES
The air suspension system has multiple modes to
protect the system in unique situations:
Automatic Aero Mode
To improve aerodynamics, the air suspension
system has a feature which will put the vehicle into
Aero height automatically at higher speeds
Ú page 117.
Tire Jack Mode
To assist with changing a tire, the air suspension
system has a feature which allows the automatic
leveling to be disabled Ú page 238.
Transport Mode
For towing your vehicle with four wheels off the
road, the air suspension system has a feature
which will put the vehicle into Entry/Exit height and
disable the automatic load leveling system
Ú page 238.
Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment, this mode
must be enabled which moves the vehicle to
normal ride height and disables the automatic
leveling Ú page 238.
Protection Strategy
In order to protect the air suspension system, the
vehicle will disable load leveling as required
(suspension overloaded, battery charge low, etc.).
Load leveling will automatically resume as soon as
system operation requirements are met. See an
authorized dealer if system does not resume.
NOTE:
For towing with air suspension Ú page 216.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
M
ESSAGES
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message
will appear in the instrument cluster display
Ú page 117.
An audible chime will be heard whenever a system
error has been detected.
See an authorized dealer for system service if
normal operation does not resume.
OPERATION
Air Suspension Switch
The indicator lamps 1 through 4 will illuminate to
show the current position of the vehicle. Flashing
indicator lamps will show a position which the
system is working to achieve. When raising or
lowering, the flashing indicator lamp is the position
the system is working to achieve.
Pushing the height selector switch up once will
move the suspension one position higher from the
current position, assuming all conditions are met
(i.e., key in ON/RUN position, engine running,
speed below threshold, etc.). The height selector
switch can be pushed up multiple times, each push
will raise the requested level by one position up to
a maximum position of OR or the highest position
allowed based on current conditions (i.e., vehicle
speed, etc.).
Pushing the height selector switch down once will
move the suspension one position lower from the
current level, assuming all conditions are met (i.e.,
key in ON/RUN position, engine running, doors
closed, speed below threshold, etc.). The height
selector switch can be pushed down multiple
times, each push will lower the requested level by
one position down to a minimum of Entry/Exit
Mode or the lowest position allowed based on
current conditions (i.e., vehicle speed, etc.).
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic height changes will occur based on
vehicle speed and the current vehicle height. The
indicator lamps and instrument cluster display
messages will operate the same for automatic
changes and user requested changes.
Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 4, 3, 2, and
1 will be illuminated.
Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamps 4,
3, and 2 will be illuminated.
Aero Height– Indicator lamps 4 and 3 will be
illuminated.
Entry/Exit – Indicator lamp 4 will be illuminated.
Entry/Exit can be requested up to 33 mph
(53 km/h). If vehicle speed is reduced to, and
kept below, 15 mph (24 km/h) indicator lamp 3
will flash and indicator lamp 4 will remain solid
until Entry/Exit is achieved at which point indi-
cator lamp 3 will turn off.
Automatic Aero Mode – Indicator lamps 5 and 4
will be illuminated.
Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illu-
minated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving
the vehicle or disabling through the Uconnect
settings.
Tire/Jack Mode – Indicator lamps 4 and 1 will
be illuminated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by
driving the vehicle or disabling through the
Uconnect settings.
Wheel Alignment Mode – Indicator lamps 2, 3,
and 4 will be illuminated. Wheel Alignment
Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle or
disabling through the Uconnect settings.
AXLE LOCK SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an electronically
locking rear differential. When engaged, this
differential locks the axle shafts forcing the wheels
to spin at an equal rate. The locking of the rear
differential should only be engaged during
low-speed, extreme off-road situations where one
wheel is likely to not be in contact with the ground.
It is not recommended to drive the vehicle with the
differentials locked on pavement due to the
reduced ability to turn and speed limitations.
AXLE LOCK Button
The locking rear axle is controlled by the
AXLE LOCK button.
Under normal driving conditions, the rear axle
should be unlocked.
During the command to lock the rear axle, the
indicator light will flash until the axle is locked.
After the lock command has been successfully
executed, the light will remain on solid.
CAUTION!
Do not lock the rear axle on hard surfaced
roads. The ability to steer the vehicle is
reduced and damage to the drivetrain may
occur when the axle is locked on hard
surfaced roads.
Do not try to lock the rear axle if the vehicle is
stuck and the tires are spinning. You can
damage drivetrain components. Lock the rear
axle before attempting situations or navi-
gating terrain, which could possibly cause the
vehicle to become stuck.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
Operating in 4WD LOW the locker can be engaged
up to 40 mph (64 km/h) and will remain engaged
throughout the 4WD LOW speed range.
Operating the locker in 2WD, 4WD AUTO, and 4WD
LOCK/HIGH, the locker can be engaged up to
20 mph (32 km/h). While driving with the locker
engaged, if speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h), the
locker will automatically disengage, but will
automatically re-engage at 20 mph (32 km/h).
NOTE:
Left to right wheel speed difference may be
necessary to allow the rear axle to fully lock. If the
indicator light is flashing after selecting the rear
axle lock mode, drive the vehicle in a turn or on
loose gravel to expedite the locking action.
The axle locker could become torque locked due to
side to side loads on the rear axle. Driving slowly
while turning the steering wheel from a left hand
turn to a right hand turn or driving in REVERSE for
a short distance may be required to release the
torque lock and unlock the axles.
To unlock the rear axle, push the AXLE LOCK
button. The AXLE LOCK indicator light will go out
when the rear axle is unlocked.
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL —
IF EQUIPPED
The limited-slip differential provides additional
traction on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel,
particularly when there is a difference between the
traction characteristics of the surface under the
right and left rear wheels. During normal driving
and cornering, the limited-slip unit performs
similarly to a conventional differential. On slippery
surfaces, however, the differential delivers more of
the driving effort to the rear wheel having the
better traction.
The limited-slip differential is especially helpful
during slippery driving conditions. With both rear
wheels on a slippery surface, a slight application of
the accelerator will supply maximum traction.
When starting with only one rear wheel on an
excessively slippery surface, slight momentary
application of the parking brake may be necessary
to gain maximum traction.
Care should be taken to avoid sudden
accelerations when both rear wheels are on a
slippery surface. This could cause both rear wheels
to spin, and allow the vehicle to slide sideways on
the crowned surface of a road or in a turn.
POWER STEERING
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will provide
increased vehicle response and ease of
maneuverability. The power steering system
adapts to different driving conditions.
If the steering icon is flashing, it indicates that the
vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service.
It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering
assistance.
If the steering icon is displayed and the
“POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP”
message is displayed on the instrument cluster
screen, this indicates an over temperature
condition in the power steering system. Once
driving conditions are safe, pull over and let the
vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon and
message turn off Ú page 117.
WARNING!
When servicing vehicles equipped with a
limited-slip or locking differential, never run the
engine with one rear wheel off the ground as the
vehicle may drive through the rear wheel
remaining on the ground and result in
unintended movement.
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the steering icon is displayed and the “SERVICE
POWER STEERING – ASSIST OFF” message is
displayed on the instrument cluster screen, this
indicates the vehicle needs to be taken to the
dealer for service Ú page 117.
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no
longer operational, it is still possible to steer the
vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a
substantial increase in steering effort, espe-
cially at low speeds and during parking maneu-
vers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINES
ONLY — IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by
shutting off four of the engine's eight cylinders
during light load and cruise conditions. The system
is automatic with no driver inputs or additional
driving skills required.
NOTE:
This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function, included with eTorque
equipped vehicles, is developed to save fuel and
reduce emissions. The system will stop the engine
automatically as the vehicle decelerates at low
speeds if the required conditions are met.
Releasing the brake pedal or shifting out of DRIVE
will automatically restart the engine.
Vehicles equipped with eTorque contain a
heavy-duty motor generator and an additional
hybrid electric battery to store energy from vehicle
deceleration used to expand engine off energy
storage and for engine startup after a stop, as well
as providing engine torque assist when conditions
are met to enable this.
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
normal customer engine start. It will remain in
STOP/START NOT READY until you drive forward
with a vehicle speed greater than 2 mph (3 km/h).
At that time, the system will go into STOP/START
READY and if all other conditions are met, the
system may go into STOP/START AUTOSTOP
ACTIVE Autostop mode.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following
Must Occur:
1. The system must be in STOP/START READY
state. A STOP/START READY message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster within the
Stop/Start section
Ú
page 117.
2. The vehicle must be decelerating and likely
coming to a complete stop.
3. The transmission gear selector must be in
DRIVE and the brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will
move to the zero position and the stop/start
telltale will illuminate indicating you are in an
Autostop. While in an Autostop, the Climate
Controls system may automatically adjust airflow
to maintain cabin comfort. Customer settings will
be maintained upon return to an engine running
condition.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
many safety and comfort conditions to see if they
are fulfilled. In following situations, the engine will
not Autostop:
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled
Driver’s door is not closed
The vehicle is on a steep grade
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower
speed
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature
Engine or exhaust temperature is too high
The battery is charging
The transmission is not in DRIVE
Hood is open
Transfer case is in 4WD LOW
TOW/HAUL mode is selected
Accelerator pedal input
Excessive 12 Volt loads
Brake application is adequate to obtain and
maintain a stop
It may be possible to operate the vehicle several
consecutive times in extreme conditions and not
meet all criteria to enable an Autostop state.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
A
UTOSTOP MODE
While in DRIVE, the engine will start when the
brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is
pressed and the transmission will automatically
reengage upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode
The engine will start automatically when:
The transmission selector is moved from DRIVE
to REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or PARK
To maintain cabin temperature near the
HVAC settings
HVAC is set to full defrost mode
12 Volt demand requires engine restart
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed
Transfer case is in 4WD LOW
The emissions system override is present
A Stop/Start system error is present
Conditions That Force An Automatic Shift To Park
While In Autostop Mode
The engine will not start automatically and the
transmission will be placed in PARK if:
The driver door is open and brake pedal
released
The driver door is open and the driver seat belt
is unbuckled
The engine hood has been opened
A Stop/Start system error is present
The engine may then be restarted by moving the
transmission shift selector out of PARK (e.g., to
DRIVE) or, in some cases, only by a key start. The
instrument cluster will display a “SHIFT OUT OF
PARK” message, or a “STOP/START KEY START
REQUIRED” message, to indicate which action is
required Ú page 117.
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 STARTING AND OPERATING
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Stop/Start OFF Switch
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in the
instrument cluster display and the Autostop mode
will be disabled Ú page 117.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to the
ON position every time the ignition is turned OFF
and back ON.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE
S
TOP/START SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system,
the system will not shut down the engine.
A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message will
appear in the instrument cluster display
Ú page 131.
The system will need to be checked by an
authorized dealer.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise
Control system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) system:
Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a
constant preset speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the
vehicle speed up to the preset speed to main-
tain a distance with the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not
enabled, Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not
detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be
aware of the feature selected.
Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a
time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control
is enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control will be
unavailable, and vice versa.
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
20 mph (32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right
side of the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
1 — SET (+)/Accel
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (-)/Decel
4 — On/Off
5 — RES/Resume
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
STARTING AND OPERATING 179
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise
Control. The cruise indicator light in the instrument
cluster display will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the on/off button a second time. The
cruise indicator light will turn off. The system
should be turned off when not in use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed,
push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or
SET (-) button.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set
speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease
speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph incre-
ments until the button is released. The new set
speed is reflected in the instrument cluster
display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h incre-
ments until the button is released. The new set
speed is reflected in the instrument cluster
display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+) or SET (-)
button, the new set speed will be the current speed
of the vehicle.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Control is set, press the
accelerator to pass as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return
to the set speed.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your
vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and
you could lose control and have an accident. Do
not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not
in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set
the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have an
accident. Always ensure the system is off when
you are not using it.
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 STARTING AND OPERATING
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or
gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive
without Cruise Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the
RES button and release. Resume can be used at
any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC
(cancel) button, or normal brake pressure while
slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Cruise
Control system without erasing the set speed from
memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the
Cruise Control system without erasing the set
speed from memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in
the OFF position, erases the set speed from
memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by Cruise Control while
traveling on highways and major roadways.
However, it is not a safety system and not designed
to prevent collisions. The Cruise Control function
performs differently Ú page 178.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged
in light to moderate traffic conditions without the
constant need to reset your speed. ACC utilizes a
radar sensor and a forward facing camera
designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you
to maintain a set speed.
NOTE:
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC
will apply limited braking or acceleration (not to
exceed the original set speed) automatically to
maintain a preset following distance, while
matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-
tions to the vehicle will affect the performance
of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Colli-
sion Warning system.
Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled)
will not detect vehicles directly ahead of you.
Always be aware of the feature selected
Ú page 490.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your
vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and
you could lose control and have an accident.
Do not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
STARTING AND OPERATING 181
(Continued)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel
operate the Adaptive Cruise Control system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the
current ACC system settings. The information it
displays depends on ACC system status.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for active
driver involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic,
and weather conditions, vehicle speed,
distance to the vehicle ahead and, most
importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road condi-
tions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control
of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a
stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a
disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance condi-
tions.
Does not always fully recognize complex
driving conditions, which can result in
wrong or missing distance warnings.
Will bring your vehicle to a complete stop
while following a vehicle ahead and hold
your vehicle for approximately three
minutes in the stop position. If the vehicle
ahead does not start moving within three
minutes the parking brake will be acti-
vated, and the ACC system will be
cancelled.
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situa-
tions (i.e., in highway construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway
off-ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have
steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe driving
at a constant speed.
WARNING!
1 — Distance Setting Increase
2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
3 — Distance Setting Decrease
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 STARTING AND OPERATING
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button until one of the following appears in the
instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed,
the display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
instrument cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of
the following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC
display activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready
state, the instrument cluster display will read
“ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster
display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
When in 4WD Low
When the brakes are applied
When the parking brake is applied
When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL
When the vehicle speed is below the minimum
speed range
When the brakes are overheated
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low
speeds
When there is a stationary vehicle in front of
your vehicle in close proximity
When Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Full Off
mode is active
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again.
At this time, the system will turn off and the
instrument cluster display will show “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push
the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and
release. The instrument cluster display will show
the set speed.
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it to
go faster than you want. You could lose control
and have a collision. Always leave the system off
when you are not using it.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without
ACC enabled. To change between the different
modes, push the ACC on/off button which turns
the ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise Control off.
Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off
button will result in turning on (changing to) Fixed
Speed Cruise Control mode.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to
20 mph (32 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
20 mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be
the current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can
cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate
beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the
message “ACC DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display
in the instrument cluster display.
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed while ACC is enabled, the system will not
control the distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be
determined by the position of the accelerator
pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed
Speed Cruise Control systems:
The brake pedal is applied
The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
The trailer brake is applied manually (if
equipped)
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates
The vehicle parking brake is applied
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode
The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated)
The following conditions will only cancel the
ACC system:
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
is pushed
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is
pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
4WD Low is engaged
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES
(resume) button and then remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster
display will show the last set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
being used.
WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system
will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the
proximity warning does not activate and no
alarm will sound even if you are too close to the
vehicle ahead since neither the presence of the
vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
is detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
Always be aware which mode is selected.
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 STARTING AND OPERATING
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph
(0 km/h) when ACC is active.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is at a standstill for longer than
two seconds, then the driver will either have to
push the RES (resume) button, or apply the
accelerator pedal to reengage the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) to the existing set speed.
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set
speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease
speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph
increments until the button is released. The new
set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster
display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The new
set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster
display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+) button or
SET (-) buttons, the new set speed will be the
current speed of the vehicle.
When ACC Is Active
When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if
the engine’s braking power does not slow the
vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the
brake system will automatically slow the
vehicle.
The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full
stop when following the vehicle in front. If your
vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a standstill,
after two seconds the driver will either have to
push the RES (resume) button, or apply the
accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the
existing set speed.
The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In
addition, downshifting may occur while climbing
uphill or descending downhill. This is normal
operation and necessary to maintain set speed.
When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a
set speed that is too high or too low for
prevailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too
sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
STARTING AND OPERATING 185
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) can be set by varying the
distance setting between four bars (longest), three
bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed,
ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle
ahead. This distance setting displays in the
instrument cluster display.
Distance Settings
To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Increase button and release. Each time
the button is pushed, the distance setting
increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the
Distance Decrease button and release. Each time
the button is pushed, the distance setting
decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle
is detected in the same lane, the instrument
cluster displays the ACC Set With Target Detected
Indicator Light, and the system adjusts vehicle
speed automatically to maintain the distance
setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above
the set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if
ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will flash in the
instrument cluster display and a chime will sound
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action
and does not mean that the Forward Collision
Warning system is applying the brakes autono-
mously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
engaged, and following a vehicle, the system will
provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC
set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver
utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active
when passing on the left hand side.
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 STARTING AND OPERATING
ACC Operation At Stop
In the event that the ACC system brings your
vehicle to a standstill while following the vehicle in
front, if the vehicle in front starts moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, your
vehicle will resume motion without the need for
any driver action.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving within
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill,
the driver will either have to push the RES (resume)
button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage
the ACC to the existing set speed.
NOTE:
After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a stand-
still for approximately three consecutive minutes,
the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC
system will be canceled.
While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if
the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver door
is opened, the parking brake will be activated, and
the ACC system will be canceled.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF
VEHICLE” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning will display and a chime will
sound when conditions temporarily limit system
performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may
also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will display
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and
snow, or tunnels with reflective tiles). The ACC
system will recover after the vehicle has left these
areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise
Control is still available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning
or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located
in the camera in the center of the windshield, on
the forward side of the rearview mirror.
To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance
items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully clear
the windshield.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunc-
tion or failure and require a sensor realignment.
Do not attach or install any accessories near the
sensor, including transparent material. Doing so
could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is
no longer present, the system will return to the
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will resume
function by simply reactivating it.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
STARTING AND OPERATING 187
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain,
mud, or other obstruction, have the radar
sensor realigned at an authorized dealer.
Installing a snowplow, front-end protector, an
aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not
recommended. Doing so may block the sensor
and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display and a chime will
sound when conditions temporarily limit system
performance. This most often occurs at times of
poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and
fog. The ACC system may also become temporarily
blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or
ice on windshield, driving directly into the sun and
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the
instrument cluster display will show “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and
the system will have degraded performance.
This message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in adverse weather conditions.
The ACC/FCW system will recover after the vehicle
has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects
in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the windshield and the camera
located on the back side of the inside rear view
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of an
obstruction.
When the condition that created limited
functionality is no longer present, the system will
return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without any
snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the
windshield and forward facing camera inspected
at an authorized dealer.
SERVICE ACC/FCW WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required”
or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”,
there may be an internal system fault or a
temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable
under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily
unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem
persists, see an authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
NOTE:
Aftermarket add-ons such as snowplows, lift
kits, and brush/grille bars can hinder module
performance. Ensure the radar/camera has no
obstructions in the field of view.
Height modifications can limit module perfor-
mance and functionality.
Do not put stickers or easy passes over the
camera/radar field of view.
Any modifications to the vehicle that may
obstruct the field of view of the radar/camera
are not recommended.
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake
late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert
and may need to intervene. The following are
examples of these types of situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
ACC while towing a trailer is recommended only
with an Integrated Trailer Brake Controller.
Aftermarket trailer brake controllers will not
activate the trailer brakes when ACC is braking.
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 STARTING AND OPERATING
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that
is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle
merging in from a side lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset
vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel,
which can cause your vehicle to brake or
accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may increase or decrease the vehicle
speed for stability, with no vehicle ahead detected.
Once the vehicle is out of the curve, the system will
resume your original set speed. This is a part of
normal ACC system functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
USING ACC ON HILLS
ACC performance may be limited when driving on
hills. ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane
depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hill.
ACC Hill Example
LANE CHANGING
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely
in the lane in which you are traveling. In the
following lane changing example, ACC has not yet
detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not
detect the vehicle until it's too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a
vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There may
not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing
vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the
brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
STARTING AND OPERATING 189
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
detected until they have moved fully into the lane.
There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle
ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects or
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in
situations where the vehicle you are following exits
your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your
lane. It will consider this stopped vehicle a
stationary object as it did not previously detect
movement from it. Always be attentive and ready
to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between
the rear and/or front fascia/bumper and a
detected obstacle when backing up or moving
forward (e.g. during a parking maneuver). If your
vehicle is equipped with the automatic braking
function, the vehicle brakes may be automatically
applied and released when the vehicle is in
REVERSE if the system detects a possible collision
with an obstacle.
NOTE:
The driver can disable the automatic braking
function by turning ParkSense off via the Park-
Sense switch. The driver can also override auto-
matic braking by changing the gear or by
pressing the gas pedal over 90% of its capacity
during the braking event.
Automatic brakes will not be available if the
vehicle is in 4WD Low.
Automatic brakes will not be available if there is
a fault in the brake module.
Automatic brakes will not be available if there is
a faulted condition detected with the ParkSense
Park Assist system or the Braking System.
The automatic braking function may only be
applied if the vehicle deceleration is not enough
to avoid colliding with a detected obstacle.
The automatic braking function may not be
applied fast enough for obstacles that move
toward the rear of the vehicle from the left
and/or right sides.
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 STARTING AND OPERATING
The automatic braking function can be
enabled/disabled from the Customer Program-
mable Features section of the Uconnect system.
ParkSense will retain its last known configura-
tion state for the automatic braking function
through ignition cycles.
Trailer hitch ball assembly may cause false
braking events if left attached after towing.
The automatic braking function is intended to
assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions with
detected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE
gear.
NOTE:
The system is provided to assist the driver and
not to substitute the driver.
The driver must stay in full control of the
vehicle's acceleration and braking and is
responsible for the vehicle's movements.
For limitations of this system and usage
precautions, see Ú page 194.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is
enabled while in one of these gears, the system will
remain active until the vehicle speed is increased
to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above.
A warning will appear in the instrument cluster
display indicating the vehicle speed is above
ParkSense operating speed while in REVERSE. The
system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors (six if equipped with
Active ParkSense), located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle
that is within the sensors’ field of view, and the four
ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that
is within the sensors’ field of view. The front
sensors can detect obstacles from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm) from
the front fascia/bumper. The rear sensors can
detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm). These distances
depend on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle in the horizontal direction.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display Ú page 117. It
provides visual warnings to indicate the distance
between the rear fascia/bumper and/or front
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the
system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or
when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has
been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in the left, right, or center
regions based on the obstacle’s distance and
location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front region,
the display will show a single solid arc in the center
front region with no chime. As the vehicle moves
closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and a fast
chime will be heard and will change from fast to
continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
front region, the display will show a single flashing
arc in the left and/or right front region and will
produce a fast chime. As the vehicle moves closer
to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc
moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from fast to continuous.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
STARTING AND OPERATING 191
Front/Rear ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Solid Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Solid Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches (30cm)
Audible Alert
(Chime)
None
Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None None None 6thFlashing 5th Solid
Arcs-Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Solid
Arcs-Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Solid
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert (Chime) None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Solid
Arcs-Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Solid
Arcs-Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Solid
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist
audible alert (chime) after approximately three
seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the
vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
The Front and Rear chime volume settings are
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 238.
ENABLING AND DISABLING FRONT
A
ND/OR REAR PARKSENSE
Front ParkSense can be enabled and
disabled with the Front ParkSense
switch.
Rear ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the Rear ParkSense switch.
When the Front or Rear ParkSense switch is
pushed to disable the system, the instrument
cluster display Ú page 117 will show a vehicle
graphic of the Front or Rear ParkSense on/off
state for two seconds.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and
the Front or Rear system is disabled, the
instrument cluster display will show a vehicle
graphic with “OFF” on the corresponding side. This
vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
NOTE:
Arc alerts from the enabled ParkSense system, will
interrupt the five second messages, and the
instrument cluster display will show the vehicle
graphic with the corresponding arcs and “OFF”
message.
The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be on
when Front or Rear ParkSense is disabled or
requires service. The Front or Rear ParkSense
switch LED will be off when the Front or Rear
system is enabled. If the Front or Rear ParkSense
switch is pushed, and the system requires service,
the Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will blink
momentarily, and then the LED will be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense
System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime,
once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED"
message for five seconds. When the gear selector
is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected
a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display
will display a "WIPE OFF" message on the
corresponding blocked system while the vehicle is
in REVERSE. The system will continue to provide
arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument
cluster display make sure the outer surface and
the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle
the ignition. If the message continues to appear
see an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Water from a car wash or road slush in freezing
weather may also cause sensors to become
blocked.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument
cluster display, see your authorized dealer.
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard
cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear fascias/bumpers
are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to
keep the ParkSense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other
vibrations could affect the performance of
ParkSense.
When you turn Front or Rear ParkSense off, the
instrument cluster display will show a vehicle
graphic of the Front or Rear ParkSense on/off
state for two seconds. Furthermore, once you
turn Front or Rear ParkSense off, it remains off
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the
ignition.
When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and Front or Rear ParkSense
is turned off, the instrument cluster display will
show a vehicle graphic with "OFF" in the corre-
sponding side. This vehicle graphic will be
displayed for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of
the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The
sensors must not be covered with ice, snow,
slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can
result in the system not working properly. The
ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle
is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if obstacles such as bicycle carriers,
trailer hitches, etc. are placed near the rear
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close obstacle as a
sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message to
be appear in the instrument cluster display.
ParkSense should be disabled when the tailgate
is in the lowered or open position. A lowered
tailgate could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle and could also
cause a false braking event.
The Rear ParkSense system will automatically
disable when the system detects that a trailer
with trailer brakes has been connected to the
Integrated Trailer Brake Module.
The Front ParkSense system will automatically
disable if a snowplow has been connected to
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly be disconnected from the vehicle
when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball
will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia/bumper when the vehicle sounds
the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly,
depending on its size and shape, and give a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle, and could cause false braking.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
intended to assist the driver during parallel and
perpendicular parking maneuvers by identifying a
proper parking space, providing audible/visual
instructions through the instrument cluster
display, and controlling the steering wheel. The
ParkSense Active Park Assist system is defined as
“semi-automatic” since the driver maintains
control of the accelerator, gear selector and
brakes. Depending on the driver's parking
maneuver selection, the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system is capable of maneuvering a vehicle
into a parallel or a perpendicular parking space on
either side (i.e., driver side or passenger side).
NOTE:
The driver is always responsible for controlling
the vehicle, responsible for any surrounding
objects, and must intervene as required.
The system is provided to assist the driver and
not to substitute the driver.
During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver
touches the steering wheel after being
instructed to remove their hands from the
steering wheel, the system will cancel, and the
driver will be required to manually complete the
parking maneuver.
The system may not work in all conditions (e.g.
environmental conditions such as heavy rain,
snow, etc., or if searching for a parking space
that has surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic
sensor waves).
New vehicles from the dealership must have at
least 30 miles (48 km) accumulated before the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system is fully cali-
brated and performs accurately. This is due to
the system’s dynamic vehicle calibration to
improve the performance of the feature.
The driver must control the vehicle’s brakes.
The automatic emergency braking feature is
NOT intended to substitute for the driver during
REVERSE maneuvers.
ENABLING AND DISABLING THE
P
ARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system
can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch,
located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a 12-inch Uconnect
display, the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is
located above the display.
To enable or disable the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system, push the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch once (LED turns on). Pushing the
switch a second time will disable the system
(LED turns off).
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-
mended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using ParkSense.
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn
off automatically for any of the following
conditions:
Parking maneuver is completed.
Vehicle speed is greater than 18 mph
(30 km/h) when searching for a parking space.
Vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (7 km/h)
during active steering guidance into the parking
space.
Steering wheel is touched during active steering
guidance into the parking space.
ParkSense Front/Rear Park Assist switch is
pushed.
Driver's door is opened.
Tailgate is opened.
Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Braking
System intervention.
Vehicle is in 4WD Low.
Axle Locker is active.
Trailer is connected.
Trailer Reverse Steering Control (TRSC) is
active.
Snowplow is connected.
NOTE:
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow
a maximum of eight shifts between DRIVE and
REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed
within eight shifts, the system will cancel and the
instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to
complete the maneuver manually.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only
operate and search for a parking space when the
following conditions are present:
Gear selector is in DRIVE.
The ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is acti-
vated.
Driver's door is closed.
Tailgate is closed.
Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
The outer surface and the underside of the front
and rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear
of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is driven above approximately
15 mph (25 km/h), the instrument cluster display
will instruct the driver to slow down. If the vehicle
is driven above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h),
the system will cancel. The driver must then reac-
tivate the system by pushing the ParkSense Active
Park Assist switch.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active
Park Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then
the LED will turn off if any of the above conditions
are not present.
PARALLEL /PERPENDICULAR PARKING
S
PACE ASSISTANCE OPERATION
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
enabled, the messages “Active ParkSense
Searching - Press OK To Switch To Perpendicular
Park” or “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK to
Switch to Parallel Park” will appear in the
instrument cluster display. Push the OK button on
the left side of the steering wheel to change your
parking space setting. You can switch between
perpendicular and parallel parking maneuvers.
Press OK to Switch to Perpendicular Park
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
Press OK to Switch to Parallel Park
NOTE:
When searching for a parking space, use the
turn signal indicator to select which side of the
vehicle you want to perform the parking
maneuver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system will automatically search for a parking
space on the passenger's side of the vehicle if
the turn signal is not activated.
The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free
and clear of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians,
bicycles, etc.).
The driver is responsible to ensure that the
selected parking space is suitable for the
maneuver and free/clear of anything that may
be overhanging or protruding into the parking
space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from
surrounding objects/vehicles).
When searching for a parking space, the driver
should drive as parallel or perpendicular
(depending on the type of maneuver) to other
vehicles as possible.
The feature will only indicate the last detected
parking space (example: if passing multiple
available parking spaces, the system will only
indicate the last detected parking space for the
maneuver). A parking space is considered
invalid after the vehicle is 32 ft (10 m) or more
away from it.
When an available parking space has been found,
and the vehicle is not in position, you will be
instructed to move forward to position the vehicle
for a perpendicular or parallel parking sequence
(depending on the type of maneuver being
performed).
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be
instructed to stop the vehicle’s movement and
remove your hands from the steering wheel. When
the vehicle comes to a standstill (your hands still
removed from the steering wheel), you will be
instructed to place the gear selector into the
REVERSE position.
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
The system may then instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete before then instructing to
check surroundings and move backward.
Move Backward Into Parallel Parking Space
Move Backward Into Perpendicular Parking Space
The system may instruct several more gear shifts
(DRIVE and REVERSE), with hands off of the
steering wheel, before instructing the driver to
check surroundings and complete the parking
maneuver.
When the vehicle is in the parking position, the
maneuver is complete and the driver will be
instructed to check the vehicle's parking position,
then shift the vehicle into PARK. The message
"Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking
Position" will be displayed momentarily.
NOTE:
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake
and accelerator during the semi-automatic
parking maneuver.
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check
their surroundings and be prepared to stop the
vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver
intervention is required.
When the system instructs the driver to remove
their hands from the steering wheel, the driver
should check their surroundings and begin to
back up slowly.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
allow a maximum of eight shifts between DRIVE
and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be
completed within eight shifts, the system will
cancel and the instrument cluster display will
instruct the driver to complete the maneuver
manually.
The system will cancel the maneuver if the
vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during
active steering guidance into the parking space.
The system will provide a warning to the driver
at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them to slow down.
The driver is then responsible for completing the
maneuver if the system is canceled.
If the system is canceled during the maneuver
for any reason, the driver must take control of
the vehicle.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
(Continued)
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds
above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a
forward looking camera to detect lane markings
and measure vehicle position within the lane
boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the
driver drifts out of the lane (no turn signal applied),
the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning
in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel,
as well as a visual warning in the instrument
cluster display, to prompt the driver to remain
within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic
warning by applying force into the steering wheel at
any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and
the driver drifts across the lane marking (no turn
signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a
visual warning through the instrument cluster
display to prompt the driver to remain within the
lane.
When only a single lane marking is detected, a
haptic or a torque warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provide an
audible and visual warning to the driver if
removed. The system will cancel if the driver
does not return their hands to the wheel.
LaneSense will disable when a snowplow is
connected to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when performing
parallel or perpendicular parking maneuvers
even when using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system. Always check carefully behind
and in front of your vehicle, look behind and in
front of you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up
and moving forward. You are responsible for
safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize
every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected
or not detected at all. Obstacles located above
or below the sensors’ field of view will not be
detected when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system in
order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that
the driver looks over his/her shoulders when
using the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system.
CAUTION!
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The LaneSense button is located on the
switch panel below the Uconnect display.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a 12-inch Uconnect
Display screen, the LaneSense button is located
above the display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the
LaneSense button (LED turns off). A “LaneSense
On” message is shown in the instrument cluster
display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button again (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state on or off from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE
The LaneSense system will indicate the current
lane drift condition through the instrument cluster
display.
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines
are gray when both of the lane boundaries have
not been detected and the LaneSense telltale
is solid white.
System ON (Gray Lines) With White Telltale
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane-
Sense Telltale is solid white when only the
left lane marking has been detected and the
system is ready to provide visual warnings in the
instrument cluster display if an unintentional
lane departure occurs on the left side.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the visual warning in the instrument
cluster display will show the left lane line
flashing yellow (on/off). The LaneSense
telltale changes from solid white to
flashing yellow.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Lane Line)
With Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the
right lane marking has been detected.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
Left Lane Departure — Both Lane Lines Detected
When the LaneSense system is on and both the
lane markings have been detected, the system
is "armed" to provide visual warnings in the
instrument cluster display and a torque warning
in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane
departure occurs. The lane lines turn from gray
to white and the LaneSense telltale is solid
green.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines)
With Green Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift
situation, the left lane line turns solid yellow.
The LaneSense telltale changes from solid
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is
applied to the steering wheel in the opposite
direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Lane Line)
With Solid Yellow Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the left lane line flashes yellow
(on/off). The LaneSense telltale changes
from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time
torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Lane Line)
With Flashing Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the
intensity of the torque warning and the warning
zone sensitivity (Early/Medium/Late) that you can
configure through the Uconnect system
Ú page 238.
NOTE:
When enabled the system operates above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h).
The warnings are disabled with use of the
turn signal.
The system will not apply torque to the steering
wheel whenever a safety system engages
(Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control System,
Electronic Stability Control, Forward Collision
Warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to
see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of
your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the
Navigation/Multimedia radio display screen along
with a caution note to “Check Entire Surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds this
note will disappear. The ParkView Camera is
located in the center of the tailgate handle.
NOTE:
Removing the tailgate will disable the Rear View
Camera function.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera:
1. Press the Vehicle button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect display and then
select the Controls menu.
2. Press the Back Up Camera icon to turn the
Rear View Camera system on.
NOTE:
The Rear View camera can also be turned on
manually through the Apps menu within the
Uconnect system.
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has
programmable modes of operation that may be
selected through the Uconnect system
Ú page 238.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned off, the rear camera mode is
exited and the previous screen appears. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera
delay turned on, the camera image will continue to
be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out
of REVERSE unless the following conditions occur:
The vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
vehicle is shifted into PARK, the vehicle’s ignition is
placed in the OFF position, or the user presses
image defeat X to exit out of the camera video
display.
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is
activated through the Back Up Camera button in
the Controls menu, and the vehicle speed is
greater than, or equal to, 8 mph (13 km/h), a
display timer for the image is initiated. The image
will continue to be displayed until the display timer
exceeds 10 seconds.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be
displayed continuously until deactivated via the
touchscreen button X, the transmission is
shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the
OFF position.
The touchscreen button X to disable display of
the camera image is made available ONLY when
the vehicle is not in REVERSE.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and
its projected back up path based on the steering
wheel position. A dashed centerline overlay
indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with
parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver. Different
colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the
lens.
Zoom View
When the Rear View Camera image is being
displayed, and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph
(13 km/h) while in any gear, Zoom View is
available. By pressing the “magnifying glass” icon
in the upper left of the display screen, the image
will zoom in to four times the standard view.
Pressing the icon a second time will return the view
to the standard Back Up Camera display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay
view will display the standard Back Up Camera
view. If the vehicle is then returned to REVERSE
gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View selection will
automatically resume.
NOTE:
The Zoom View button and AUX button (if
equipped) will not be available when the vehicle is
shifted into REVERSE and the Trailer Reverse
Steering Control (TRSC) feature (if equipped) is
activated.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available
until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or
REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph
(13 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE,
and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph
(13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the
icon will appear grey.
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not
be visible.
For information on Auxiliary Cameras (if equipped),
see Ú page 210.
Zones
Distance To The Rear
Of The Vehicle
Red
0 - 1 ft
(0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft
(30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently
over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The Surround View Camera system allows you to
see an on-screen image of the surroundings and
the Top View of your vehicle. This occurs whenever
the gear selector is in REVERSE or when enabled
through the Uconnect system. The Top View of the
vehicle will also show if any doors are open. The
image will be displayed on the touchscreen along
with a caution note “Check Entire Surroundings”.
After five seconds, this note will disappear. The
Surround View Camera system is comprised of four
cameras located in the front grille, rear tailgate
and side mirrors.
NOTE:
Removing the tailgate will disable the Rear View
Camera function.
The Surround View Camera system has
programmable settings that may be selected
through the Uconnect system Ú page 238.
Press this button on the touchscreen to
enter the Surround View Camera menu in
the Uconnect system.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the Rear
View and Top View is the default view of the
system.
If the camera delay is turned on, the camera image
will display for up to 10 seconds after shifting out
of REVERSE. The camera image will stop
displaying, close, and display the previous screen
if the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
vehicle is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is
placed in the OFF position. The X button on the
touchscreen disables the display of the camera
image.
If the camera delay is turned off, the camera image
will close and display the previous screen after
shifting out of REVERSE.
If active guidelines are enabled, the lines are
overlaid on the image in the Rear View and Top
View to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected path based on steering wheel position.
The guidelines have different colored zones to
indicate the distance an object in the view is from
the rear of the vehicle. Refer to the chart below:
Modes Of Operation
Standard Rear View can be manually activated by
selecting “Back Up Camera” through the Controls
menu within the Uconnect system.
Top View
The Top View will show in the Uconnect system with
Rear View or Front View in a split screen display.
There are integrated ParkSense arcs in the image
at the front and rear of the vehicle. The arcs will
change color from yellow to red corresponding the
distance zones to the oncoming object.
Surround View Camera View
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red
0 - 1 ft
(0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft
(30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
NOTE:
Front tires will be seen in the image when the
tires are turned.
Due to wide angle cameras in the mirrors, the
image will appear distorted.
The Top View will show which doors are open.
Open front doors will block the outside image.
Top View Plus Rear View
This is the default view of the system in
REVERSE and is always paired with the
Top View of the vehicle with optional
active guidelines for the projected path
when enabled.
Rear Cross Path View
Pressing the Rear Cross Path button will
give the driver a wider angle view of the
rear camera system. The Top View will be
disabled when this is selected.
Top View Plus Front View
The Front View will show you what is
immediately in front of the vehicle and is
always paired with the Top View of the
vehicle.
Front Cross Path View
Pressing the Front Cross Path button will
give the driver a wider angle view of the
front camera system. The Top View will
be disabled when this is selected.
Back Up Camera View
Pressing the Back Up Camera button will
provide a full screen rear view with the
ability to access a Zoom View.
NOTE:
If the Back Up Camera was selected through the
Surround View Camera menu, exiting out of
screen display will return to the Surround View
menu. If the Back Up Camera was manually acti-
vated through the Controls menu of the Ucon-
nect system, exiting out of the display screen
will return to the Controls menu.
When the Trailer Reverse Steering Control
(TRSC) feature (if equipped) is activated, the
following buttons on the touchscreen will be
unavailable:
Back Up Camera
Front Facing Camera with Tire Lines
All Surround View Camera Views
Zoom View
When the Rear View Camera image is being
displayed, and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph
(13 km/h), Zoom View is available. By pressing the
“magnifying glass” icon in the upper left of the
display screen, the image will zoom in two times
the standard view. Pressing the icon a second time
will return the view to the standard Back Up
Camera display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay
view will display the standard Back Up Camera
view. If the vehicle is then returned to REVERSE
gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View selection will
automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available
until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or
REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph
(13 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE,
and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph
(13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the
icon will appear grey.
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not
be visible.
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
Deactivation
The system is deactivated in the following
conditions if it was activated automatically:
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned on, the camera image will
continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds
after shifting out of REVERSE unless the vehicle
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is
shifted into PARK or the ignition is placed in the
OFF position. There is a touchscreen button X to
disable the display of the camera image.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned off, the Surround View
Camera mode is exited and the last known
screen appears again.
The system is deactivated in the following
conditions if it was activated manually from the
Uconnect controls menu via Surround View button
or Back Up Camera button:
The X button on the display is pressed
Vehicle is shifted into PARK
Ignition is placed in the OFF position
Vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h) for
10 seconds
NOTE:
If the Surround View Camera is activated manually,
and the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, deacti-
vation methods for automatic activation are
assumed.
The camera delay system is turned off manually
through the Uconnect settings menu Ú page 238.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lenses, clean the
lenses, rinse with water, and dry with a soft
cloth. Do not cover the lenses.
If a malfunction with the system has occurred,
see an authorized dealer.
For information on Auxiliary Cameras (if equipped),
see Ú page 210.
FORWARD FACING CAMERA WITH
T
IRE LINES — IF EQUIPPED
The Forward Facing Camera displays a front view
image of the road ahead, along with tire lines to
guide the driver when driving on narrow roads. Tire
lines can be activated/deactivated through the
Uconnect Settings.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the Surround View Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View
should only be used as a parking aid. The
Surround View camera is unable to view every
obstacle or object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using Surround View to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen.
It is recommended that the driver look
frequently over his/her shoulder when using
Surround View.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
Activation
The Forward Facing Camera can be activated in
the following ways:
Pressing the Forward Facing Camera button in
the Controls screen or Apps menu
Pressing the Forward Facing Camera button
located in the upper left corner of the Back Up
camera display
Once activated, the camera image will remain on
as long as the vehicle speed is below 8 mph
(13 km/h).
Deactivation
The Forward Facing Camera is deactivated in the
following conditions:
The vehicle exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), except
when vehicle is in 4WD Low.
The X button on the display is pressed.
The vehicle is shifted into PARK.
The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in 4WD Low, the Forward Facing
Camera image will be displayed until the X button
is pressed or the ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
TRAILER CAMERAS — IF EQUIPPED
TRAILER SURROUND VIEW CAMERA
S
YSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Trailer Surround View Camera system allows
you to see an on-screen image of the surroundings
and the Top View of a trailer using four mountable
cameras. This occurs whenever the More Cams
soft button is selected, or when enabled through
the Uconnect system. The image will be displayed
on the Uconnect display along with a caution note
“Check Entire Surroundings”. After five seconds,
this note will disappear.
NOTE:
Trailer Surround View Camera kit is only avail-
able for vehicles equipped with the Surround
View Camera system.
The Trailer Surround View Camera system has
programmable settings that may be selected
through the Uconnect system Ú page 238.
Set Up
The Trailer Surround View Camera system includes
an installation kit with a Trailer Surround View
Module and four Trailer Surround View Cameras
that must be installed on your trailer prior to
connecting to your vehicle. See the installation
instructions included with the Trailer Surround
View installation kit for more information. Once the
Trailer Surround View Module and cameras are
installed and the trailer is connected to the vehicle
via the 12-way connector, the settings Trailer
Surround Camera settings can be accessed. The
Trailer Surround Camera settings can be accessed
through Uconnect Settings by pressing the Trailer
soft button in the Trailer Settings or the Camera
Settings. The system requires input of the trailer
dimensions prior to use of the system.
NOTE:
If a trailer is connected but the trailer dimen-
sions have not been entered in the Trailer
Surround settings page, the system will default
to the settings page.
If a trailer is not connected and any soft button
is selected, a message will appear: “Connect
Trailer Equipped With Trailer Surround View
System”.
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
Inputting Trailer Values
For the Trailer Surround View Camera system to
function, all fields must be entered. When a value
is needed the screen will display “Required”.
When the Trailer Type soft button is selected
two options are available: Conventional or
Gooseneck/5th Wheel.
Activation
The Trailer Surround Camera can be activated
through the Uconnect system when the vehicle is
in PARK, NEUTRAL, OR DRIVE.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE,
Surround View Camera showing the Top View and
Back Up Camera is the default view of the system.
Press the More Cams soft button and press the
Trailer tab to access the Trailer Cameras.
Press Trailer Surround Camera soft button to
access Top View and Rear View of the trailer.
If the camera delay is turned on, the camera image
will display for up to 10 seconds after shifting out
of REVERSE. The camera image will not display for
10 seconds if the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK, or the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. The X button
on the touchscreen disables the display of the
camera image.
If the camera delay is turned off, the camera image
will close and display the previous screen after
shifting out of REVERSE.
Modes Of Operation
The Trailer Surround View Camera system offers
two different camera displays:
Top View split screen with one selected
mounted camera
Full screen view of a selected mounted camera
Press the More Cams soft button on the Surround
View screen and select the Trailer tab to access the
Trailer Cameras. Press Trailer Surround Camera
soft button to access the default Top View and
Rear View of the trailer.
Top View
The Trailer Top View will show in the Uconnect
system with Top View and Rear View in a split
screen display.
Trailer Top and Rear Camera View
NOTE:
Due to wide angle cameras, the image will appear
distorted.
Rear View
Pressing the Rear View soft button will
show the Top View and Rear View in a
split screen display.
Front View
Pressing the Front View soft button will
show you what is immediately in front of
the trailer and is paired with the Top View
of the trailer.
Setting Description
Trailer Length
Input the total length of
the trailer
Trailer Width
Input the total width of
the trailer
Camera Height
Input the height of the
mounted camera
Trailer Type
Choose the trailer type
from menu
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
Left View
Pressing the Left View soft button will
give the driver a wider angle view of the
left side trailer camera and is paired with
the Top View of the trailer.
Right View
Pressing the Right View soft button will
give the driver a wider angle view of the
right side trailer camera and is paired
with the Top View of the trailer.
Full Screen Camera View
To display a full screen image of the Trailer
Surround View mounted cameras, select one of
the following options from the Trailer Cameras
screen: Trailer Left, Trailer Right, Trailer Front,
Trailer Rear. Exiting out of the full screen view will
return the system to the previous screen.
NOTE:
If the Trailer Surround Camera was selected
through the More Cameras menu, an option to
return to the More Cameras menu will display. If
the Trailer Surround Camera was manually acti-
vated through the Controls menu of the Uconnect
system, exiting out of the display screen will return
to the Controls menu.
Deactivation
The system is deactivated in the following
conditions if it was activated automatically:
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned on, the camera image will
continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds,
unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or
the ignition is placed in the OFF position. There
is a touchscreen X button to disable the display
of the camera image.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned off, the Trailer Surround
View Camera mode is exited and the last known
screen appears again.
The system is deactivated in the following
conditions if it was activated manually from the
Uconnect controls menu via the Trailer Surround
Camera soft button:
The X button on the display is pressed
Vehicle is shifted into PARK
Ignition is placed in the OFF position
Vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h) for
10 seconds
NOTE:
If the Trailer Surround Camera is activated
manually, and the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE,
deactivation methods for automatic activation are
assumed.
The camera delay system is turned off manually
through the Uconnect system Ú page 238.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lenses, clean the
lenses, rinse with water, and dry with a soft
cloth. Do not cover the lenses.
If a malfunction with the system has occurred,
see an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the Trailer Surround View Camera.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUX CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or two
AUX Cameras, which display rearview and side
view images from the trailer on the touchscreen.
NOTE:
Two Aux Cameras are only available on vehicles
with NAV equipped radios if the vehicle is not
equipped with a Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) and Surround View Camera system.
Activation
The AUX Camera is activated by first pressing the
Back Up Camera or Cargo Camera (if equipped)
button on the touchscreen, followed by the AUX
button located in the upper left corner of the
rearview display. On vehicles with Surround View
Camera (if equipped), the AUX Camera can be
activated when the vehicle is in REVERSE by first
pressing the More Cams button in the Surround
view screen, followed by the AUX tab. The AUX
camera can also be activated when the vehicle is
in REVERSE by pressing the AUX button.
If equipped with two AUX Cameras, you can switch
between each camera by pressing the AUX 1 or
AUX 2 buttons on the Trailer Camera display.
AUX 1 Camera Button
AUX 2 Camera Button
Deactivation
The AUX Camera is deactivated by pressing the X in
the upper right corner of the touchscreen. This will
return the display back to the previously displayed
screen.
NOTE:
If the AUX button is pressed and no AUX Camera
is connected, the touchscreen will display a blue
screen along with the message “Camera
System Unavailable.” The screen can be exited
out by pressing the X in the upper right hand
corner. This will return the display back to the
previously displayed screen.
Zoom View is not available with the AUX Camera
feature.
The display will always default to the Trailer
Camera display AUX 1.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, Trailer Surround
View should only be used as a parking aid. The
Trailer Surround View Camera is unable to
view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using Trailer Surround
View to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the
driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using Trailer Surround View.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
STARTING AND OPERATING 211
REFUELING THE VEHICLE —
GASOLINE ENGINE
The capless fuel filler is located on the left side of
the vehicle.
The capless system is sealed by two flapper doors.
1. Put the vehicle in PARK and switch the
ignition off.
2. Push the center-rear edge of the fuel filler door
(3 o'clock position) and release to open.
Fuel Filler Door
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe,
the nozzle opens and holds both flapper doors
while refueling.
Fuel Filler
4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
5. Keep the nozzle in the filler for five seconds
after nozzle clicks to allow fuel to drain from
the nozzle.
6. Remove the fuel filler nozzle.
7. To close the fuel filler door, push the
center-rear edge (3 o’clock position) of the fuel
filler door and then release. The fuel filler door
will latch closed.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
filler door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push
on the fuel filler door around the perimeter to
break the ice build up.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or
the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the MIL to
turn on.
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place gas
containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
Always place container on the ground
before filling.
Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the
container when you are filling it.
Use only approved containers for flammable
liquid.
Do not leave container unattended while
filling.
A static electric charge could cause a spark
and fire hazard.
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 STARTING AND OPERATING
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL ENGINE
The capless fuel filler is located on the left side of
the vehicle.
The capless system is sealed by two flapper doors.
1. Put the vehicle in PARK and switch the
ignition off.
2. Open the fuel filler door.
Diesel Fuel And Diesel Exhaust Fluid Fill Location
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler
pipe – the nozzle opens and holds the flapper
door while refueling.
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
5. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel
door.
AVOID USING CONTAMINATED FUEL
Fuel that is contaminated by water or dirt can
cause severe damage to the engine fuel system.
Proper maintenance of the engine fuel filter and
fuel tank is essential Ú page 417.
BULK FUEL STORAGE — DIESEL FUEL
If you store quantities of fuel, good maintenance of
the stored fuel is also essential. Fuel contaminated
with water will promote the growth of “microbes.”
These microbes form “slime” that will clog the fuel
filtration system and lines. Drain condensation
from the supply tank and change the line filter on
a regular basis.
NOTE:
When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of fuel,
air is pulled into the fuel system.
If the vehicle will not start Ú page 422.
1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location
2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or
the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place fuel
containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
Do not open the high pressure fuel system with
the engine running. Engine operation causes
high fuel pressure. High pressure fuel spray can
cause serious injury or death.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
STARTING AND OPERATING 213
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID
Your vehicle is equipped with a Selective Catalytic
Reduction (SCR) system to meet diesel emissions
standards required by the Environmental
Protection Agency.
The purpose of the SCR system is to reduce levels
of oxides of nitrogen (NO
x
) emitted from engines
that are harmful to our health and the environment
to a near-zero level. A small quantity of Diesel
Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is injected into the exhaust
upstream of a catalyst where, when vaporized,
converts smog-forming NO
x
into harmless nitrogen
(N
2
) and water vapor (H
2
O), two natural
components of the air we breathe.
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID STORAGE
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is considered a very
stable product with a long shelf life. If DEF is
kept in temperatures between 10° and 90°F
(-12° and 32°C), it will last a minimum of one year.
DEF may freeze at temperatures at or below 12°F
(-11°C). The system has been designed to operate
in this environment.
NOTE:
When working with DEF, it is important to
know that:
Any containers or parts that come into contact
with DEF must be DEF compatible (plastic or
stainless steel). Copper, brass, aluminum, iron
or non-stainless steel should be avoided as they
are subject to corrosion by DEF.
If DEF is spilled, it should be wiped up
completely.
ADDING DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID
The Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) gauge (located on
the instrument cluster) will display the level of DEF
remaining in the tank Ú page 112.
NOTE:
Driving conditions (altitude, vehicle speed, load,
etc.) will affect the amount of DEF that is used in
your vehicle.
Outside temperature can affect DEF consump-
tion. In cold conditions, 12°F (-11°C) and
below, the DEF gauge may take longer to
operate as intended. This is a normal function
of the system.
There is an electric heater inside the DEF tank
that automatically works when necessary. If the
DEF supply does freeze, the truck will operate
normally until it thaws.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Procedure
NOTE:
For the correct fluid type Ú page 483.
1. Remove cap from Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
tank which is located next to the diesel fuel
filler.
DEF Filler Cap And Fuel Fill
1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location
2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
2. Insert DEF fill adapter/nozzle into DEF tank
filler neck.
NOTE:
The DEF gauge may take up to five seconds
to update after adding a gallon or more of
(DEF) to the DEF tank. If you have a fault
related to the DEF system, the gauge may
not update to the new level. See an autho-
rized dealer for service.
The DEF gauge may also not immediately
update after a refill if the temperature of the
DEF fluid is below 12°F (-11°C). The DEF
line heater will possibly warm up the DEF
fluid and allow the gauge to update after a
period of run time. Under very cold condi-
tions, it is possible that the gauge may not
reflect the new fill level for several drives.
Refilling With Nozzles
You can fill up at any DEF distributor.
Proceed as follows:
Insert the DEF nozzle in the filler, start
refilling and stop refilling at the first shut-off
(the shut-off indicates that the DEF tank is
full). Do not proceed with the refilling, to
prevent spillage of DEF.
Extract the nozzle.
Refilling With Containers
Proceed as follows:
Check the expiration date.
Read the advice for use on the label before
pouring the content of the bottle into the
DEF tank.
If systems which cannot be screwed in
(e.g. tanks) are used for refilling, after the
indication appears on the instrument panel
display Ú page 117 fill the DEF tank with no
more than 2 gallons (8 liters).
If containers which can be screwed to the
filler are used, the reservoir is full when the
DEF level in the container stops pouring out.
Do not proceed further.
CAUTION!
To avoid DEF spillage, and possible damage to
the DEF tank from overfilling, do not “top off”
the DEF tank after filling.
DO NOT OVERFILL. DEF will freeze below 12ºF
(-11ºC). The DEF system is designed to work in
temperatures below the DEF freezing point,
however, if the tank is overfilled and freezes,
the system could be damaged.
When DEF is spilled, clean the area immedi-
ately with water and use an absorbent mate-
rial to soak up the spills on the ground.
Do not attempt to start your engine if DEF is
accidentally added to the diesel fuel tank as it
can result in severe damage to your engine,
including but not limited to failure of the fuel
pump and injectors.
Never add anything other than DEF to the tank
– especially any form of hydrocarbon such as
diesel fuel, fuel system additives, gasoline, or
any other petroleum-based product. Even a
very small amount of these, less than
100 parts per million or less than 1 oz. per
78 gallons (295 liters) will contaminate the
entire DEF system and will require replace-
ment. If owners use a container, funnel or
nozzle when refilling the tank, it should either
be new or one that has only been used for
adding DEF. Mopar® provides an attachable
nozzle with its DEF for this purpose.
CAUTION!
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
STARTING AND OPERATING 215
3. Stop filling the DEF tank immediately when any
of the following happen: DEF stops flowing
from the fill bottle into the DEF tank, DEF
splashes out the filler neck, or a DEF pump
nozzle automatically shuts off.
4. Reinstall cap onto DEF tank.
Filling The Def Tank In Cold Climates
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic DEF
heating system. This allows the DEF injection
system to operate properly at temperatures below
12°F (-11°C). If your vehicle is not in operation for
an extended period of time with temperatures
below 12°F (-11°C), the DEF in the tank may
freeze. Do not overfill the DEF tank. If the tank is
overfilled and freezes, it could be damaged.
Extra care should be taken when filling with
portable containers to avoid overfilling. Keep an
eye on the DEF gauge in your instrument cluster.
You may safely add a maximum of 2 gallons
(7.6 Liters) when your DEF gauge is reading at the
half mark.
VEHICLE LOADING
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING
(GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
options and cargo. The label also specifies
maximum capacities of front and rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). Total load must be limited
so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not
exceeded.
PAYLOAD
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable
load weight a truck can carry, including the weight
of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the
front and rear axles. The load must be distributed
in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is
not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components
in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity
(axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or
suspension components sometimes specified by
purchasers for increased durability does not
necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.
TIRE SIZE
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
RIM SIZE
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
INFLATION PRESSURE
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
CURB WEIGHT
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including
vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no
occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The
front and rear curb weight values are determined
by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale
before any occupants or cargo are added.
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
LOADING
The actual total weight and the weight of the front
and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be
determined by weighing it when it is loaded and
ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to insure that the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) has not been exceeded. The
weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the
load is properly distributed over the front and rear
axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of either the front or
rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be
shifted from front to rear or rear to front as
appropriate until the specified weight limitations
are met. Store the heavier items down low and be
sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all
loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles
and the way the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you can
reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a
trailer, carefully review this information to tow your
load as efficiently and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will
assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be limited
so that you do not exceed the GVWR Ú page 215.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight
of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the
trailer in its “loaded and ready for operation”
condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put
your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The
entire weight of the trailer must be supported by
the scale.
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If
you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle handles. This could
cause you to lose control. Overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lb (2,267 kg)
or more, it is recommended to use a
weight-distributing hitch to ensure stable
handling of your vehicle. If you use a standard
weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control of
your vehicle and cause a collision.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not
exceed either front or rear GAWR Ú page 215.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch
ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied
by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that
can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable
friction associated with the telescoping motion to
dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions
while traveling.
The electronic TSC (If equipped) recognizes a
swaying trailer and automatically applies individual
wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch
ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle.
These kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow
small and medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer
tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and
the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with
the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a
more level ride, offering more consistent steering
and brake control, thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway
control also dampens sway caused by traffic and
crosswinds and contributes positively to tow
vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer Sway Control
and a weight-distributing (load equalizing) hitch
are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights
(TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with
GAWR requirements.
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle
and have a collision.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted weight-distributing
hitch system may reduce handling, stability
and braking performance and could result in a
collision.
Weight-distributing systems may not be
compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult
with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a
reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for
additional information.
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
RECOMMENDED DISTRIBUTION HITCH
ADJUSTMENT
Towing With Air Suspension — If Equipped
1. Verify that the vehicle is at the normal ride
height.
NOTE:
The vehicle must remain in the engine run position
with all doors closed while attaching a trailer for
proper leveling of the air suspension system.
2. Position the truck to be ready to connect to the
trailer (do not connect the trailer).
3. Enable tire jack mode through the instrument
cluster or touchscreen radio settings. Tire jack
mode will be canceled and the procedure must
be restarted if the vehicle is driven at speeds
above 5 mph (8 km/h).
4. Measure the height from the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to ground; this is
height H1.
Measuring Height (H)
5. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the
weight-distributing bars connected.
6. Measure the height from the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to the ground;
this is height H2.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
7. Install and adjust the tension in the
weight-distributing bars per the
manufacturer’s recommendations so that the
height of the front fender is approximately
(H2-H1)/3+H1 (about 1/3 the difference
between H2 and H1 above normal ride height
[H1]).
8. Use the instrument cluster or touchscreen
radio settings and switch off tire jack mode.
Make sure the truck returns to normal ride
height. Perform a visual inspection of the
trailer and weight-distributing hitch to confirm
the manufacturer’s recommendations have
been met.
9. The truck can now be driven.
NOTE:
For all towing conditions, we recommend towing
with Tow/Haul mode engaged.
TRAILER HITCH TYPE AND MAXIMUM
T
RAILER WEIGHT
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight a given factory equipped trailer hitch type
can tow and should be used to assist you in
selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended
towing condition.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Measurement
Example
Example Height (mm)
H1 925
H2 946
H2-H1 21
(H2-H1)/3 7
(H2-H1)/3 + H1 932
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight
Hitch Type Max. Trailer Weight / Max. Tongue Weight
Class III Bumper Hitch - 1500 Model 5,000 lb (2,267 kg) / 500 lb (226 kg)
Class IV - 1500 Model 12,750 lb (5,783 kg) / 1,275 lb (578 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
Class III Bumper Hitch Access
Remove the cap with a trim stick or screwdriver to
access the Class III hitch attachment.
NOTE:
Be careful not to scratch the bumper step pad.
Class III Bumper Hitch Access
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM
T
RAILER WEIGHT RATINGS )
NOTE:
For trailer towing information (maximum trailer
weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
ramtruck.ca (Canada)
rambodybuilder.com
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equip-
ment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the Tire And Loading Infor-
mation placard for the maximum combined weight
of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
TRAILER REVERSE STEERING CONTROL
Feature Overview
Trailer Reverse Steering Control (TRSC) is a feature
that will assist the driver when backing up a trailer.
By turning the knob located on the center stack,
you can more accurately control the direction the
trailer will go.
The driver controls the accelerator and the brake
while steering with the use of the Trailer Reverse
Steering Control knob. The trailer is steered
according to the direction the knob is turned.
This feature will also allow the driver to back up a
vehicle and trailer in a straight line when the knob
is rested in its center position.
Minimal setup is required to use this feature.
Set Up:
To use the system, hitch your trailer to the truck
and ensure all electrical wiring is connected
Ú page 226.
The system will automatically calibrate an
attached trailer during normal forward driving with
no additional action needed from the driver. If the
vehicle has not had enough time to automatically
calibrate after connecting a trailer, you will see a
“Calibrate Trailer” message in the instrument
cluster when pressing the TRSC button to activate
the system.
If this is the case, perform the following maneuver to calibrate the trailer:
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
Drive forward at least 100 ft (30 m), perform a 90
degree turn and return to a straight position for at
least another 100 ft (30 m). Perform another 90
degree turn, followed by another straight drive of at
least 100 ft (30 m). Check that the system has
calibrated by pushing the TRSC button.
NOTE:
The 90 degree turns could be in either the left or
right direction.
Trailer Reverse Steering Control Calibration
Using TRSC
Trailer Reverse Steering Control Knob
To use the system, place the gear selector in PARK
and put your foot on the brake. Push the activation
button located above the TRSC knob in the center
stack.
The LED on the button will glow solid and the
instrument cluster display will direct you to shift to
REVERSE. Once in REVERSE the system is active.
Remove hands from the steering wheel and slowly
back up while turning the TRSC knob in the
direction you want the trailer to go. Turning the
knob clockwise will cause the trailer to turn right.
Turning the knob counterclockwise will cause the
trailer to turn left. If you release the knob, it will
return to its center position, and the trailer will
back up in a straight line.
Continue to control the accelerator and brake
while backing the trailer up.
NOTE:
While active, TRSC will automatically disable the
Rear Park Assist system if it was previously
enabled.
The system will limit the top speed your vehicle can
travel in REVERSE while using the feature. If
needed, you can shift to DRIVE or NEUTRAL to pull
forward to get more room or straighten out the
trailer, and shift back to REVERSE without the need
to reactivate the feature.
The feature will cancel after 30 seconds in
DRIVE or when the vehicle speed reaches 8 mph
(12 km/h).
To cancel out of the feature, come to a stop and
shift to PARK, or push the TRSC activation button.
1 — Straight 100 ft (30 m)
2 — Intersection turn with radius 50-65 ft
(15-20 m) in either direction
3 — Straight 100 ft (30 m)
4 — Intersection turn with radius 50-65 ft
(15-20 m) in either direction
5 — Straight 100 ft (30 m)
6 — Straight 100 ft (30 m), making sure to align
vehicle/trailer to path center line
7 — Feature is active, turn knob left or right to
back the trailer up
CAUTION!
Always observe the position of the trailer and
surroundings using the camera and mirrors to
avoid damage to the truck or trailer.
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
Instrument Cluster Messages:
“Calibrate Trailer ” will display when a trailer
is not calibrated and the vehicle is at a standstill
while the button is pushed.
“Calibrating Trailer” will display when the trailer
is not calibrated and the vehicle is moving while
the button is pushed.
“To Activate Trailer Steering Shift To P” will
display when the trailer is calibrated success-
fully, the TRSC activation button is pushed and
the vehicle is not in PARK.
“Trailer Steering Ready, Shift To Reverse” will
display when the button is pushed, trailer is
calibrated and the vehicle is in PARK.
“Trailer Steering Active” will display after the
driver shifts to REVERSE and indicates the
feature is active.
“Trailer Steering Unavailable” will display if
there is a fault in the system preventing activa-
tion, the driver’s door is open, the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled, or the tailgate is open.
Other reasons the feature may cancel:
The driver overrides steering by placing hands
on the steering wheel.
Trailer tracking is lost.
If the trailer angle becomes excessive, the
brakes apply bringing the vehicle to a stop and
then applying the parking brake.
Trailer steering button is pushed while active.
Vehicle speed goes over 8 mph (12 km/h).
Driver door is open and seat belt is unbuckled.
Transmission shifted to PARK.
Trailer Memory
The trailer steering system will automatically retain
the calibration of the previous five trailers
connected, so recalibration will not be necessary
when hooking up. The next time the vehicle is
started, place the vehicle in DRIVE and drive a
short distance. The TRSC system can then be
activated.
NOTE:
Trailers may look different during day and night
conditions. In such cases, the trailer may need to
recalibrate.
Some trailers (such as boat trailers) will need to
recalibrate while loaded and unloaded.
NOTE:
The system may not detect a trailer in low light
conditions. In sunny conditions, the perfor-
mance may be degraded as shadows pass over
the trailer.
The driver is always responsible for safe opera-
tion of truck and trailer.
The driver is always in control of the truck as
well as the trailer and is responsible for
controlling the throttle and brakes.
The system may not function when the camera
lens is blocked, blurred (covered with water,
snow, ice, dirt, etc) and will not work unless the
tailgate is upright and fully latched.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
(Continued)
(Continued)
Perform the maintenance listed in the Scheduled
Servicing section for the proper maintenance
intervals Ú page 402. When towing a trailer, never
exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when
towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to
the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR
and GAWR limits.
For further information Ú page 454.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven.
The engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that
a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps the engine and other parts
of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could lose
control of your vehicle and have a collision.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading
can cause a loss of control, poor performance
or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmis-
sion, steering, suspension, chassis structure
or tires.
Safety chains must always be used between
your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the
chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle
hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer
tongue and allow enough slack for turning
corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on
a grade. When parking, apply the parking
brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle
transmission in PARK. For four-wheel drive
vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in
NEUTRAL. Always, block or "chock" the trailer
wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the
tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
WARNING!
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized
WARNING!
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system
or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of
the trailer.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer with
electronically actuated brakes. When towing a
trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated
brake system, an electronic brake controller is
not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers
in excess of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM) —
If Equipped
Your vehicle may have an ITBM for electric and
Electric Over Hydraulic (EOH) trailer brakes.
NOTE:
This module has been designed and verified with
electric trailer brakes and new EOH systems.
Some previous EOH systems may not be
compatible with ITBM.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM)
The user interface consists of the following:
GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)
Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake control
power output to the trailer brakes in
0.5 increments. The GAIN setting can be increased
to a maximum of 10 or decreased to a minimum of
0 (no trailer braking).
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your
brake system and cause it to fail. You might
not have brakes when you need them and
could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for
additional space between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could
result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do
this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear,
higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping
distances.
1 — GAIN (-) Adjustment Button
2 — GAIN (+) Adjustment Button
3 — Manual Brake Control Lever
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
GAIN
The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake
control for the specific towing condition and should
be changed as towing conditions change. Changes
to towing conditions include trailer load, vehicle
load, road conditions and weather.
Manual Brake Control Lever
Slide the manual brake control lever to the left to
activate power to the trailer's electric brakes
independent of the tow vehicle's brakes. If the
manual brake control lever is activated while the
brake is also applied, the greater of the two inputs
determines the power sent to the trailer brakes.
The trailer and the vehicle’s stop lamps will come
on when braking normally with the vehicle brake
pedal. Only the trailer stop lamps will come on
when the manual brake control lever is applied.
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
This light indicates the trailer electrical connection
status.
If no electrical connection is detected after the
ignition is turned on, pushing the GAIN adjustment
button or sliding the manual brake control lever
will display the GAIN setting for 10 seconds and the
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light will not be
displayed.
If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the Trailer
Brake Status Indicator Light will flash.
Adjusting GAIN
NOTE:
This should only be performed in a traffic free
environment at speeds of approximately
20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good
working condition, functioning normally and
properly adjusted. See your trailer dealer if
necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical
connections according to the trailer
manufacturer's instructions.
3. When a trailer is plugged in with electric or
EOH brakes, the trailer connected message
should appear in the instrument cluster
display (if the connection is not recognized by
the ITBM, braking functions will not be
available), the GAIN setting will illuminate and
the correct type of trailer must be selected
from the instrument cluster display options.
4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the steering
wheel until “TRAILER TOW” appears on the
screen.
5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to
enter “TRAILER TOW”.
6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until the Trailer
Brake Type appears on the screen.
7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP or
DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer Brake
Type appears on the screen.
8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on
a dry, level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph
(30–40 km/h) and squeeze the manual brake
control lever completely.
9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by
squealing tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the
trailer wheels turn freely, increase the GAIN
setting.
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a point just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable
even with the maximum GAIN setting of 10.
*The suggested selection may change depending
on the customer preferences for braking
performance. Condition of the trailer brakes,
driving and road state may also affect the
selection.
Display Messages
The trailer brake control interacts with the
instrument cluster display. Display messages,
along with a single chime, will be displayed when a
malfunction is determined in the trailer
connection, trailer brake control, or on the trailer
Ú page 117.
NOTE:
An aftermarket controller may be available for
use with trailers with air or EOH trailer brake
systems. To determine the type of brakes on
your trailer and the availability of controllers,
check with your trailer manufacturer or dealer.
Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it
may cause damage to the electrical system and
electronic modules of the vehicle. See an autho-
rized dealer if an aftermarket module is to be
installed.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are
required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four-pin
and seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory
approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must connect the harness to a
trailer connector. Refer to the following
illustrations.
Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH
Type of Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes
Electric Over Hydraulic Trailer
Brakes
Electric Over Hydraulic Trailer
Brakes
Load *Under 10,000 lb *Above 10,000 lb *Under 10,000 lb *Above 10,000 lb
WARNING!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with
the ITBM system may result in reduced or
complete loss of trailer braking. There may be a
increase in stopping distance or trailer instability
which could result in personal injury.
CAUTION!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with
the ITBM system may result in reduced or
complete loss of trailer braking. There may be a
increase in stopping distance or trailer instability
which could result in damage to your vehicle,
trailer, or other property.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
NOTE:
Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle (or any other device plugged into the
vehicle's electrical connectors) before
launching a boat into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
Trailer Light Check
This feature will run the trailer lights through a
sequence to check the trailer light function. It is
available in the Instrument Cluster under the
Trailer Tow menu Ú page 124.
When activated the feature will enable all of the
exterior lights sequentially for up to five minutes
for time to walk around and verify functionality. The
following exterior lights will remain on for the
entirety of the sequence:
Park/Running Lamps
Side Marker Lamps (if equipped)
License Lamp
Signature Lamp (if equipped)
Low Beams
Fog Lamps (if equipped)
Daytime Running Lamps
During this time the following lights will sequence,
each activating for three seconds:
1. Brake and CHMSL (third brake light)
2. Left turn signal
3. Right turn signal
4. Reverse Lamps
5. High Beam
This light check sequence will continue for a total
of five minutes.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
The sequence will only activate if the following
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with the Trailer Tow
Package
Vehicle is in PARK
Vehicle is not in motion
Ignition is in ACC or ON/RUN
Remote start is inactive
Brakes are not applied
Left turn signal is not applied
Right turn signal is not applied
Hazard switch is not applied
The sequence will cancel if any of the following
conditions occur:
Brakes are applied
Vehicle is shifted from PARK
Vehicle is no longer stationary
Left turn signal activated from stalk
Right turn signal is activated from stalk
Hazard switch is activated
Any button on the key fob is pushed
Ignition button is pushed
High Beam stalk position is changed
Sequence is canceled in the instrument cluster
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, select
TOW/HAUL mode or select a lower gear range
(using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
control).
NOTE:
Using TOW/HAUL mode or selecting a lower gear
range (using the ERS shift control) while operating
the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will
improve performance and extend transmission life
by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.
This action will also provide better engine braking.
Tow/Haul Mode
To reduce potential for automatic transmission
overheating, activate TOW/HAUL mode when
driving in hilly areas, or select a lower gear range
(using the (ERS) shift control) on more severe
grades.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
disengage until you can get back to cruising
speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light
loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
Air Suspension System
To aid in attaching/detaching the trailer from the
vehicle, the air suspension system can be used
Ú page 167. Selecting Tow/Haul or connecting a
trailer with an Integrated Trailer Brake Module
(ITBM) will disable Automatic Aero mode to avoid
height changes while towing and shifting loads or
tongue weights.
NOTE:
The vehicle must remain in the engine running
position while attaching a trailer for proper leveling
of the air suspension system.
SNOWPLOW
Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory
installed option. These packages include
components necessary to equip your vehicle with a
snowplow.
NOTE:
Before installation of a snowplow it is highly recom-
mended that the owner/installer obtain and follow
the recommendations contained within the current
Body Builder’s Guide. See an authorized dealer,
installer or snowplow manufacturer for this infor-
mation. There are unique electrical systems that
must be connected to properly ensure operator
safety and prevent overloading vehicle systems.
BEFORE PLOWING
Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper
fluid level.
Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper
tightness.
Check the runners and cutting edge for exces-
sive wear. The cutting edge should be ¼ to ½
inches (6 cm to 1.2 cm) above ground in snow
plowing position.
Check that snowplow lighting is connected and
functioning properly.
SNOWPLOW PREP PACKAGE MODEL
A
VAILABILITY
For Information about snowplow applications visit
www.ramtrucks.com or refer to the current Body
Builder’s Guide.
1. The maximum number of occupants in the
truck should not exceed two.
2. The total GVWR, Front GAWR or the Rear
GAWR should never be exceeded.
3. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition
of options or passengers, etc.
The loaded vehicle weight, including the snowplow
system, all aftermarket accessories, driver,
passengers, options, and cargo, must not exceed
either the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVWR) or Gross
Axle Weight (GAWR) ratings. These weights are
specified on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label on the driver's side door opening.
NOTE:
Detach the snowplow when transporting
passengers.
WARNING!
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could
adversely affect performance of the airbag
system in a collision. Do not expect that the
airbag will perform as described earlier in this
manual.
CAUTION!
The “Lamp Out” indicator could illuminate if
exterior lamps are not properly installed.
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to
specifications at the factory without consideration
for the weight of the plow. Front end toe-in should
be checked and reset if necessary at the beginning
and end of the snowplow season. This will help
prevent uneven tire wear.
The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle
is parked.
Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow
equipment following the recommendations
provided by the specific snowplow manufacturer.
OVER THE ROAD OPERATION WITH
S
NOWPLOW ATTACHED
The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and
causes the engine to operate at higher than
normal temperatures. Therefore, when
transporting the plow, angle the blade completely
and position it as low as road or surface conditions
permit. Do not exceed 40 mph (64 km/h).
The operator should always maintain a safe
stopping distance and allow adequate passing
clearance.
OPERATING TIPS
Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph
(32 km/h) should be maximum operating speed.
The operator should be familiar with the area and
surface to be cleaned. Reduce speed and use
extreme caution when plowing unfamiliar areas or
under poor visibility.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Snowplows should be maintained in accordance
with the plow manufacturer's instructions.
Keep all snowplow electrical connections and
battery terminals clean and free of corrosion.
When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and
drivetrain damage, the following precautions
should be observed:
Operate with transfer case in 4WD LOW when
plowing small or congested areas where speeds
are not likely to exceed 15 mph (24 km/h).
At higher speeds operate in 4WD HIGH.
Vehicles with automatic transmissions should
use 4WD LOW when plowing deep or heavy
snow for extended periods of time to avoid
transmission overheating.
Do not shift the transmission unless the engine
has returned to idle and wheels have stopped.
Make a practice of stepping on the brake pedal
while shifting the transmission.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
Vehicles equipped with Active-Level Four Corner Air Suspension must be placed in Transport mode before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or
flatbed truck Ú page 167. If the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles
(not to the body). Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The
Ground
Two-Wheel Drive
Models
Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions
Transmission in PARK
Transfer case in N (Neutral)
Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
RECREATIONAL TOWING — TWO-WHEEL
D
RIVE MODELS
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the
ground. This may be accomplished using a tow
dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow
this procedure:
NOTE:
If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure
the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the parking brake. Place the
transmission in PARK.
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly,
following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for
towing, to secure the front wheels in the
straight position.
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
F
OUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
NOTE:
The transfer case must be shifted into N (Neutral)
for recreational towing. The transmission must be
shifted into PARK for recreational towing. Refer to
the following for the proper transfer case N
(Neutral) shifting procedure for your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing
with only one set of wheels on the ground
(front or rear) will cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Tow with all
four wheels either ON the ground, or OFF the
ground (using a vehicle trailer).
Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage
to the transfer case.
Before recreational towing, the transfer case
must be in N (Neutral). To be certain the
transfer case is fully in N (Neutral), perform
the procedure outlined under “Shifting Into N
(Neutral)”. Internal transmission damage will
result, if the transfer case is not in N (Neutral)
during towing.
The transmission must be in PARK for recre-
ational towing.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remains released, while being
towed.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because
fluid will leak from the transfer case, causing
damage to internal parts.
Do not use a fascia/bumper-mounted
clamp-on tow bar on your vehicle.
The fascia/bumper face bar will be damaged.
CAUTION!
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
Shifting Into N (Neutral)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for recreational towing.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level
ground, with the engine running. Apply the
parking brake.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
The driver's door must be closed (or the
driver's seat belt buckled) so that the
transmission will remain in NEUTRAL when the
brake pedal is released.
NOTE:
If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure
the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
4. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
and hold the recessed transfer case N
(Neutral) button (at the center of the transfer
case switches). The N (Neutral) indicator light
will illuminate, and remain lit, when the shift to
N (Neutral) is complete. After the shift is
completed and the N (Neutral) light stays on,
release the N (Neutral) button.
5. Release the parking brake.
6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
7. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and
ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 with the transmission in
DRIVE.
9. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Apply the
parking brake. Turn off the engine. For vehicles
with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™, push and hold the
ENGINE START/STOP button until the engine
shuts off. The transmission will automatically
select PARK when the engine is turned off.
10. Turn the ignition off.
11. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a
suitable tow bar.
12. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but do
not start the engine.
13. Release the parking brake.
14. Turn the ignition OFF.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the N (Neutral) position without first fully
engaging the parking brake. The transfer case N
(Neutral) position disengages both the front and
rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will
allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission
is in PARK. The parking brake should always be
applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain
that the transfer case is fully in N (Neutral)
before recreational towing to prevent damage to
internal parts.
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Steps 2 and 3 are requirements that must be
met before pushing the N (Neutral) button, and
must continue to be met until the shift has been
completed. If any of these requirements are not
met before pushing the N (Neutral) button or are
no longer met during the shift, the N (Neutral)
indicator light will flash continuously until all
requirements are met or until the N (Neutral)
button is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the
ON/RUN mode, the shift will not take place and
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been
met.
If the vehicle is equipped with air suspension,
the engine should be started and left running for
a minimum of 60 seconds (with all the doors
closed) at least once every 24 hours. This
process allows the air suspension to adjust the
vehicle’s ride height to compensate for
temperature effects.
Shifting Out Of N (Neutral)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving
it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Start the engine. Apply the parking brake. Shift
the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
and hold the recessed transfer case N
(Neutral) button (at the center of the transfer
case switches).
5. When the N (Neutral) indicator light turns off,
release the N (Neutral) button.
6. Turn the engine off. The transmission will
automatically select PARK when the engine is
turned off.
7. Release the brake pedal.
8. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
9. Press and hold the brake pedal.
10. Start the engine.
11. Release the parking brake.
12. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the
brake pedal, and check that the vehicle
operates normally.
NOTE:
Steps 3 and 4 are requirements that must be
met before pushing the button to shift out of N
(Neutral), and must continue to be met until the
shift has been completed. If any of these
requirements are not met before pushing the
button or are no longer met during the shift, the
N (Neutral) indicator light will flash continuously
until all requirements are met or until the button
is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the
ON/RUN mode, the shift will not take place and
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not
been met.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
(Continued)
DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other
slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to
pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon
occurs when there is a difference in the surface
traction under the rear (driving) wheels.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following
Cautions and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden
pulling of the rear wheels. You could lose control
of the vehicle and possibly have a collision.
Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there
is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud,
loose sand, etc.).
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm
run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road
or path's surface and cause your vehicle to sink
into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or
rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed
5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases
stopping distances. Therefore, after driving
through standing water, drive slowly and
lightly press on the brake pedal several times
to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom
of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the
path that is under water and if there are any
obstacles in the way before driving through
the standing water.
4
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Care should be taken when attempting to climb
steep hills or driving diagonally across a hill or
slope. If natural obstacles force you to travel
diagonally up or down a hill, choose a mild angle
and keep as little side tilt as possible.
Keep the vehicle moving and make turns slowly
and cautiously.
If you must back down a hill, back straight down
using REVERSE gear. Never back down in
NEUTRAL or diagonally across the hill.
When driving over sand, mud, and other soft
terrain, shift to low gear and drive steadily.
Apply the accelerator slowly to avoid spinning
the wheels.
Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type
of driving.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going
off-road, it is always a good idea to check for
damage. That way you can get any problems taken
care of right away and have your vehicle ready
when you need it.
Completely inspect the underbody of your
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
clean as required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, partic-
ularly on the chassis, drivetrain components,
steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if
required, and torque to the values specified in
the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard. They might
hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle
pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan,
brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle
yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as
possible.
If you experience unusual vibration after driving
in mud, slush or similar conditions, check the
wheels for impacted material. Impacted mate-
rial can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing
the wheels of it will correct the situation.
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize
wave effects.
Driving through standing water may cause
damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain
components. Always inspect your vehicle’s
fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.)
for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is
milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further
damage. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause
serious internal damage to the engine. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may
cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking.
You might not have full braking power when you
need it to prevent a collision. If you have been
operating your vehicle in dirty conditions, get
your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
237
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect
5/5 NAV With 8.4-inch Display system or your
Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display system, refer
to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact software
for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may
be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless
communications. Vehicle software technology
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC,
working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes
appropriate steps as needed.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
NOTE:
To help further improve user experience,
features, stability, etc., and minimize the poten-
tial risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about avail-
able Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
WARNING!
ONLY insert trusted devices/components into
your vehicle. Media of unknown origin could
possibly contain malicious software, and if
installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest
authorized dealer immediately.
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the instrument
panel. These buttons allow you to access and
change the Customer Programmable Features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
beside the Uconnect system in the center of
the instrument panel. In addition, there is a
SCROLL/ENTER control knob located on the right
side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus
and change settings. Push the center of the control
knob one or more times to select or change a
setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF
and MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu
or certain option on the Uconnect system.
For the Uconnect 5 systems, push and hold the
Power button on the radio’s faceplate for a
minimum of 15 seconds to reset the radio.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display Touchscreen And
Faceplate Buttons
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, the
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 8.4-inch Display, and
Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display
For the Uconnect 3 system, push the SETTINGS
button on the side of the faceplate. In this menu,
the Uconnect system allows you to access all of the
available programmable features.
For the Uconnect 5 systems, press the Vehicle
button, then press the Settings tab at the top of the
touchscreen. In this menu, the Uconnect system
allows you to access all of the available
programmable features.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen may be selected at
a time.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
When making a selection, only press one button at
a time to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred
setting option until a check mark appears next to
the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Once the setting is complete, press
the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
button on the right side of the screen will allow you
to toggle up or down through the available settings.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
MULTIMEDIA 239
My Profile
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument
Cluster Display. The available languages are English, Français, Italiano, and
Español.
Display Mode
This setting will adjust the display for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”.
“Manual” allows for more customization with the radio display.
Display Brightness Headlights On
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To
access this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will
increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness Headlights Off
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To
access this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will
increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Units
This setting will allow you to change the units to “US”, “Metric”, or “Custom”.
The available options within Custom are “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance”
(mi or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L),
“Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), “Power” (HP [US], Gal
HP [UK], or kW), and “Torque” (lb-ft or Nm) units of measurement
independently.
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 MULTIMEDIA
Theme Mode
This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting
options are “Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”. Select to show themes in Light or Dark
mode. “Auto” changes the theme with the headlights.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Instrument Cluster Display.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS
must be “Off” for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set
the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a
24-hour format.
Voice Options
This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to
“Male” or “Female”.
Wake Up Word
This setting will allow you to set the system “Wake Up” word. The available
options are “Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Ram”.
Voice Barge-in This setting will allow Voice Barge-in to be turned on or off.
Show Command List
This setting will allow the Command List to be shown. The options are
“On” and “Off”.
Navigation Settings
This setting will redirect to the list of Navigation settings. Refer to your
Owner’s Manual Supplement for further information.
Setting Name Description
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
MULTIMEDIA 241
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or
heated steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is
started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote
Start” setting will only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start.
The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle
is started.
Radio Power Off
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is
turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The
available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Radio Off With Door
This setting will allow you to determine if the radio shuts off when any of the
doors are opened.
Audio Settings
This setting will open the submenu, containing the audio settings
Ú page 261.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off”
options.
App Drawer Unfavoritings Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and
“Off” options.
New Text Message Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages.
Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Missed Calls Message
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. Setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
Setting Name Description
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 MULTIMEDIA
Navigation Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation.
Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their
factory default.
Trip B This setting will turn the Trip B feature in the cluster on or off.
Audio Info On Cluster This setting will turn the audio info on the cluster on or off.
Digital Speed On All Cluster Screens This setting will show the digital speedometer on all cluster screens.
Consumption Bar On Cluster Screen This setting will show the digital fuel consumption bar on all cluster screens.
Custom Areas On Cluster
This setting will allow you to customize the information displayed
on the cluster.
Head Up Display This setting will turn the Head Up Display (HUD) on or off.
HUD Brightness This setting will adjust the brightness of the Head Up Display.
HUD Height This setting will adjust the Head Up Display height.
HUD Content
This setting will adjust the amount of content displayed on the Head Up
Display. The available options are “Simple”, “Standard”, and “Advanced”.
Audio Repetition This setting will turn the system audio repetition on or off.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
Setting Name Description
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
MULTIMEDIA 243
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the
touchscreen. The available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument
Cluster Display. The available languages are English, Français, Italiano, and
Español.
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system
set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust
the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the
brightness of the display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To
access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will
increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To
access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will
increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 MULTIMEDIA
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Units
This setting will allow you to change the units. The available options are
“Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption”
(MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar),
“Temperature” (°C or °F), “Power” (HP [US], Gal HP [UK], or kW), and “Torque”
(lb-ft or Nm) units of measurement independently.
Theme Mode
This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting
options are “Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”. Select to show themes in Light or Dark
mode. “Auto” changes the theme with the headlights.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Control Screen Timeout
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after
five seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Instrument Cluster Display.
Fuel Saver Display This setting will enable fuel saver mode in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Ready To Drive Pop-ups
This setting will enable the Ready To Drive Pop-ups in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
Setting Name Description
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
MULTIMEDIA 245
Safety/Driving Assistance
When the Safety/Driving Assistance button is selected on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These
options will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a
subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal
when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The
“Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the object is closer to the
vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is at
a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off”
setting will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide
only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active
Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and apply some brake pressure
when a collision is detected.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking This setting will turn the Pedestrian Emergency Braking system on or off.
LaneSense Warning
This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will provide
lane departure feedback. The available settings are “Early”, “Medium”,
and “Late”.
LaneSense Strength
This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback during a
lane departure. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 MULTIMEDIA
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
detected and can provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available
settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available
settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected
in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The
“Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors.
The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both the lights on the outside
mirrors and an audible chime.
Trailer Length For Blind Spot Alert
This setting will auto detect the length of an attached trailer. The “Auto”
setting will have the system automatically set the trailer length. The “Max”
setting will always set the length to the maximum 39.5 ft (12 m).
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when
shifting out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off.
Tire Fill Assist This setting will turn Tire Fill Assist on or off.
Power Side Steps
This setting will raise and lower or stow the power side steps. The available
options are “Automatic” to raise and lower the power side steps and “Stow” to
deactivate the power side steps.
Setting Name Description
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
MULTIMEDIA 247
Clock
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system
will control the time via the GPS location.
Set Time And Format/Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With
GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set
the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a
24-hour format.
Set Time Hours
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for
this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours.
The “-” setting will decrease the hours.
Set Time Minutes
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off
for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes.
The “-” setting will decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Show Time and Date During Screen Off
This setting will allow you to show the time and date while the screen is off.
Available options are “On” and “Off”.
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio
device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
Do Not Disturb All
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb settings menu. The available options
are “On” and “Off”.
Enable Two Active Phones
This setting will enable or disable two active phones within the vehicle.
The setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
MULTIMEDIA 249
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Options
This setting will allow you to change the system’s voice to either “Male”
or “Female”.
Wake Up Word
This setting will allow you to set the system’s “Wake Up” word. The available
options are “Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Ram”.
Voice Barge-In
This setting allows you to respond to a Voice Response before the statement
is completed by the system. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always”
setting will always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show
the Command List and provide a brief description of what the command does.
The “Never” setting will turn the Command List off.
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 MULTIMEDIA
Navigation
Trailer Brake/Trailer — If Equipped
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can
change which icons display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
When the Trailer Brake/Trailer button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to trailer towing.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Trailer 1
Options for each Trailer are “Use This Trailer”, “Braking” (Light Electric, Heavy
Electric, Light Electric Over Hydraulic, and Heavy Electric Over Hydraulic),
“Trailer Name”, and “Tire Pressure” (Setup All Tires, Replace Single Tire, Set
Target Tire Pressure, and Delete Tire Settings).
Trailer 2
Options for each Trailer are “Use This Trailer”, “Braking” (Light Electric, Heavy
Electric, Light Electric Over Hydraulic, and Heavy Electric Over Hydraulic),
“Trailer Name”, and “Tire Pressure” (Setup All Tires, Replace Single Tire, Set
Target Tire Pressure, and Delete Tire Settings).
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
MULTIMEDIA 251
Trailer 3
Options for each Trailer are “Use This Trailer”, “Braking” (Light Electric, Heavy
Electric, Light Electric Over Hydraulic, and Heavy Electric Over Hydraulic),
“Trailer Name”, and “Tire Pressure” (Setup All Tires, Replace Single Tire, Set
Target Tire Pressure, and Delete Tire Settings).
Trailer 4
Options for each Trailer are “Use This Trailer”, “Braking” (Light Electric, Heavy
Electric, Light Electric Over Hydraulic, and Heavy Electric Over Hydraulic),
“Trailer Name”, and “Tire Pressure” (Setup All Tires, Replace Single Tire, Set
Target Tire Pressure, and Delete Tire Settings).
Trailer Surround Camera This setting will let you access options related to the Trailer Surround Camera.
Trailer Select
Select from “Trailer 1”, “Trailer 2”, “Trailer 3”, and “Trailer 4”. These trailer
designations can be used to save different trailer settings.
Trailer Brake Type
This setting will set the system to a specific trailer type. The available options
are “Light Electric”, “Heavy Electric”, “Light Electric Over Hydraulic”, and
“Heavy Electric Over Hydraulic”.
Trailer Name
This setting will personalize the trailer name depending on the type of trailer
you are hauling. Select the trailer name from the following list: trailer, boat,
car, cargo, dump, equipment, flatbed, gooseneck, horse, livestock,
motorcycle, snowmobile, travel, utility, and 5th wheel.
Setting Name Description
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 MULTIMEDIA
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Surround View Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the Surround View Camera when shifting
out of REVERSE.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Surround View Camera Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when
shifting out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
MULTIMEDIA 253
Mirrors & Wipers
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE
position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the
transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. The available settings are “On”
and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country
of the vehicle purchased.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights
to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”,
“30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the
headlights to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings
are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Steering Directed Lights
This setting will turn the headlights with the steering wheel. The available
options are “On” and “Off”.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
MULTIMEDIA 255
Brakes
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service This setting will allow you to retract the brakes for servicing.
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Door Locks
This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when
the vehicle reaches 12 mph (19 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit
This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from
the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 MULTIMEDIA
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key
fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed.
The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed
once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is
pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start
This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from
the key fob.
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob
are needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock
the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting
will unlock all doors with only one push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature
(Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) on or off.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have
been linked to the key fob.
Setting Name Description
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
MULTIMEDIA 257
Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort
Systems
When Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort
systems when remote start has been activated or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With Vehicle
Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or
heated steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is
started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote
Start” setting will only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start.
The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle
is started.
Easy Exit Seats
This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine
is shut off. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 MULTIMEDIA
Key Off Options/Engine Off Options
When the Key Off Options/Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings
will only activate when the ignition is set to OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Key Off Power Delay/Engine Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is
turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The
available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on
after the vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount of
time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
MULTIMEDIA 259
Suspension/Air Suspension
When the Suspension/Air Suspension button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to the vehicle’s air suspension.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sound Horn With Lower
This setting will sound the horn when the Lower button is pressed on
the key fob.
Flash Lights With Lower
This setting will flash the lights when the Lower button is pressed on
the key fob.
Display Suspension Messages
This setting will display suspension messages in the Instrument Cluster
Display. The “All” setting will display all available messages. The “Warnings
Only” setting will only display warning messages.
Aero Mode
This setting will automatically adjust the vehicle ride height depending on the
vehicle speed.
Tire Jack Mode
This setting will disable the Air Suspension system to assist in changing a
spare tire.
Transport Mode
This setting will lower the vehicle to Entry/Exit height and then disable the
Air Suspension system for flat towing.
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 MULTIMEDIA
AUX Switches
Wheel Alignment Mode
This setting must be activated before performing a wheel alignment, which
will move the vehicle to normal ride height and then disable the Air
Suspension system. Contact an authorized dealer for further information.
Four Corner Air Suspension Modes
There are three air suspension modes designed to protect the system in
unique situations. Tire Jack Mode is selected to assist in changing a spare
tire. Transport Mode is selected to assist when the vehicle is being flat bed
towed. Wheel Alignment Mode is selected before performing a wheel
alignment. Contact an authorized dealer for further information.
Setting Name Description
When the AUX Switches button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the four vehicle AUX switches.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
AUX 1-4
This setting will adjust the type and power source for the four vehicle AUX
switches. There are two types: “Latching” and “Momentary”. The power
source for the AUX switches can either be set to run off the “Battery” or from
the “Ignition”. In addition to setting the type and power source, you can set if
the vehicle will recall the previous state at which the AUX switches were set.
The Recalled Last State setting can be set to “On” or “Off”. Last state
conditions are met only if the type is set to Latching and the power source is
set to Ignition.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
MULTIMEDIA 261
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio
location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back
and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio
location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting,
the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings
are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the
AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Loudness This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 MULTIMEDIA
Notifications
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Notification Sounds
This setting will turn off the Notification chime that plays when a new
notification is sent. The options are “On” and “Off”.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Favorited pop-up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Unfavorited pop-up on or off.
New Text Message Pop-Ups
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages of any
connected phone on or off.
Missed Calls Message
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls of any connected
phone on or off.
Navigation Pop-Ups This setting turns receiving/storing predictive Navigation Pop-Ups on or off.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
MULTIMEDIA 263
SiriusXM® Setup
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used
to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
SiriusXM® Account, Profile, And Settings
This setting will redirect you to the SiriusXM® settings menu within the
SiriusXM® menu.
Block Explicit
This setting will skip over content labeled as explicit. The available settings
are “On” and “Off”.
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune
to a music channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list
will display of the skipped channels.
Subscription Information
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel
Link is a separate subscription.
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 MULTIMEDIA
Software Updates
When the Software Updates button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the setting related to updating the Uconnect software.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Downloads over Wi-Fi
This setting will allow software updates to happen over Wi-Fi. Selectable
options for the setting are “On” and “Off”.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
MULTIMEDIA 265
Reset/Restore Settings To Default
When the Reset/Restore Settings To Default button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system
back to its default settings. These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Restart Radio This setting will reboot the radio.
Reset Performance Values This setting will reset your vehicle’s performance values.
Reset Apps Drawer To Default Order
This setting will return the apps drawer to the default order. The available
options are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed to cancel
the screen.
Restore Settings to Default
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their
factory default.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal
data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
Reset Wi-Fi Password For Projection
This setting will allow you to reset the vehicle’s Wi-Fi password for smartphone
projection. The available options are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can
also be pressed to cancel the screen.
Factory Reset This setting will restore the radio to its factory default settings.
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1 — RADIO Button 6 — COMPASS Button
2 — MEDIA Button 7 — SETTINGS Button
3 — PHONE Button 8 — MORE Button
4 — VOLUME & On/Off Button 9 — ENTER/BROWSE & TUNE/SCROLL Knob
5 — MUTE Button 10 — SCREEN OFF Button
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
MULTIMEDIA 267
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
Feature Description
Radio/Media
Press/Push the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media
Mode and access the radio functions and external audio sources
Ú page 269.
Phone
Press/Push the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the
hands-free phone system Ú page 279.
Settings Press/Push the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings Ú page 238.
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted
selection on the screen. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL rotary knob to scroll
through a list or tune a radio station.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the MUTE button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio system
off. Push it again to turn the audio back on.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the VOLUME & On/Off
button on the faceplate to turn the system on or off.
NOTE:
Push and hold the VOLUME & On/Off button for approximately 10 seconds to
reset the radio manually. Doing this can also recover the radio screen from
freezing or being stuck.
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 MULTIMEDIA
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
Please read this manual carefully before using the
system. It contains instructions on how to use the
system in a safe and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
Doing so can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety precautions.
Failure to do so may result in injury or property
damage.
Glance at the screen only when safe to do so.
If prolonged viewing of the screen is required,
park in a safe location and set the parking
brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage to
the product. See an authorized dealer for repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a
level that still allows you to hear outside traffic
and emergency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
tronic device. Do not let young children use the
system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
your music or sound system at loud volumes.
Exercise caution when setting the volume on the
system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture
away from the system. Besides damage to the
system, moisture can cause electric shocks as
with any electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed
dependent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
use some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion.
Care And Maintenance
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or
sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.),
which could scratch the surface.
Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly on
the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber lens
cleaning cloth in order to clean the touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water solu-
tion ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent
manufacturer's precautions and directions
Ú page 490.
Feature Description
Compass Push the COMPASS button on the faceplate to access the vehicle’s compass.
More Push the MORE button on the faceplate to access additional options.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
MULTIMEDIA 269
UCONNECT MODES
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on
the rear surface of the steering wheel at the three
and nine o’clock positions.
Remote Sound System Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
a push button in the center and controls the
volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing
the top of the rocker switch will increase the
volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker
switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio
switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push button in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on which
mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode:
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will Seek Up for the
next available station and pushing the bottom of
the switch will Seek Down for the next available
station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that you
have programmed in the radio presets.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/
Bluetooth®). Pushing the switch up twice will go
forward two tracks. Pushing the bottom switch
goes to the beginning of the current track, or the
beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
seconds after the current track begins to play.
Double pressing the bottom button switch will skip
to the previous track if it is after eight seconds into
the current track.
RADIO MODE
Radio Controls
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1 — Preset Radio Stations
2 — All Preset Radio Stations
3 — Seek Down
4 — Radio Band (AM/FM)
5 — Tune
6 — Station Info
7 — Audio Settings
8 — Seek Up
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 MULTIMEDIA
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
AM
FM
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to enter
the Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, AM,
FM, and SXM, can then be selected by pressing the
corresponding button in Radio Mode.
Volume & On/Off Control
Push the VOLUME & On/Off control knob to turn on
and off the Uconnect system.
The electronic volume control turns continuously
(360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping.
Turning the VOLUME & On/Off control knob
clockwise increases the volume, and
counterclockwise decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will
be set at the same volume level as last played.
Mute Button
Push the MUTE button to mute or unmute the
system.
Tune/Scroll Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the
ENTER/BROWSE button to choose a selection.
Seek
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated by
pressing the double arrow buttons on the
touchscreen to the right and left of the radio
station display or by pushing the left steering wheel
audio control button up or down.
Seek Up and Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up or Seek
Down button to tune the radio to the next
available station or channel. During a Seek
Up/Down function, if the radio reaches the starting
station after passing through the entire band two
times, the radio will stop at the station where it
began.
Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down
Press and hold, and then release the Seek
Up or Seek Down button to advance the
radio through the available stations or channels at
a faster rate. The radio stops at the next available
station or channel when the button on the
touchscreen is released.
NOTE:
Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or
Seek Down button will scan the different
frequency bands at a slower rate.
Info — If Equipped
Press the Info button to display information related
to the currently playing song and radio station.
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of the
radio screen to directly tune to a desired radio
station or channel.
Press the available number button on the
touchscreen to begin selecting a desired station.
Once a number has been entered, any numbers
that are no longer possible (stations that cannot be
reached) will become deactivated/grayed out.
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the
Back button on the touchscreen.
GO
Once the last digit of a station has been entered,
press “GO”. The Direct Tune screen will close, and
the system will automatically tune to that station.
RADIO VOICE COMMANDS
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would like
to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM®
Satellite Radio trial required.)
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
MULTIMEDIA 271
Push the VR button on the steering wheel and
wait for the beep to say a command. See an
example:
“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of
what to say or want to learn a Voice Command,
push the VR button and say “Help”. The system
provides you with a list of commands.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode —
If Equipped
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Changing To SiriusXM®
NOTE:
Some SiriusXM® features are not supported by all
SiriusXM® channels or content, for example song
and artist favorites, sport game notifications, tune
start, and others.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content.
SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service.
Visit
www.siriusxm.com/phx/getlogin or review
your SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s
Manual kit for more information.
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
separately after the trial included with the new
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your
service at the end of your trial subscription, the
plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at
then-current rates until you call SiriusXM® at
866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM®
Customer Agreement for complete terms at
www.siriusxm.com (US) or www.siriusxm.ca
(Canada).
All fees and programming subject to change.
SiriusXM® satellite service is available only to
those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous
US and D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is also
available in Canada and Puerto Rico (with
coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio
service is available throughout their satellite
service area and in AK. © 2022 SiriusXM® Radio
Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
This functionality is only available for radios
equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to
receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows “Acquiring Signal”, you might
have to change the vehicle’s position in order to
receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite radio
does not receive a signal in underground parking
garages or tunnels.
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver require a
subscription to the SiriusXM® Service. When the
radio does not have the necessary subscription,
the radio is able to receive the Preview channel
only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
subscription, US residents visit
www.siriusxm.com/phx/getlogin or call:
1-800-643-2112
Canadian residents visit
https://
www.siriusxm.ca/
or call: 1-888-539-7474.
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
SXM button on the touchscreen.
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 MULTIMEDIA
When in Satellite Mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
lighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top
of the screen.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in
the center.
The Program Information is displayed at the
bottom of the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed
below the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
In addition to the tuning operation functions
common to all radio modes, the Replay, Traffic/
Weather button, and Favorite button functions are
available in SiriusXM® Mode.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
REPLAY
Replay provides a means to store and replay up to
22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk
radio. Once the channel is switched, content in
replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The
Play/Pause, Rewind/Forward and Live buttons will
display at the top of the screen, along with the
replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the
touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.
1 — Browse
2 — Radio Bands
3 — Direct Tune
4 — Info Button
5 — Next Button
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
MULTIMEDIA 273
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to
pause the playing of live or rewound content at any
time. Play can be resumed by pressing the Pause/
Play button again on the touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to
rewind the content in steps of five seconds.
Pressing the Rewind button on the touchscreen for
more than two seconds rewinds the content. The
radio begins playing the content at the point at
which the press is released.
Forward
Each press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen forwards the content in steps of five
seconds. Forwarding of the content can only be
done when the content is previously rewound, and
therefore, cannot be done for live content. A
continuous press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen also forwards the content. The radio
begins playing the content at the point at which the
press is released.
Live
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to
resume the playing of live content.
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 MULTIMEDIA
FAVORITES
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen to
activate the favorites menu, which will time out
within 20 seconds in absence of user interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the X
button.
The Favorites feature enables you to set a favorite
artist or song that is currently playing. The radio
then uses this information to alert you when either
the favorite artist or song is being played at any
time by any of the SiriusXM® Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be
stored in the Radio is 50.
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set a
favorite artist, press the Favorites button on the
touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist button on
the touchscreen.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set a
favorite song, press the Favorites button on the
touchscreen and then the Favorite Song button on
the touchscreen.
BROWSE IN SXM
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM®
Channel List.
This Screen contains many submenus. You can
exit submenus to return to a parent menu by
pressing the Back arrow.
All
Press the All button on the Browse screen. After
pressing the All button, the following categories
become available:
All: Press the All button to display all the Siri-
usXM® Channel Numbers. You can scroll the list
by pressing the Up and Down arrows, located on
the right side of the screen. Scrolling can also be
done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL knob.
Genre List: Press the Genre button on the touch-
screen to display a list of Genres. You can select
any desired Genre by pressing the Genre List.
The radio tunes to a channel with the content in
the selected Genre.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the Browse screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit the
Favorites list and to configure the Alert Settings,
along with providing a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Favorites list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the Up
and Down arrows located at the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the
TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete Faves button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or press
the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to be
deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the
Favorites screen. The Alert Settings menu allows
you to choose from a visual alert or audible and
visual alert when one of your favorites is airing on
any of the SiriusXM® channels.
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of
the Browse screen. This feature provides you with
the ability to select teams, edit the selection, and
set alerts.
On-Air — If Equipped
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen.
The On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Selections list, and
pressing any of the items in the list tunes the radio
to that channel.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
MULTIMEDIA 275
Add/Delete — If Equipped
Press the Add/Delete button on the touchscreen to
activate the League Scroll list. Press the chosen
league and a scroll list of all teams within the
league will appear, then you can select a team by
pressing the corresponding box. A check mark
appears for all teams that are chosen.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the selections or press
the Trash Can icon next to the selection to be
deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen.
The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from
“Alert me to on-air games upon start” or “Alert
upon score update” or both when one or more of
your selections is airing on any of the SiriusXM®
channels.
Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from
the beginning when you tune to a music channel
using one of the 12 presets. This feature occurs
the first time the preset is selected during that
current song.
Setting Presets
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Radio Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and
are activated by pressing any of the Preset
buttons, located at the top of the screen.
When you are on a station that you wish to save as
a preset, press and hold the numbered button on
the touchscreen for more than two seconds.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Radio Modes.
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
A set of four presets will appear on the screen.
Press the All button to view all saved presets. To
remove a saved preset, a new preset must be
saved over the old one.
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button within the settings main
menu to activate the Audio Settings screen.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 MULTIMEDIA
Audio Setting Description
Balance/Fade
Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio between
the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers.
Press the Front, Rear, Left or Right button or press and drag the red Speaker
icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
Press the + or - button or press and drag the level bar to increase or decrease
each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or
minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”, and
“3”. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation
to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed increases to
compensate for normal road noise.
Surround Sound
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direction
as in a movie theatre or home theatre system.
Loudness When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
AUX Volume Offset
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and - buttons. This alters the
AUX input audio volume. The level value, which spans between plus or minus
three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.
Radio Off With Door
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until the
driver or passenger door is opened or until the “Radio Off Delay” selected
time has expired.
Auto Play
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media device is
connected to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is turned on. Press
“Off” to turn the setting off.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
MULTIMEDIA 277
MEDIA MODE
Operating Media Mode
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Operating Media Mode
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA
button located on the faceplate.
Audio Source Selection
Once in Media Mode, press the Source or Source
Select button on the touchscreen and the desired
mode button on the touchscreen. USB, AUX, and
Bluetooth® are the Media sources available.
When available, you can select the Browse button
on the touchscreen to be given these options:
Now Playing
Artists
Albums
Genres
Songs
Playlists
Folders
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, Media
Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA button
located on the faceplate.
Types of Media Modes
USB MODE
Overview
USB Mode is entered by inserting a USB device into
the USB port, by pushing the MEDIA button on the
faceplate and then selecting the USB button.
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, if you insert
a USB device with the ignition in ON/RUN, the unit
will switch to USB Mode and begin to play. The
display will show the track number and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start
of track 1.
BLUETOOTH® MODE
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth® Mode
is entered by pairing a Bluetooth® device,
containing music, to the Uconnect system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be
paired to the Uconnect Phone to communicate
with the Uconnect system.
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, push the
MEDIA button located on the faceplate. Once in
Media Mode, press the Source button on the
touchscreen and select the Bluetooth® button
Ú page 279.
To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the Bluetooth®
button on the left side of the touchscreen or under
the Source Select/Select Source button
(if equipped).
1 — Seek Down
2 — Browse
3 — Source
4 — Pause/Play
5 — Info
6 — More Options
7 — Seek Up
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 MULTIMEDIA
AUX MODE
Overview
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an AUX
device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into
the AUX port, or by pushing the MEDIA button on
the faceplate, selecting the Source button, and
then the AUX button.
To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the
Auxiliary device cable into the AUX port. If you
insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and the
radio on, the unit will switch to AUX Mode and
begin to play.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g., selecting
playlists, play, fast forward, etc.) cannot be
provided by the radio; use the device controls
instead. Adjust the volume with the Volume button,
Volume/Mute rotary knob, or the On/Off rotary
knob, or with the volume of the attached device.
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the
volume control on the Auxiliary device is set too
low, there will be insufficient audio signal for the
radio unit to play the music on the device.
Seek Up /Seek Down
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB
device. Press and release the Seek Down button
on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of
the current selection, or to return to the beginning
of the previous selection if the USB device is within
the first three seconds of the current selection.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the Seek
Up button on the touchscreen for the next
selection on the Bluetooth® device. Press and
release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen
to return to the beginning of the current selection,
or return to the beginning of the previous selection
if the Bluetooth® device is within the first second
of the current selection.
Browse
In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to display the browse window. In USB
Mode, the left side of the browse window displays
a list of ways you can browse through the contents
of the USB device. If supported by the device, you
can browse by Folder, Artist, Playlist, Album, Song,
etc. Press the desired button on the touchscreen
on the left side of the screen. The center of the
browse window shows items and their
sub-functions, which can be scrolled through by
pressing the Up and Down buttons to the right. The
TUNE/SCROLL knob can also be used to scroll.
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, rotate the
ENTER/BROWSE button on the faceplate or press
the Browse button on the touchscreen to scroll
through and select a desired track on the device.
Press the Exit button on the touchscreen if you
wish to cancel the Browse function.
Media Mode
In USB Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
USB.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on
the touchscreen to select the desired audio
source: Bluetooth®.
In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
AUX.
Repeat
In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the
touchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality. The
Repeat button on the touchscreen is highlighted
when active. The Radio will continue to play the
current track, repeatedly, as long as the repeat is
active. Press the Repeat button again to enter
Repeat All. The radio will continue to play all the
current tracks, repeatedly, as long as the repeat
function is active. To cancel Repeat, press the
Repeat button a third time.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
MULTIMEDIA 279
Shuffle
In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen to play the selections on the USB
device in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen a second time to turn this feature off.
Audio
Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the
Audio button Ú page 269.
Info
In USB Mode, press the Info button on the
touchscreen to display the current track
information. Press the Info or X button on the
touchscreen a second time to cancel this feature.
Tracks
In USB Mode, press the Tracks button on the
touchscreen to display a pop-up with the Song List.
The song currently playing is indicated by an arrow
and lines above and below the song title. When in
the Tracks List screen you can rotate the
TUNE/SCROLL knob to highlight a track (indicated
by the line above and below the track name) and
then push the ENTER/BROWSE knob to start
playing that track.
In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device
supports this feature, press the Tracks button on
the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the Song
List. The currently playing song is indicated by a red
arrow and lines above and below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
while the pop-up is displayed will close the pop-up.
MEDIA VOICE COMMANDS
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth®,
and auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and AUX devices.
Push the VR button located on the steering
wheel. After the beep, say one of the following
commands and follow the prompts to switch your
media source or choose an artist:
“Change source to Bluetooth®”
“Change source to AUX”
“Change source to USB”
“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest
Hits”; “Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre
Classical”
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB
device. Your Voice Command must match exactly
how the artist, album, song, and genre information
is displayed.
PHONE MODE
Overview
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free,
in-vehicle communications system. It allows you to
dial a phone number with your mobile phone.
The feature supports the following:
Voice Activated Features
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith
Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your
incoming SMS messages.
Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward
one of 18 predefined SMS messages to
incoming calls/text messages.
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling Back the last incoming call number
(“Call Back”).
Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming
Calls,” “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed
Calls,” or “Show Recent Calls”).
Searching Contacts phone number
(“Search for John Smith Mobile”).
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 MULTIMEDIA
Screen Activated Features
Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks
displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so they
are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent
Call logs.
Reviewing your recent Incoming
SMS Messages.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy
access to connect to them quickly.
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via
Bluetooth® for messaging features to work
properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through
your vehicle’s audio system; the system will
automatically mute your radio when using the
Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
US visit UconnectPhone.com or call
877-855-8400
Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call
800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call
800-387-9983
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
between the system and your mobile phone as you
enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute
the system's microphone for private conversation.
The Phone feature is driven through your
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology — the
global standard that enables different electronic
devices to connect to each other without wires or a
docking station. Ensure you phone is turned on
with Bluetooth® active and has been paired to the
Uconnect system. Up to 10 mobile phones or audio
devices are allowed to be linked to the system.
Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone and one
audio device can be used with the system at a
time.
Phone Button
The Phone button on your steering wheel
is used to get into the Phone Mode and
make calls, show recent, incoming or
outgoing calls, view phonebook, etc.
When you push the button you will hear a BEEP.
The BEEP is your signal to give a command.
Voice Command Button
The Voice Command button on your
steering wheel is only used for “barge in”
and when you are already in a call or
want to make another call.
The button on your steering wheel is also used to
access the Voice Commands for the Uconnect
Voice Command features if your vehicle is
equipped.
Phone Operation
OPERATION
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Uconnect Phone and to navigate its menu
structure. Voice commands are required after
most Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two
general methods for how Voice Command works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John
Smith mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the
system to guide you to complete the task.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
MULTIMEDIA 281
You will be prompted for a specific command and
then guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait
for the beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt
or another prompt.
For certain operations, compound commands
can be used. For example, instead of saying
“Call” and then “John Smith” and then “mobile”,
the following compound command can be said:
“Call John Smith mobile.”
For each feature explanation in this section,
only the compound command form of the voice
command is given. You can also break the
commands into parts and say each part of the
command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound command
form voice command “Search for John Smith,”
or you can break the compound command form
into two voice commands: “Search Contacts”
and when asked, “John Smith.” Please
remember, the Uconnect Phone works best
when you talk in a normal conversational tone,
as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/
meters away from you.
NATURAL SPEECH
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak
commands in phrases or complete sentences. The
system filters out certain non-word utterances and
sounds such as “ah” and “eh.” The system handles
fill-in words such as “I would like to”.
The system handles multiple inputs in the same
phrase or sentence such as “make a phone call”
and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in the
same phrase or sentence, the system identifies
the topic or context and provides the associated
follow-up prompt such as “Who do you want to
call?” in the case where a phone call was
requested but the specific name was not
recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the
system requires more information from the user, it
will ask a question to which the user can respond
without pushing the Voice Command button on the
steering wheel.
HELP COMMAND
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want
to know your options at any prompt, say “Help”
following the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply
push the Phone button (if active) on your steering
wheel and say a command or say “Help”. All Phone
sessions begin with a push of the VR button or the
Phone button.
CANCEL COMMAND
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel”
and you will be returned to the main menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone button
on your steering wheel when the system is listening
for a command and be returned to the main or
previous menu.
PAIR (LINK) UCONNECT PHONE TO A MOBILE
PHONE
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
To begin using your Uconnect
Phone, you must pair your
compatible Bluetooth®-enabled
mobile phone. Mobile phone
pairing is the process of
establishing a wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the Uconnect system.
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 MULTIMEDIA
To complete the pairing process, you will need to
reference your mobile phone’s manual. Please
visit
UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile
phone compatibility information.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
Follow these steps to pair your phone:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position.
2. Press the Phone button.
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently connected
with the system, a pop-up will appear asking
if you would like to pair a mobile phone.
This pop-up only appears when the user
enters Phone Mode and no other device(s)
have previously been paired. If the system
has a phone previously paired, even if no
phone is currently connected with the
system, this pop-up will not appear.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone.
Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile phone
will begin to search for Bluetooth® connec-
tions.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your touchscreen asking you to make
sure the PIN on the touchscreen matches the PIN
from the pop-up on your mobile phone.
5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to
pair a mobile phone, press the Phone Pairing
or Settings button from the Uconnect Phone
main screen.
Press the Paired Phones button or the Add
Device button.
Search for available devices on your Blue-
tooth®-enabled mobile phone. When
prompted on the phone, select “Uconnect”
and accept the connection request.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect
system, select “Uconnect.”
8. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept
the connection request from Uconnect.
9. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range and will connect to the Uconnect system
automatically when entering the vehicle. Only
one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth®
audio device can be connected to the
Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected,
simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile
phone/audio device Bluetooth® screen, and
the Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth® device.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
MULTIMEDIA 283
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in which
it was paired. The most recent phone paired will
have the higher priority.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect
system to access your “messages” and “contacts”.
Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync your contacts
with the Uconnect system.
You can also use the following VR command to
bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen
on the radio:
“Show Paired Phones”
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect
system may interfere with the Bluetooth®
connection. If this happens, simply repeat the
pairing process. However, first make sure to delete
the device from the list of phones on your
Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove
Uconnect from the list of devices in your phone’s
Bluetooth® settings.
CONNECTING TO A PARTICULAR MOBILE
PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE AFTER PAIRING
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the
highest priority paired phone and/or Audio Device
within range. If you need to choose a particular
phone or audio device follow these steps:
1. Press the
Settings
button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources
button.
3. Press to select the particular phone or the
particular audio device. A pop-up menu will
appear; press “Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
DISCONNECTING OR DELETING A PHONE OR
AUDIO DEVICE
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or Settings
button.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources
button.
3. Press the Settings button located to the right
of the device name for a different phone or
audio device than the currently connected
device or press the preferred Connected
Phone from the list.
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete
Device button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
MAKING A PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE A
FAVORITE
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio Sources screen,
press the Settings button located to the right
of the device name for a different phone or
audio device than the currently connected
device or press the preferred “Connected
Phone” from the list.
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device
move to the top of the list.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 MULTIMEDIA
PHONEBOOK DOWNLOAD (AUTOMATIC
PHONEBOOK TRANSFER FROM MOBILE
PHONE) — IF EQUIPPED
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone has
the ability to download contact names and number
entries from the mobile phone’s phonebook.
Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phonebook
Access Profile may support this feature. Your
mobile phone may receive a pop-up asking for
permission for the Uconnect system to access your
messages and contacts. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow”
will sync your contacts with the Uconnect system.
See the Uconnect website,
UconnectPhone.com ,
for supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile
phonebook Ú page 288.
Automatic download and update of a phone-
book, if supported, begins as soon as the Blue-
tooth® wireless phone connection is made to
the Uconnect Phone, for example, after you start
the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four
numbers per contact will be downloaded and
updated every time a phone is connected to the
Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of entries
downloaded, there may be a short delay before
the latest downloaded names can be used. Until
then, if available, the previously downloaded
phonebook is available for use.
Only the phonebook of the currently connected
mobile phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited
or deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can
only be edited on the mobile phone. The
changes are transferred and updated to Ucon-
nect Phone on the next phone connection.
MANAGING YOUR FAVORITES — IF EQUIPPED
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
favorites:
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press
the Favorites button on the touchscreen, and
then press one of the +Add Favorite Contact
buttons that appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
“Contacts” from the Phone main screen, and
then select the appropriate number. Press the
Down Arrow button or the Settings Gear button
next to the selected number to display the
option’s pop-up. In the pop-up, select “Add to
Favorites”.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
TO REMOVE A FAVORITE — IF EQUIPPED
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites” from
the Phone main screen.
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon or the
Settings Gear icon next to the contact you want
to remove from your favorites. This will bring
up the options for that Favorite contact.
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the Favorite.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through
the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available
and supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile
service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect Phone. Check with
your mobile service provider for the features that
you have.
Here are the phone options with Uconnect:
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name,
Call by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or
Call Back)
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
MULTIMEDIA 285
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
CALL CONTROLS
The touchscreen allows you to control the following
call features:
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Other phone call features include:
End Call
Hold/Unhold/Resume
Swap two active calls
KEY PAD NUMBER ENTRY
1. Press the Phone button.
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the
touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the
touchscreens to enter the number and press
“Dial/Call”.
RECENT CALLS — IF EQUIPPED
You may browse a list of the most recent of each of
the following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls or Calls Received
Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
Missed Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent
Calls button on the phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your steering
wheel and perform the above operation.
For example, say “Show my incoming calls”.
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
NO CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio
system. Push the Phone button on the steering
wheel, press the Answer button on the
touchscreen.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1 — Answer
2 — Mute/Unmute
3 — Ignore
4 — Transfer
1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 MULTIMEDIA
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
If a call is currently in progress and you have
another incoming call, you will hear the same
network tones for call waiting that you normally
hear when using your mobile phone. Push the
Phone button on the steering wheel, press the
Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the
Caller ID box to place the current call on hold and
answer the incoming call.
NOTE:
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect
system in the market today do not support
rejecting an incoming call when another call is in
progress. Therefore, the user can only answer an
incoming call or ignore it.
DO NOT DISTURB
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications
from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep
your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For
your convenience, there is a counter display to
keep track of your missed calls and text messages
while Do Not Disturb is active.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
message, a call, or both when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly”.
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, “Conference Call” can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible with
iPhone® devices.
Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth® Message
Access Profile (MAP).
PLACE/RETRIEVE A CALL FROM HOLD
During an active call, press the Hold or Call On Hold
button on the Phone main screen.
MAKING A SECOND CALL WHILE CURRENT
CALL IS IN PROGRESS
You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold
button on the Phone main screen, then dial a
number from the keypad (if supported by your
mobile phone), recent calls, SMS Inbox or from the
phonebooks.
TOGGLING BETWEEN CALLS
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press the Swap Calls button on the phone
main screen. Only one call can be placed on hold
at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle
between the active and held phone call.
JOIN CALLS
When two calls are in progress (one active and one
on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button on the
Phone main screen to combine all calls into a
conference call.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
MULTIMEDIA 287
CALL TERMINATION
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
End Call button on the touchscreen or the Phone
End button on the steering wheel. Only the active
call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on
hold, it will become the new active call.
REDIAL
Push the VR button and after the
“Listening” prompt and the following
beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
CALL CONTINUATION
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call
on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition
has been switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio system
until the phone becomes out of range for the Blue-
tooth® connection. It is recommended to press the
Transfer button on the touchscreen when leaving
the vehicle.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
TRANSFER CALL TO AND FROM MOBILE
PHONE
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone without
terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your connected mobile phone to the
Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press the Transfer
button on the Phone main screen.
Things You Should Know About Uconnect
Phone
VOICE COMMAND
For the best performance:
Always wait for the beep before speaking
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
meters away from you
Ensure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice command period
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Even though the system is designed for many
languages and accents, the system may not always
work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names in
your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in
motion.
Number and name recognition rate is optimized
when the entries are not similar. You can say
“O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume
all risks related to the use of the Uconnect
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to
do so may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 MULTIMEDIA
Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and
network, and not the Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Phone Voice Commands
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is
easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button
is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is
ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile
phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep to
say a command. Here are some examples:
“Call John Smith”
“Dial 123 456 7890”
“Redial” (call previous outgoing phone number)
“Call back” (call previously answered incoming
phone number)
Did You Know: When providing a Voice Command,
push the Phone button and say “Call”, then
pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your
phonebook. When a contact has multiple phone
numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work”.
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
Uconnect can announce incoming text messages.
Push the VR button or Phone button and
say:
1. “
Listen
” to have the system read an incoming
text message. (Must have compatible mobile
phone paired to Uconnect system.)
2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has
been read.
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the predefined messages
and follow the system prompts.
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed in the provided
table. Otherwise, the system will not transpose the
message.
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have the
full implementation of the Message Access Profile
(MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details
about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com .
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 45,
60> minutes
late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in 5
<or 10, 15,
20, 25, 30,
45, 60>
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
MULTIMEDIA 289
Apple® iPhone® iOS 5 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only. For further
information on how to enable this feature on your
Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone® “User
Manual”.
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not compatible
with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with
Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a
text message.
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped
When used with your Apple® iPhone® connected
to your vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri lets you use
your voice to send text messages, select media,
place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your
natural language to understand what you mean
and responds back to confirm your requests. The
system is designed to keep your eyes on the road
and your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you
perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep, you
can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages, and many other
useful requests.
BLUETOOTH® COMMUNICATION LINK
Mobile phones may lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the
connection can generally be re-established by
restarting the mobile phone. Your mobile phone is
recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.
POWER-UP
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either
the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a language
change, you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to
using the system Ú page 490.
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES —
IF EQUIPPED
IS MY VEHICLE CONNECTED ?
If equipped, vehicles with ASSIST and SOS buttons
are connected vehicles. These buttons will be
located on either the rearview mirror or overhead
console, depending on the vehicle. If these buttons
are present in your vehicle, you have a connected
radio and can take advantage of the many
connected vehicle features.
For further information about the ASSIST and SOS
buttons Ú page 382.
INTRODUCTION TO CONNECTED VEHICLE
S
ERVICES
One of the many benefits of your vehicle’s
Uconnect system is that you can now take
advantage of SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services. To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM
Guardian™ in your vehicle, you first need to
activate SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Guardian™ involves the collection, trans-
mission and use of data from your vehicle
Ú page 309.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to comply may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM Guardian™ Contact Information
SiriusXM Guardian™/Care
US residents visit: https://www.driveucon-
nect.com/sirius-xm-guardian.html
or call
1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visit: https://www.driveu-
connect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian
or call
1-877-324-9091
What Is SiriusXM Guardian™?
SiriusXM Guardian™ uses an embedded device in
the Uconnect system installed in your vehicle,
which receives GPS signals and communicates
with the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
center via wireless and landline communications
networks. Depending on the type of device in your
vehicle, some SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services require an operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network compatible with your device.
SiriusXM Guardian™ is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United
States, Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto Rico and Canada.
NOTE:
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services are dependent upon an operative
telematics device, a cellular connection, naviga-
tion map data, and GPS satellite signal recep-
tion, which can limit the ability to reach the
response center or reach emergency support.
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are
available everywhere at all times, particularly in
remote or enclosed areas.
Other factors outside the control of SiriusXM
Guardian™ that may limit or prevent service
delivery are hills, structures, buildings, tunnels,
weather, damage to the electrical system or
other important parts of your vehicle, network
congestion, civil disturbances, actions of third
parties or the government, Internet failure,
and/or the physical location of your vehicle,
such as in an underground parking structure or
under a bridge.
Not all SiriusXM Guardian™ features are available
for all models.
SiriusXM Guardian™ provides:
The ability to remotely lock/unlock and remote
start your vehicle from virtually anywhere by
using the Mobile App or your computer.
If equipped — Send & Go capability with the
Mobile App. Use the Mobile App to easily search,
map and send your locations directly to your
Uconnect Navigation.
The ability to locate your vehicle, when you
forget where you parked, using the Vehicle
Finder function of the Mobile App.
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the
easy-to-use Uconnect system and SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services.
The ASSIST and SOS Call Buttons On Your
Rearview Mirror Or Overhead Console
If equipped, the ASSIST button is used for
contacting Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care,
Uconnect Care, and SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care. The SOS Call button connects you
directly to SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care for
assistance in an emergency.
Activation — If Equipped
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian™
in your vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your
in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list
of apps.
3. For customers in the United States, select
“Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care agent who will
activate services in your vehicle, or select
“Enter Email” to activate on the web.
For customers in Canada, enter your email ad-
dress to activate services in your vehicle.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
MULTIMEDIA 291
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included trial*
period for use of SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services starting on the date of vehicle purchase.
To get started with your trial, enrollment in
SiriusXM Guardian™ is required.
* Included trial applies to new vehicles only.
Features And Packages
After the trial period, you must purchase a
subscription to continue your services by calling a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent.
GETTING STARTED WITH CONNECTED
V
EHICLE SERVICES
Download The Mobile App
Once you have activated your services, you’re only
a few steps away from using connected services.
Download the Mobile App to your mobile device.
Use your Owner Account login and password to
open the app and then set up a PIN.
For customers in the United States, visit
www.mopar.com , and click the Sign In/Register
button in the upper right-hand corner to register
your account online.
For customers in Canada, register your account
via your vehicle.
a. Press the Apps button in the bottom menu
bar.
b. Press the Activate Services button from the
apps list.
c. Enter your email and press “OK”. A confir-
mation email will be sent to the provided
email address.
d. Press “Continue Activation” from the confir-
mation email. It may take a short time
before remote services will be available, but
you will be able to log into the Mobile App
and the Owner’s Site.
Once on the Remote screen and you have set up
your four-digit PIN, you can begin using Remote
Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and
activate your horn and lights remotely, if
equipped.
Press the Location button on the bottom menu
bar of the app to bring up a map to locate your
vehicle or send a location to your Mobile Naviga-
tion, if equipped.
Press the Settings side menu in the upper left
corner of the app to bring up app settings and
access the Assist Call Centers.
Using Your Owner’s Site
Your Owner’s Site website https://
www.mopar.com/en-us.html
(US Residents), or
www.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) provides
you with all the information you need, all in one
place. You can track your service history, find
recommended accessories for your vehicle, watch
videos about your vehicle's features, and easily
access your manuals. It is also where you can
manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account. This
section will familiarize you with the key elements of
the website that will help you get the most of your
SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services.
For customers in the United States, press the Sign
In/Register button and enter your email address
and password.
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 MULTIMEDIA
For customers in Canada, press the My Vehicle
button. Select from “Dashboard”, “Vehicle Health
Report”, and “Recalls”. The website will then
prompt you to log in using your email address and
password.
Edit/Edit Profile:
To manage the details of your SiriusXM
Guardian™ account, such as your contact infor-
mation, password and SiriusXM Guardian™ PIN,
click on the Edit/Edit Profile button to access
the details of your account.
Connected Services Status:
This statement will indicate your SiriusXM
Guardian™-equipped vehicle.
Remote Commands:
For vehicles with an active SiriusXM Guardian™
subscription, press one of these icons and enter
your four-digit SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN
to remotely start (if equipped), lock/unlock
doors or sound the horn and flash the lights.
Editing Your Notifications
Notifications are an important element of your
SiriusXM Guardian™ account. For example, any
time you use your remote services (such as
Remote Door Unlock), you can elect to receive a
text message, push notification, and/or E-mail to
notify you of the event.
To set up the notifications, please follow these
instructions:
1. Log on to your Owner’s Account at
https://
www.mopar.com/en-us.html
(US Residents)
and select “Dashboard”, or www.mopar.ca
(Canadian Residents), select “My Vehicle”
and then “Dashboard”.
2. Click the Edit/Edit Profile button.
3. Once there, select “SiriusXM Guardian™”
where you can edit Notification Preferences.
4. You can enter a mobile phone and/or email
address to notify you, and you can customize
the types of messages.
USING SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN ™
SOS Call — If Equipped
Access To Emergency Services At The Push Of A
Button
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance
Features
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has
onboard assistance features located on the
rearview mirror or overhead console designed to
enhance your driving experience if you should ever
need assistance or support.
Description
SOS Call offers a convenient way to get in contact
with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent
in the event of an emergency. When the
connection between the vehicle and the live agent
is made, your vehicle will automatically transmit
location information. In the event of a minor
collision, medical or any other emergency, press
the SOS button to be connected to a call center
agent who can send emergency assistance to your
vehicle’s location.
WARNING!
Some SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services,
including SOS Call and Roadside Assistance
Call, will NOT work without a network connection
compatible with your device.
Center Light Status Description
Off No call activated
Green Active call in progress
Red System error
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
MULTIMEDIA 293
NOTE:
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services
are dependent on an operational Uconnect
system, cellular network availability that is
compatible with the device in your vehicle, and
GPS network availability. Not all features of
SiriusXM Guardian™ are available everywhere at
all times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas.
How It Works
1. Push the SOS Call button; the indicator light
will turn green indicating a call has been
placed.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is accidentally
pushed, there is a 10-second delay before
the SOS call is placed. The system will
verbally alert you that a call is about to be
made. To cancel the SOS Call connection,
push the SOS Call button on the rearview
mirror or overhead console or press the
Cancel button on the touchscreen within 10
seconds.
During an SOS Call, the Bluetooth®-paired
phone is disconnected so incoming or
outgoing calls will go through your mobile
device versus the hands-free system which
is not available due to the SOS Call.
2. Once a connection between the vehicle and a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent is
made, the agent will stay on the line with you.
NOTE:
Calls between the vehicle occupants and the
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care center may be
recorded or monitored for quality assurance
purposes. Through your enrollment in and use of
the SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services, you
consent to being recorded.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles that have been purchased in the US and
that travel into Mexico and Canada may have
limited services. In particular, responses to SOS
calls or other emergency services may be
unavailable or very limited. Vehicles purchased
outside the United States and Canada are unable
to receive SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any
of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected:
The light will continuously be illuminated red.
The screen will display the following message
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact
your dealer.”
An in-vehicle audio message will state “Vehicle
phone requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent
or stop SOS Call system operation. These include,
but are not limited to, the following factors:
The ignition key is in OFF position.
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash.
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware
is damaged during a vehicle crash.
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) coverage and/or
GPS signals are unavailable or obstructed.
Network congestion.
Weather conditions.
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels.
If your vehicle loses battery power for any reason
(including during or after an accident), the SOS Call
system, among other vehicle systems, will not
operate.
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294 MULTIMEDIA
(Continued)
(Continued)
Requirements
This feature is available only on vehicles sold in
the US or Canada.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the Siri-
usXM Guardian™ connected services. Vehicle
must be registered with SiriusXM Guardian™
and have an active subscription that includes
the applicable feature.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 4G (data) network connection compatible
with your device.
Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC
(Accessory) position with a properly functioning
electrical system.
WARNING!
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/data)
or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call.
Do not add any aftermarket electrical equip-
ment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid
interference that can cause the SOS Call
system to fail, never add aftermarket equip-
ment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio,
data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES POWER FOR
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER
AN ACCIDENT), NEITHER THE MOBILE APPS
NOR THE SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™ CONNECTED
SERVICES WILL OPERATE.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) turns
on the Air Bag Warning Light on the instru-
ment panel if a malfunction in any part of the
air bag system is detected. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag
system may not be working properly and the
SOS Call system may not be able to send a
signal to the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care center. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illu-
minated, have an authorized dealer service
your vehicle immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror Light could mean
you will not have SOS Call services if needed.
If the Rearview Mirror Light is illuminated,
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
Call system immediately.
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road
conditions or location), do not wait for voice
contact from a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care agent. All occupants should exit the
vehicle immediately and move to a safe loca-
tion.
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
and regular inspection of your vehicle may
result in vehicle damage, accident or injury.
WARNING!
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
MULTIMEDIA 295
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that
can immediately connect you with help in the event
that your vehicle’s airbags deploy. After an
accident, a live agent will contact you through the
Uconnect system and alert emergency services.
NOTE:
An active SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is
required for this feature to function.
After a crash where the airbags deploy:
1. Automatic SOS will initiate a call with an
agent.
2. An agent will receive the call and confirm the
location of the emergency.
3. If needed, the agent will request the
assistance of emergency services.
4. First responders will arrive on scene. The
agent will remain on the call until emergency
services arrive.
NOTE:
Agents are available 24/7 to assist you in the
case of an emergency.
On your behalf, agents are able to notify family
members about the collision.
Agents can brief first responders of the situation
before they arrive on scene.
In the event vehicle occupants are unable to
speak, emergency services will be dispatched
based on the last known GPS coordinates.
SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services are
dependent upon an operative telematics
device, a cellular connection, navigation map
data, and GPS satellite reception, which can
limit the ability to reach the response center or
reach emergency support.
Terms of service of the Uconnect and the Siri-
usXM Guardian™ subscriber agreement apply.
See terms of services for complete service
limitation.
Remote Commands
On the Remote Commands screen, you have
access to several vehicle features that can be
controlled remotely from your mobile device. These
features include locking/unlocking, remote
starting, and activating the horn and lights of the
vehicle.
Lock Press this button to lock your vehicle.
Vehicle Start Press this button to start your vehicle.
Horn & Lights Press this button to sound the horn and activate your lights.
Unlock Press this button to unlock your vehicle.
Cancel Vehicle Start Press this button to cancel remote start.
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 MULTIMEDIA
Remote Commands lets you send a request to your
vehicle in one of three ways:
Anywhere using your mobile device and Mobile
App
From your computer on the Owner’s Site
(not available on all functions)
Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
(not available on all functions)
Using A Remote Command Through Your Mobile
Device And The Mobile App
1. Press the desired Remote Command icon on
your mobile device.
2. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the
same four-digit code established when you
activated your SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services). Enter the SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN on the keypad.
3. It may take 30 seconds or more for the
command to go through to your vehicle.
4. A message will let you know if the command
was received by your vehicle.
Using A Remote Command Through Your
Owner’s Site
1. Log on to your Owner’s Site using the
username and password you used when
activating your SiriusXM Guardian™
connected services in your vehicle.
NOTE:
If you forgot your username or password, links are
provided on the website to help you retrieve them.
2. If you have more than one vehicle registered
into your Owner’s Site, select the vehicle you
want to send the command to by clicking on its
image along the top.
3. On your dashboard, you will see remote
commands. Press the desired icon to activate
that feature.
4. You will then be asked to enter your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the same
four-digit code established when you activated
your SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services).
Please enter your SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN.
5. A message will appear on the screen to let you
know if the command was received by your
vehicle.
Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
(for example, in case of an accidental lock-out):
1. Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
if you are unable to lock your vehicle through
the Mobile App or your key fob.
2. For security purposes, the SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care agent will verify
your identity by asking for your four-digit
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN.
3. After providing your SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN, you can ask them to perform a
remote command.
NOTE:
Anyone with access to your PIN may request
Remote Door Lock/Unlock. It is your responsibility
to protect your PIN appropriately.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Description
The Remote Door Lock/Unlock feature provides
you the ability to lock or unlock the door on your
vehicle without the keys and from virtually any
distance.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
MULTIMEDIA 297
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
tower reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
connection.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with
SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 4G (data) network connection. If using the
Mobile App to command your vehicle, your
device must be compatible and be connected to
an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)
network connection.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription that
includes the applicable feature.
An ignition cycle is required for some remote
commands, such as Remote Vehicle Start and
Remote Door Lock/Unlock if following a Remote
Horn & Lights activation.
Your Remote Door Lock/Unlock request will not
be processed if the vehicle is in motion, the
ignition key is on or during an emergency call.
NOTE:
All other remote services should be performed via
your Owner’s Site or through the Mobile App on
your compatible device.
Remote Vehicle Start
Description
The Remote Vehicle Start feature provides you with
the ability to start the engine on your vehicle
without the keys and from virtually any distance.
Once started, the preset climate controls in your
vehicle can warm up or cool down the interior.
You can also send a command to turn off an
engine that has been started using Remote Vehicle
Start. After 15 minutes, if you have not entered
your vehicle with the key, the engine will shut off
automatically.
This remote function requires your vehicle to be
equipped with a factory-installed Remote Start
system.
You can set up push notifications every time
a command is sent to activate or cancel
Remote Start.
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must be off or in ACC mode.
The vehicle has been started with the key fob
within the last 14 days.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle’s security system has been armed
and not triggered since the last vehicle start.
The doors, hood, and trunk/liftgate are closed.
The vehicle’s check engine light must be off.
The vehicle must have at least a quarter tank of
fuel, along with oil and battery power.
The vehicle’s hazard lights must be off.
If equipped, the vehicle must have an automatic
transmission.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
tower reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or
Wi-Fi connection.
If the Panic button has been pressed, the
vehicle must be started at least once after
alarming the system.
NOTE:
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agents
are not authorized for Remote Vehicle Start
services. Contact the Uconnect Care Team for
assistance.
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 MULTIMEDIA
Remote Horn & Lights
Description
It is easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or
noisy parking area by activating the horn and
lights. It may also help if you need to draw attention
to your vehicle for any reason.
If you want, you can set up push notifications every
time a command is sent to turn on the horn and
lights.
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
tower reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or
Wi-Fi connection.
NOTE:
The Remote Horn & Lights feature is designed to
be loud and get noticed. Please keep in mind the
surroundings when using this feature. You are
responsible for compliance with local laws, rules
and ordinances in the location of your vehicle
when using Remote Horn & Lights.
Assist — If Equipped
Description
Vehicles equipped with the SiriusXM Guardian™
connected services feature may contain an ASSIST
button in the vehicle. Once your SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services have been
activated, the ASSIST button can connect you
directly to the Customer Care call center
(if equipped). You will be directed to one of the
following four services:
Roadside Assistance — If you get a flat tire or
need a tow, you’ll be connected to someone
who can help anytime.
Connected Services — Contact the SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care call center to acti-
vate your services, renew after your trial has
expired, for in-vehicle support for your SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services, or help
answering any general questions surrounding
your connected services.
Uconnect Care — In-vehicle support for all
non-connected Uconnect system features, such
as radio and Bluetooth® connections.
Vehicle Care — Total support for your vehicle.
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance
Features — If Equipped
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has
onboard assistance features located on the
rearview mirror or overhead console designed to
enhance your driving experience if you should ever
need assistance or support.
How It Works
Simply push the ASSIST button in the vehicle and
you will be presented with your ASSIST options on
the touchscreen. Make your selection by pressing
the touchscreen.
Requirements
This feature is available only on vehicles sold in
the US and Canada.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the Siri-
usXM Guardian™ connected services.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 4G (data) network connection.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription that
includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC
(Accessory) position with a properly functioning
electrical system.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
MULTIMEDIA 299
Disclaimers
If Roadside Assistance Call is provided to your
vehicle, you agree to be responsible for any
additional roadside assistance service costs that
you may incur. In order to provide SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services to you, we may
record and monitor your conversations with
Roadside Assistance Call, Vehicle Care, Uconnect
Care, or SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care,
whether such conversations are initiated through
the SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services in
your vehicle, or via a landline or mobile device, and
may share information obtained through such
recording and monitoring in accordance with
regulatory requirements. You acknowledge, agree
and consent to any recording, monitoring or
sharing of information obtained through any such
call recordings.
Send & Go — If Equipped
Description
The Send & Go feature allows you to search for a
destination on your mobile device, and then send
the route to your vehicle’s Navigation system.
How It Works
1. There are multiple ways to find a destination.
After selecting the Location tab at the bottom
of the App, browse through one of the
categories provided, or type the name or
keyword in the search box. You can also
select categories such as “Favorites” or
“Contact List”.
2. Select your destination from the list that
appears. Location information will then be
displayed on the map.
From this screen, you will be able to:
View the location on a map.
See the distance from your current location.
Send the destination to the vehicle
(Send & Go).
3. Send the destination to the Uconnect
Navigation in your vehicle. You can also call
the destination by pressing the Call button.
4. Confirm your destination in the vehicle through
a notification or in the Navigation system.
Requirements
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 4G (data) network connection compatible
with your device.
Vehicle must have an active subscription that
includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle Finder
Description
The Vehicle Finder feature allows you to find the
location of your vehicle.
You can also sound the horn and flash the lights to
make finding your vehicle even easier.
How It Works
Select the Vehicle Finder function within the
Mobile App and select the Location tab at the
bottom of the App. Then, press the Vehicle icon to
find your vehicle.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 4G (data) network connection compatible
with your device.
Vehicle must have an active subscription that
includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle ignition must have been turned on
within 14 days.
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300 MULTIMEDIA
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped
Description
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle service that
connects your device to an LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network that is ready to go wherever you are.
After you've made your purchase, turn on your
device’s Wi-Fi and connect your devices.
Enables all your passengers to be simultane-
ously connected to the web.
Connect several devices at one time.
Any Wi-Fi-enabled device — such as a laptop or
any other portable-enabled media — can
connect over your private in-vehicle network.
A high-speed, secured connection lets anyone
on your private network access the Web — great
for working and relaxing.
Create A 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot For Use In Your Vehicle
How It Works
The 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot feature provides
the vehicle passengers with an internet
access hotspot in the vehicle, using the radio as an
access point. The hotspot will allow Wi-Fi-enabled
in-vehicle devices (such as a laptop or any other
portable-enabled media device) to wirelessly
connect to the internet. Uconnect offers a
complimentary 3-month trial period that includes
1GB of total data. The trial can be activated any
time within the first year of new vehicle ownership.
Use one of these three ways to purchase a
subscription to the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot:
1. From your vehicle’s touchscreen, select the
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot App, and press the How To
Purchase button and follow the instructions.
2. Log onto your Owner’s Site and click the link to
the AT&T portal to get set up.
3. For existing Connected Car customers: Push
the ASSIST button to be routed to an AT&T
Customer Care agent who will assist you.
Once the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is purchased, you can
change its name and the password by selecting the
Wi-Fi Hotspot App and pressing the Setup Wi-Fi
Hotspot button. You can also view the connected
devices from the app screen by pressing the View
Connected Devices button.
NOTE:
A SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is not required
in order to purchase and use the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot.
Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If Equipped
Description
If your vehicle is stolen, the SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent may be able to locate the
stolen vehicle and work with law enforcement to
help recover it.
How It Works
1. If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law
enforcement as soon as possible. They will
work with you to file a stolen vehicle report.
2. Next, inform SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care that your vehicle has been stolen.
WARNING!
The driver should NEVER use the 4G Wi-Fi
Hotspot while driving the vehicle as doing so
may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
WARNING!
Always drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel and obey all applicable laws. You
have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the
features and applications in this vehicle when it
is safe to do so. Failure to comply may result in
an accident involving in serious injury or death.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
MULTIMEDIA 301
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care Agent
will ask for the stolen vehicle report number
(as issued by your local law enforcement).
If you have downloaded the Mobile App, you
can push the Settings menu button on your de-
vice, select “Help”, and then select “SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care” to make the call.
3. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will
authenticate that you are the owner of the
vehicle and contact the law enforcement with
whom you filed the stolen vehicle report.
4. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will work
with your local law enforcement to locate the
vehicle. You will be contacted by law
enforcement if your vehicle is recovered. While
the investigation is ongoing, you should also
contact your insurance company to inform it of
the situation.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 4G (data) network connection compatible
with your device.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription that
includes the applicable feature.
NOTE:
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are
available everywhere at all times, particularly in
remote or enclosed areas.
Monthly Vehicle Health Report —
If Equipped
Description
Monthly Vehicle Health Report is a Uconnect
service through which a summary of the
performance of your vehicle’s key systems will be
sent to you every month so you can stay on top of
your vehicle’s maintenance needs. This is provided
as a convenience to you and does not substitute
for regular maintenance to your vehicle.
In order to provide the Monthly Vehicle Health
Report, the Uconnect system in your vehicle may
collect and transmit vehicle data to SiriusXM
Guardian™ and to FCA, such as your vehicle’s
health and performance, your vehicle’s location,
your utilization of the features in your vehicle, and
other data.
This data collection and transmission begins when
you enroll in SiriusXM Guardian™ and will continue
even if you cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™
subscription unless you call SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care and tell them to deactivate your
Uconnect Services.
Please see the Uconnect Privacy Policy for more
information, located at
www.driveuconnect.com/
connectedservices/privacy.html
(US Residents)
or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
For more information on SiriusXM Guardian™
private policy, see
https://siriusxmcvs.com/
privacy-policy
.
Vehicle Health Alert —If Equipped
Description
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses
a problem with one of your vehicle’s key systems.
For further information, go to your Owner’s
website.
NOTE:
Vehicle Health Alert emails require you to register
and activate services. During this process you will
be asked to provide an email address to which the
reports will be sent.
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302 MULTIMEDIA
In-Vehicle Notifications — If Equipped
Description
Your vehicle will send you notifications to remind
you when services are needed, or to alert you of
other important information, such as recall
notices. When you receive a notification through
your touchscreen, press OK to dismiss the
message, or press Call Care to speak with a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent.
NOTE:
Pressing “OK” or the X button on the pop-up screen
will dismiss or close the pop-up, and the In-Vehicle
Messages mailbox will display. In the Mailbox, you
can reopen messages or delete messages.
Amazon Alexa Skill — If Equipped
Enjoy the convenience of using your voice to
command your vehicle with Amazon Alexa!
With Amazon Alexa, you can connect to your
vehicle and remotely access key services and
features.
If your vehicle is equipped with Uconnect
Navigation, you can send a destination directly to
your vehicle using Alexa.
If you need assistance, you can always ask Alexa
for help, or complete a list of commands by saying:
“Alexa, ask <brand name> for help with my car.”
Here are a few of the many questions you can ask
Alexa:
“Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to start my <vehicle
name> with your Voice Code.”
“Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my <vehicle
name> with your Voice Code.”
“Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to send 1000
Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan to my
<vehicle name>.”
“Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> what is the fuel
level of my <vehicle name>.”
An active subscription to SiriusXM Guardian™ is
required. To use Amazon Alexa, first, register for
SiriusXM Guardian™ Ú page 290.
Next, link the Uconnect system on your vehicle to
Amazon Alexa:
1. Download the Amazon Alexa app on your
mobile device (Apple® or Android™).
2. Once in the app, tap MENU and go to SKILLS.
3. Search for <vehicle brand> skill, then tap
Enable.
4. Tap SAVE SETTINGS when prompted.
5. Link the vehicle brand name to the <vehicle
brand> Skill by tapping LINK ACCOUNT.
6. Log in using your Owner Account credentials.
This will be the same user name and password
you used when registering for SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services. There will be
additional settings to confirm on the following
screen.
7. AUTHORIZE the account to return to the
<vehicle brand> Skill.
You can now begin using the <vehicle brand> Skill
on Alexa!
Google Assistant — If Equipped
With the Google Assistant, you can get help and
keep tabs on your car. Google Assistant is available
across your devices, including Android™ phones,
iPhone® devices, or voice-activated speakers, like
Google Home. If you need assistance, ask Google
for help, or for a complete list of commands by
saying: “Hey Google, ask <brand name> for help
with my car.”
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
MULTIMEDIA 303
Here are a few examples of commands:
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to start my
<vehicle name> with your Voice Code.”
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my
<vehicle name> with your Voice Code.”
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to send 1000
Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan to my
<vehicle name>.”
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> what is the
fuel level of my <vehicle name>.”
To link your Uconnect account with Google
Assistant, follow these steps:
1. Download and install the Google Assistant
app on your smart phone from the App
Store® or Google Play.
2. After installation, log in to the Google Assistant
app with your Gmail ID. Verify your account by
pressing the icon in the upper right-hand
corner.
3. Press the Discover button in the bottom left
corner of the screen. Enter the vehicle brand
name.
4. A prompt will appear to link your Uconnect
account. Press “Link Uconnect to Google”.
5. Press “Sign In” and enter the email address
and password you created when you activated
SiriusXM Guardian™. There will be additional
settings to confirm on the following screen.
6. Lastly, press “Authorize” to complete the
linking process.
Now, you can ask Google Assistant to help you:
Remotely start the engine, or cancel a remote
start
Send a destination to your vehicle’s built-in
Uconnect Navigation system
Monitor vehicle vitals, such as tire pressure, fuel
level and oil life
And more!
Family Drive Alerts — If Equipped
Description
Family Drive Alerts help promote safer driving and
give you peace of mind when your loved ones are
out on the road. You can set boundary limits,
monitor driving speed, and pinpoint your vehicle’s
location any time, any place. Use the Mobile App to
set alerts:
Boundary Alert
Receive a notification the moment your vehicle
is driven either out of or into a geographic
boundary that you set.
Curfew Alert
Receive a notification when your car is being
driven outside of the curfew time.
Speed Alert
Receive a notification whenever your car
exceeds a speed limit you set.
Valet Alert
Receive a notification if and when your vehicle is
driven outside a quarter-mile radius of a valet
drop-off zone.
SmartWatch Integration — If Equipped
Description
SmartWatch Integration puts the Mobile App right
on your Apple® Watch or Android™ Wear. To get
started, follow these steps:
1. Download the Mobile App from the App
Store® or Google Play.
2. Log onto the app from your smartphone using
the username and password you created when
you first set up your account.
3. Make sure your watch and smartphone are
connected through Bluetooth®.
4. The Mobile App should appear on your
SmartWatch.
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304 MULTIMEDIA
Once the app is downloaded on your SmartWatch,
you can enjoy these features:
Lock or unlock your vehicle by tapping the
remote lock button in the app and entering your
security PIN.
Remote start or stop your vehicle.
View important vehicle stats, such as fuel level,
vehicle location, tire pressure warning, and
more.
For help, refer to the Uconnect YouTube channel
for SmartWatch Integration.
MANAGE MY SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN ™
A
CCOUNT
To manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account,
press the ASSIST button in your vehicle, or call
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
NOTE:
It is recommended, when selling your vehicle, or
turning in your lease, to call SiriusXM Guardian™
Care to remove your personal data.
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS
For additional information about SiriusXM
Guardian™, active subscribers can push the
ASSIST button (if equipped) and then select
SiriusXM Guardian™ Call on your in-vehicle
touchscreen to contact SiriusXM Guardian™.
Your call will be directed to a SiriusXM Guardian™
agent or held in a queue until an agent is available.
If you do not have an active subscription, push the
ASSIST button and press the Activate button on the
touchscreen to activate services.
CONNECTED SERVICES SOS FAQ S —
I
F EQUIPPED
1.
What happens if I accidentally push the SOS
Call button on the mirror or overhead console?
You have 10 seconds after pushing the SOS
Call button to cancel the call. To cancel the
call, either push the SOS Call button again, or
press the Cancel button on the in-vehicle
touchscreen.
2. What type of information is sent when I use the
SOS Call button from my vehicle? Certain
vehicle information, such as make and model,
is transmitted along with the last known
GPS location.
3. When could I use the SOS Call button? You can
use the SOS Call button to make a call if you or
someone else needs emergency assistance.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE DOOR
L
OCK/UNLOCK FAQS
1.
How long does it take to unlock or lock the
door?
Depending on various conditions, it can
take up to three minutes or more for the
request to get to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Mobile App?
Your key fob will lock/unlock the door more
quickly, however its range is limited and your
Mobile App comes in handy for these and
other situations.
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my device?
People sometimes lose their mobile devices,
which is why security measures have been
engineered into the Mobile App. Asking for
your username, password and SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN are required for the
activation of Remote services through your
mobile device. It is your responsibility to
protect your passwords and PINs.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
MULTIMEDIA 305
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Mobile
App? The Mobile App is compatible with most
devices with the Apple® and Android™
operating systems. The capabilities of these
devices allow us to remotely command your
vehicle. Other operating systems may be
supported in the future.
5. Why is the Mobile App running slow? The
Mobile App relies on a mobile network
connection from your device to send
commands to your vehicle which must have an
operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data), or 5G
(data) network connection. If either your
device or your vehicle is in an area with below
average coverage, it may take longer to log in
and send commands.
CONNECTED SERVICES ROADSIDE
A
SSISTANCE FAQS
1.
What is the phone number for roadside
assistance call? The phone number is:
US: 1-800-521-2779
Canada: 1-800-363-4869
2. If I am subscribed to SiriusXM Guardian™,
does it cover towing or other expenses
incurred by using roadside assistance? No,
however your new vehicle may include
Roadside Assistance Call services.
CONNECTED SERVICES SEND & GO
FAQ
S — IF EQUIPPED
1.
How long does it take to send the route and
destination to my vehicle?
Depending on
various conditions, it can take up to three
minutes for the request to get through to your
vehicle.
2. Can I cancel a route I sent to my vehicle?
Yes, once you enter your vehicle, and start the
engine, the pop-up message stating that you
have a new route will appear. There is an exit
button on the pop-up that will cancel the route
if selected.
3. Can I select a different route than the most
recent one I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once you
enter the vehicle, and start the engine, the
pop-up message offers a “Locations” option.
Once “Locations” is selected, you can choose
from a list of recently sent destinations.
CONNECTED SERVICES VEHICLE FINDER
FAQ
S
1.
Can someone else locate my vehicle?
Your
vehicle may be located by anyone who has
your PIN and access to your account. It is your
responsibility to guard your PIN accordingly.
See the Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian™
terms of service for more information.
2. How long does it take to sound my horn and
flash the lights? Depending on various
conditions, it can take three minutes or more
for the request to get through to your vehicle.
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn
them on? If you are close enough to the
vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off the
horn and lights by pushing the red Panic
button.
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306 MULTIMEDIA
CONNECTED SERVICES STOLEN VEHICLE
A
SSISTANCE FAQS — IF EQUIPPED
1.
Can someone locate my vehicle?
To enhance
your privacy, and the privacy of others using
your vehicle, a stolen vehicle police report is
required for you to activate this service.
You must involve local law enforcement to
have SiriusXM Guardian™ locate your vehicle.
We may also locate the vehicle for other law
enforcement or government agencies,
subject to a valid court order telling SiriusXM
Guardian™ to do so. We will also provide the
service for FCA entities to locate a vehicle that
you have purchased through them.
2. How will I know if my vehicle is recovered?
After you provide the SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent with the stolen vehicle
report, the agent will work together with law
enforcement to try to locate your vehicle. If
your vehicle is recovered, you will be contacted
by law enforcement.
3. Can SiriusXM Guardian™ lower my insurance
rates? Some insurance providers offer lower
rates on vehicles equipped with systems that
can deter auto theft. When shopping for
insurance, be sure to inform the insurance
provider of your SiriusXM Guardian™
connected services subscription to find out if
the insurance provider can offer you a lower
rate.
NOTE:
Neither FCA nor SiriusXM® are insurance
companies, and SiriusXM Guardian™ is not an
insurance product. You are responsible for
obtaining insurance coverage for your vehicle and
yourself.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE VEHICLE
S
TART FAQS
1.
How long does it take to remotely start my
vehicle?
Depending on various conditions, it
can take three minutes or more for the
request to get through to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Mobile App?
Your key fob will remote start your vehicle
more quickly. However its range is limited. For
example, when you are leaving the stadium
after the game, you can use the Mobile App to
remote start your vehicle and have the inside
of your vehicle comfortable by the time you get
to it.
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my wireless
device? People sometimes lose their wireless
devices, which is why security measures have
been engineered into the Mobile App. Asking
for your username, password and SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN help to ensure that
nobody can start your vehicle if they happen to
find your device.
4. Can someone drive off with my vehicle using
the App? No. Driving your vehicle still requires
the keys to be in the vehicle. The Remote Start
feature simply starts the engine to warm up or
cool down the interior before you arrive.
5. Can I stop a vehicle that is being driven with
the cancel Remote Vehicle Start command?
No. If the vehicle is in motion, the cancel
Remote Vehicle Start button will not stop the
vehicle.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
MULTIMEDIA 307
6. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Mobile
App? The Mobile App has been designed to
work on most devices with the Apple® and
Android™ operating systems. The capabilities
of these devices allow us to remotely
command your vehicle. Other operating
systems may be supported in the future.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE HORN
& L
IGHTS FAQS
1.
How long does it take to sound my horn and
flash the lights?
Depending on various
conditions, it can take three minutes or more
for the request to get through to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Mobile App?
Your key fob will sound the horn and flash the
lights quicker; however, its range is limited.
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn
them on? If you are close enough to the
vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off the
horn and lights by pressing the red Panic
button. Otherwise, Remote Horn & Lights will
continue for a maximum of three minutes.
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Mobile
App? The Mobile App has been designed to
work on most devices with the Apple® and
Android™ operating systems. The capabilities
of these devices allow us to remotely
command your vehicle. Other operating
systems may be supported in the future.
CONNECTED SERVICES ACCOUNT
FAQ
S — IF EQUIPPED
1.
How do I register for my SiriusXM Guardian™
account? There are three ways that you can
register your SiriusXM Guardian™ Account:
Push the ASSIST button. A call will be placed
to an agent who can assist in registering
your new account.
Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps
menu. Select the button to speak with an
agent, who can assist in registering your
new account.
Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps
menu. Enter your email on the touchscreen
and then follow the prompts from the
provided email. You will receive an email
with an activation link that will be good for
72 hours. Once you click the activation link,
you will be prompted to fill out your informa-
tion and accept Terms and Conditions.
Then, you will be directed to the SiriusXM
Guardian™ home page to complete your
profile and demo the remote services.
2. Why do I need an email address? Without an
email address, customers cannot register for
SiriusXM Guardian™. Customers need to
register so they can subscribe to receive
additional services and create a SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN for remote command
requests.
3. How do I create a SiriusXM Guardian™ security
PIN? Set up your SiriusXM Guardian™ Security
PIN during the registration process. The
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN will be
required to authenticate you when accessing
your account via SiriusXM Guardian™ Call or
performing any remote services, such as
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Horn &
Lights, or Remote Vehicle Start.
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308 MULTIMEDIA
4. What if I forgot my SiriusXM Guardian™
security PIN? If you’ve already activated
services and forgot your SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN, you can reset the PIN by selecting
Edit Profile on your Owner’s Site.
5. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™
payment account address? Your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Payment Account address can be
updated online, or by calling SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care from ASSIST in your
vehicle. To update online: login to your Owner’s
Site, and select Edit Profile > SiriusXM
Guardian™ Payment Account.
6. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™
profile? Your name, home address, phone
number, email address and SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN can be updated online
on your Owner’s Site. Log in to your Owner’s
Site then select Edit Profile to edit your
personal information. Make your edits and
click Save.
7. Can I try features or packages before I buy
them? Your new vehicle purchase may have
come with an included trial period for certain
Apps and services.
8. Can I access every App and service while
driving? No, some applications and services
are not available while driving. For your own
safety, it is not possible to use some of the
touchscreen features while the vehicle is in
motion (e.g. key pad).
9. What happens when my subscription comes
up for renewal? If you have added a credit card
to your account information, your subscription
will be automatically renewed for a term length
in accordance with the service plan that you
have selected at the then current subscription
rate and on every renewal date thereafter,
unless you cancel your subscription by calling
SiriusXM Guardian™ Care. If you have not
added a credit card to your account, SiriusXM
Guardian™ will send you an email or letter in
advance of your expiration date to remind you
that your subscription is ending soon.
10. How do I manage my SiriusXM Guardian™
notification preferences? Contact SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care, or go to your
Owner’s Site and then update your
preferences on the SiriusXM Guardian™
customer web portal.
11. How do I purchase a subscription? Contact
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care by
pushing the ASSIST button on your rearview
mirror or overhead console.
12. How do I update my credit card information?
Login to your Owner’s Site, and select Edit
Profile, then select SiriusXM Guardian™
Payment Account.
13. How do I find out how much longer I have on
my subscription? Contact SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care.
You also can visit your Owner’s Site and
choose a subscription to view its expiration
date. When your subscription is about to ex-
pire, you will receive an email or letter of notifi-
cation.
14. Can I get a refund if I have not used the entire
subscription? Prorated refunds are provided
from the date of cancellation for annual plans
or longer. Please see the Uconnect and
SiriusXM Guardian™ Terms & Conditions for
refunds related to billing plans of other lengths
and other circumstances.
15. Can I cancel a subscription before it expires?
Yes. If you have an annual subscription, your
subscription will be canceled the day you
cancel. If you have a monthly subscription,
your subscription will be canceled on the last
day of the month in which you choose to
cancel.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
MULTIMEDIA 309
16. What should I do if I want to sell my vehicle?
Before your vehicle is sold to a new owner,
you’ll want to remove your account
information. This process removes all personal
information, returns the Uconnect system to
its original factory settings, removes all
SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services and
account information. To remove your account
information from the Uconnect system,
contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
17. What if I forgot to remove my account
information before I returned my lease vehicle
or sold it? Contact SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care.
18. What will happen if an operable LTE
(voice/data), 4G (data), or 5G (data) network
connection compatible with my device is
temporarily unavailable? The SOS Call and
ASSIST buttons will NOT function if you are not
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data), 5G (data) network. Services that
required your smartphone only direct calls to
Roadside Assistance Call may be functioning if
you have an operable network.
DATA COLLECTION & PRIVACY
The Uconnect system collects and transmits data
which may include information about your vehicle,
your vehicle’s health and performance, your
vehicle’s location, your utilization of the features in
your vehicle, and other data. The collection, use
and sharing of this information is required to
provide the SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services and is further described by the Uconnect
Privacy Policy, which can be found at
www.driveuconnect.com/connectedservices/
privacy.html
(US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
This information may be collected by SiriusXM®
Connected Vehicle Services Inc. and shared with
FCA US LLC for the purposes stated in the
Uconnect Privacy Policy. Vehicle health and
diagnostic information including location data may
be used by Uconnect to provide a Vehicle Health
Report to you.
Even if you cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™
subscription, this vehicle diagnostic health
information, including location data, may still be
transmitted from your vehicle and you may still
have a Vehicle Health Report sent to you.
Use of any of the connected services including
SiriusXM Guardian™ is deemed to be your consent
to the collection, use and disclosure of this
information in accordance with the Uconnect
Privacy Policy.
If you do not want this information to be collected,
used, or shared, you must cancel your Uconnect
services in their entirety by contacting us as
referenced in the Uconnect Privacy Policy.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being
on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy
performance from your radio. This condition may
be lessened or eliminated by repositioning the
mobile phone within the vehicle. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily improve from repositioning
the mobile phone, it is recommended that the
volume be turned down or off during mobile phone
operation when not using the Uconnect system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless
radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency
exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio
will be used in such a manner that the radio is 8 in
(20 cm) or further from the human body.
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309
310 MULTIMEDIA
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers.
The level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the use
of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning
on the wireless radio Ú page 490.
PERFORMANCE PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
Performance Pages is an application that provides
a display for performance indicators that will help
you gain familiarity with the capabilities of your
vehicle in real time.
To access the Performance Pages, press the
Vehicle button on the touchscreen. Then, press
the Performance tab. Press the desired button
on the touchscreen to access that specific
Performance Page.
The Performance Pages include the following:
Timers
Gauges
G-Force
Pitch & Roll
Dyno/Engine
Vehicle Dynamics
Snapshot
The Snapshot feature allows you to take a
screenshot of any page. The information can be
saved onto a USB device.
To take a snapshot, make sure a USB device is
plugged into the vehicle. Next, press the Snapshot
icon located in the lower left corner of the
touchscreen.
The file will be saved to the USB drive. At the time
a snapshot is taken, the bottom bar of the
touchscreen will be replaced with the historical
data from the vehicle present at the time the
snapshot icon was pressed. The following
information will display:
Date
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Longitude And Latitude Coordinates
Outside Temperature
Odometer
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the
Performance Pages is intended for off-highway
or off-road use only and should not be done on
any public roadways. It is recommended that
these features be used in a controlled
environment and within the limits of the law. The
capabilities of the vehicle as measured by the
Performance Pages must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which can
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310
MULTIMEDIA 311
The following describes each feature and its
operation:
TIMERS
When the Timers page is selected, you will be able
to view the Drag and Accel & Braking timers.
Recent
A real-time summary of performance timers for
the most recent valid run, or the status of a test
in progress.
Last
The last recorded run of performance timers.
Best
The best recorded run of performance timers,
except for braking data.
Save
Pressing the SAVE button will let you save the timer
data for Recent, Last, and Best recorded times to
an inserted USB flash drive.
The Timers pages contain:
Reaction Time: Measures the driver's reaction
time for launching the vehicle against a simu-
lated drag strip timing light (behavior modeled
after 500 Sportsman Tree) displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
Drag timers (RT, 60 ft [20 m], 330 ft [100 m],
1/8 mile [200 m], 1000 ft [300 m], and 1/4 mile
[400 m]) and Acceleration Timers (0-60 mph
[0-96 km/h] and 0-100 mph [0-160 km/h]) will be
ready to acquire new recent data measurements
when the vehicle is at 0 mph (0 km/h) and vehicle
is in drive.
The timer listed shows the measured time required
to travel at the cited distance is met. Some timers
will also display speeds present at the time the
distance was met.
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
0-100 mph (0-160 km/h)
60 ft (20 m) ET
330 ft (100 m) ET
⅛ Mile (200 m) + ET
⅛ Mile (200) + mph
1000 ft (300 m) ET
¼ Mile (400 m) + ET
¼ Mile (400 m) + mph
Brake Distance ft (meters)
NOTE:
The distance measurement will be aborted if the
brake pedal is released or the parking brake is
engaged, before the vehicle comes to a complete
stop.
Brake from mph (km/h)
NOTE:
Brake Distance and Speed timers only display
“ready” when vehicle is traveling at a speed
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h).
GAUGES
When selected, this screen displays the following
values:
Coolant Temperature
Shows the actual coolant temperature.
Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature.
Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
Trans Temp
Shows actual transmission oil temperature.
Battery Voltage
Shows actual battery voltage.
Intake Air Temp
Shows actual intake air temperature.
If a gauge is selected, the Gauge Detail View Page
will appear on the screen. This page shows gauge
values for the previous two minutes on the
selected gauge.
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311
312 MULTIMEDIA
Pressing the Left or Right Arrow will cycle through
the details for each of the gauges. Pressing the
minimize button beside the graph will return to the
Gauge menu.
G-FORCE
When G-Force is selected, the following features
will be available:
Vehicle Speed
Measures the current speed of the vehicle in
either mph or km/h, starting at zero with no
maximum value.
Front G-Force
Measures the peak braking force on the front of
the vehicle.
Right G-Force
Measures the peak force on the right side of the
vehicle.
Left G-Force
Measures the peak force on the left side of the
vehicle.
Rear G-Force
Measures the peak acceleration force on the
rear of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Front, Right, Left, and Rear G-Forces are all peak
values. These readings can be reset by clearing
peak G-Force on the instrument cluster.
The friction circle display shows instantaneous
G-Force as a highlight and previous G-Force as
dots within the circle. The system records previous
G-Force for three minutes. If there are multiple
samples at a given point, the color of the dot will
darken from blue to red. Vectors more frequent will
show in red; infrequent vectors will show in blue.
Pitch & Roll
The G-Force page displays the vehicle’s current
pitch (angle up and down) and roll (angle side to
side) in degrees. The Pitch & Roll gauges provide a
visualization of the current vehicle angle.
DYNAMOMETER (DYNO)/ENGINE
Dynamometer (Dyno)
The system will start drawing graphs for Power and
Torque (top chart) and Engine Speed (bottom
chart). The graph will fill from the left side of the
x-axis and fill to the right side of the x-axis (based
on History time selected). Once the right side of the
page is reached, the graph will scroll with the right
side always being the most recent recorded
sample.
The following options can be selected:
Pressing the STOP button will freeze the graph.
Selecting “Play” will clear the graph and restart
the process.
Press the + or – button to change the history
of the graph. The selectable options are
“30”, “60”, “90”, “120” seconds. The graph will
expand or constrict depending on the setting
selected.
Select the “Gear” display setting to turn the
graph gear markers on or off.
NOTE:
The Gear On/Off feature will only display if
your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic
Transmission.
Engine
Press the Left and Right Arrow buttons on the
bottom of the touchscreen to cycle between the
Dyno and Engine pages.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312
MULTIMEDIA 313
When selected, this screen displays the following
values:
Vehicle Speed: Shows the actual vehicle speed.
Engine Power: Shows the instantaneous power.
Engine Torque: Shows the instantaneous
torque.
Boost Pressure: Shows the actual engine boost
pressure.
Gear: Shows the current (or pending) operating
gear of the vehicle.
VEHICLE DYNAMICS
The Vehicle Dynamics page displays information
concerning the vehicle’s drivetrain.
Steering Angle — If Equipped
Steering Angle utilizes the steering angle sensor to
calculate the degree of the steering relative to zero
(straight ahead) reference angle. The zero degree
reference angle measurement indicates the actual
front tire steering angle.
Transfer Case
This feature will be active when the vehicle is in
4WD HIGH, 4WD AUTO, Neutral, or 4WD LOW.
NOTE:
A lock symbol will only be present on the Transfer
Case button when the vehicle is in 4WD LOW.
Rear Axle Locker
This feature will allow you to lock and unlock the
rear axle. To change the status, push the AXLE
LOCK button.
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with Off-Road Pages
which display vehicle information related to the
drivetrain, transfer case, and coolant/oil gauges.
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Vehicle
button on the touchscreen, select the Off-Road
Pages tab, and then select the Off-Road button on
the main screen. Off-Road Pages can also be
accessed through the app drawer.
Off-Road Button
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313
314 MULTIMEDIA
OFF-ROAD PAGES STATUS BAR
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along the
bottom of Off-Road Pages and is present in each of
the four selectable page options. It provides
information for the following items:
1. Transfer Case Status
2. Latitude/Longitude
3. Altitude of the vehicle
4. Status of Hill Descent Control
5. Speed in MPH (km/h)
Status Bar 2WD/4WD
1 — Transfer Case Status
2 — Latitude/Longitude
3 — Altitude
4 — Hill Descent Control Status
5 — Speed
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314
MULTIMEDIA 315
VEHICLE DYNAMICS
The Vehicle Dynamics page displays information
concerning the vehicle’s transfer case and
steering angle.
The following information is displayed:
1. Status of Transfer Case
2. Status of Front Axles — If Equipped
3. Status of the Rear Axles
4. Steering angle in degrees
Drivetrain Menu 2WD/4WD
1 — Steering Angle
2 — Transfer Case Status
3 — Rear Axle Locker Status
4 — Rear Axle
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315
316 MULTIMEDIA
ACCESSORY GAUGE
The Accessory Gauge page displays the current
status of the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil
Temperature, Oil Pressure, Transmission
Temperature, and Battery Voltage.
Accessory Gauge Menu 2WD/4WD
1 — Oil Temperature
2 — Coolant Temperature
3 — Oil Pressure
4 — Battery Voltage
5 — Transmission Temperature
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316
MULTIMEDIA 317
PITCH & ROLL
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s current
pitch (angle up and down) and roll (angle side to
side) in degrees. The Pitch & Roll gauges provide a
visualization of the current vehicle angle.
NOTE:
Pitch & Roll values may show upon startup. These
numbers will update once the vehicle is driven.
Pitch & Roll Menu 2WD/4WD
5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317
318 MULTIMEDIA
SUSPENSION
The Suspension page displays the current status of
the vehicle’s suspension system and the current
ride height of the vehicle. The Suspension page will
also indicate when the vehicle’s height changes.
Suspension Menu
FORWARD FACING CAMERA
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Forward
Facing Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the front view of your vehicle. The image
will be displayed on the touchscreen along with a
caution note “Check Entire Surroundings” across
the top of the screen.
To activate, press the Forward Facing Camera
button on the touchscreen.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318
319
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and
brake performance under most braking conditions.
The system automatically prevents wheel lock and
enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that
the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle
is started and driven. During this self-check, you
may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels are beginning
to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel,
bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops
may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may
continue to hear for a short time after the stop)
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
the stop
The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification
may result in degraded ABS performance.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to interfer-
ence caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This
interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qual-
ified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer.
Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you
need to slow down or stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING!
6
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319
320 SAFETY
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion
of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional
brake system will continue to operate normally if
the ABS Warning Light is on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the ABS Warning
Light does not come on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as
soon as possible.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This system
includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll Mitigation
(ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Hill Start
Assist (HSA), and Traction Control System (TCS).
These systems work together to enhance both
vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer
Sway Control (TSC) and Hill Descent Control (HDC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency
braking situation by sensing the rate and amount
of brake application, and then applies optimum
pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance.
To receive the benefit of the system, you must
apply continuous braking pressure during the
stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot
prevent collisions, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a
BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner, which could
jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
others.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320
SAFETY 321
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake
system is not functioning properly and that
immediate service is required.
If the Brake System Warning Light does not come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to
prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle
instability, and to prevent the rear axle from
entering the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) before
the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
The ERM system anticipates the potential for
wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s steering wheel
input and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM
determines that the rate of change of the steering
wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to
potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine
power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel
lift occurring during severe or evasive driving
maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to
other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, striking objects or other vehicles.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC
corrects for oversteering or understeering of the
vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel(s) to counteract the above conditions.
Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC
applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to
assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence the
chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur.
ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers,
especially those that involve leaving the roadway
or striking objects or other vehicles. The
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user's safety
or the safety of others.
6
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321
322 SAFETY
(Continued)
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
located in the instrument cluster will start to flash
as soon as the ESC system becomes active. The
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when the TCS is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used for
most driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes
should only be used for specific reasons as noted
in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push
the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator
Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again,
momentarily push the ESC OFF button and the
ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the
push and release of the button will toggle the ESC
modes. Multiple attempts may be required to
return to “ESC On”.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
tions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to
inappropriate driver input for the conditions.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle, and
may negatively affect the performance of the
ESC system. Changes to the steering system,
suspension, braking system, tire type and size
or wheel size may adversely affect ESC perfor-
mance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn
tires may also degrade ESC performance.
Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle main-
tenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING!
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS function-
ality of ESC (except for the limited slip feature
described in the TCS section) has been
disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode,
the engine power reduction feature of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322
SAFETY 323
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC features are
turned off. To enter the “Full Off” mode, push and
hold the ESC OFF button for five seconds while the
vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After
five seconds, a chime will sound, the ESC OFF
Indicator Light will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF”
message will display in the instrument cluster.
To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the
ESC OFF button.
NOTE:
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial
Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined
speed. When the vehicle speed slows below the
predetermined speed the system will return to
ESC “Full Off”.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes
(if equipped).
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come
on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN mode. It should go out with the
engine running. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light comes on continuously with the
engine running, a malfunction has been detected
in the ESC system. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer
as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes
when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled.
Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is unavailable. In an emer-
gency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will
not engage to assist in maintaining stability.
ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for
off-highway or off-road use only.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
tions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent collisions.
6
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323
324 SAFETY
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates
that the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is in a reduced mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on
momentarily each time the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN mode.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, the ESC system will be on even if it was
turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving
while in 4WD Low. HDC maintains vehicle speed
while descending hills during various driving
situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by actively
controlling the brakes.
HDC Has Three States:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver is
actively overriding with brake or throttle
application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable
HDC:
The driveline is in 4WD Low.
The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
The parking brake is released.
The driver door is closed.
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically
if driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude.
The set speed for HDC is selectable by the driver,
and can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-.
The following summarizes the HDC set speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will
not activate.
R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC
target speed selection, but will not affect the gear
chosen by the transmission. When actively
controlling HDC the transmission will shift appro-
priately for the driver-selected set speed and corre-
sponding driving conditions.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324
SAFETY 325
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with
throttle or brake application at any time.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any
of the following conditions occur:
The driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle
or brake application.
The vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h)
but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
The vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient
magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill
grade.
The vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the HDC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of the 4WD Low.
The parking brake is applied.
The driver door opens.
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).
HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the
HDC switch has an LED icon, which offers feedback
to the driver about the state HDC is in.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate
and remain on solid when HDC is enabled or
activated. This is the normal operating condition
for HDC.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds, then extinguish when the
driver pushes the HDC switch but enable condi-
tions are not met.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds, then extinguish when HDC
disables due to excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when
HDC deactivates due to overheated brakes. The
flashing will stop and HDC will activate again
once the brakes have cooled sufficiently.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver
releases the brake while stopped on an incline,
HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a
short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system will
release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for
HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward
gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the trans-
mission is in PARK or NEUTRAL.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descending hills.
The driver must remain attentive to the driving
conditions and is responsible for maintaining a
safe vehicle speed.
6
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325
326 SAFETY
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, proceed as follows:
If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings
Ú page 238.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet
conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount
of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on
the front brake rotors. It functions when the
windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When Rain
Brake Support is active, there is no notification to
the driver and no driver interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full
braking during emergency braking situations. It
anticipates when an emergency braking situation
may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is
released by the driver. The Electronic Brake
Control system will prepare the brake system for a
panic stop.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of
each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is
detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to the
spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power to
provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A
feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD)
functions similarly to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one
wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the
other, the system will apply the brake of the
spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque
to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
BLD may remain enabled even if TCS and
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) are in reduced
modes.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is
not a substitute for active driving involvement. It
is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people,
and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to
maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision or
serious personal injury.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there
may not be enough brake pressure to hold
both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when
the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid
rolling down an incline while resuming accel-
eration, manually activate the trailer brake or
apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to
releasing the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle.
Also, be certain to place the transmission in
PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326
SAFETY 327
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow
the trailer tongue weight recommendations
Ú page 216.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” or “Full Off” modes.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
I
F EQUIPPED
BSM uses two radar sensors, located inside the
taillights, to detect highway licensable vehicles
(automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter
the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of
the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light
will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
and enters standby mode when the vehicle is
in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one
lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft
(3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside
rearview mirror and extends approximately 10 ft
(3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection
zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle
speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or
higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these
areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
BSM may experience dropouts (blinking on and
off) of the side mirror warning indicator lamps
when a motorcycle or any small object remains
at the side of the vehicle for extended periods of
time (more than a couple of seconds).
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
6
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327
328 SAFETY
The BSM system can become blocked if snow, ice,
mud, or other road contaminations accumulate on
the rear fascia/bumper where the radar sensors
are located. The system may also detect blockage
if the vehicle is operated in areas with extremely
low radar returns such as a desert or parallel to a
large elevation drop. If blockage is detected, a
“Blind Spot Temporarily Unavailable, Wipe Rear
Corners” message will display in the cluster, both
mirror lights will illuminate, and BSM and RCP
alerts will not occur. This is normal operation. The
system will automatically recover and resume
function when the condition clears. To minimize
system blockage, do not block the area of the rear
fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are
located with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.) and keep it clear of road
contaminations.
Radar Sensor Locations
If the system detects degraded performance due
to contamination or foreign objects, a message will
warn you of a blocked sensor and the warning
indicators in side view mirrors will be on. The
warning indicators will remain illuminated until
blockage clearing conditions are met. First clear
the taillights around the sensors of the blockage.
After removing the blockage, the following
procedure can be used to reset the system:
Cycle the ignition from ON to OFF and then
back ON.
If the blockage message is still present after
cycling the ignition and driving in traffic, check
again for a blockage.
The system may also detect a blockage if the
vehicle is operated in areas with extremely low
radar returns such as a desert or parallel to a large
elevation drop.
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning
Light located in the outside mirrors, in addition to
sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the
radio volume Ú page 331.
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
three different entry points (side, rear, front) while
driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM
system will issue an alert during these types of
zone entries.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328
SAFETY 329
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from
either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side and enter the rear detection zone with
a relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle
remains in the blind spot for approximately 1.5
seconds, the warning light will be illuminated. If the
difference in speed between the two vehicles is
greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light
will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert
on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts,
walls, foliage, berms, snow banks, car washes, etc.
However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
6
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329
330 SAFETY
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle
in adjacent lanes Ú page 490.
Opposing Traffic
For information on how Blind Spot Monitoring
functions when pulling a trailer Ú page 331.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out
of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming
vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and
cautiously out of the parking space until the rear
end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic, and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects
moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph
(32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE (R),
the driver is alerted using both the visual and
audible alarms, including reducing the radio
volume.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
to help detect objects in the blind spot zones.
The BSM system is not designed to detect
pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your
vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always
check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup
aid system. It is intended to be used to help a
driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking
lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you,
and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330
SAFETY 331
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of
operation that are available in the Uconnect
system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate
side view mirror based on a detected object.
However, when the system is operating in Rear
Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in
the appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. If the turn signal is then activated,
and it corresponds to an alert present on that side
of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be
sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be
issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio
(if on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is also muted.
Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state
always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM, RCP,
or Trailer Merge Assist systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the
vehicle is started the previously stored mode will
be recalled and used.
Trailer Merge Assist — If Equipped
Trailer Merge Assist is a function of the Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM) system that extends the blind
spot zone to work while pulling a trailer.
NOTE:
When Trailer Merge Assist is activated,
Rear Cross Path is disabled.
Trailer Merge Assist consists of three sub
functions:
Automatic Trailer Detection
Trailer Length Detection
Trailer Merge Warning
Blind Spot Zones With Trailer Merge Assist
1 — Vehicle
2 — Trailer
6
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331
332 SAFETY
Automatic Trailer Detection
There are two modes of operation for the detection
of the trailer length:
Automatic Mode — When “Auto Mode” is
selected, the system will use the blind spot
sensors to automatically determine the pres-
ence and length of a trailer. The presence of a
trailer will be detected using the blind spot radar
within 90 seconds of forward movement of the
vehicle. The vehicle must be moving above
6 mph (10 km/h) to activate the feature. Once
the trailer has been detected, the system will
default to the maximum blind spot zone until the
length has been verified. You will see “Auto” in
the instrument panel cluster .
Maximum Mode — When “Max Mode” is
selected, the system will default to the
maximum blind spot zone regardless of what
size trailer is attached .
NOTE:
Selected setting is stored when the ignition is
placed in the OFF position. To change this setting,
it must be selected through the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 238.
Trailer Length Detection
Once the trailer presence has been established,
the trailer length will be established (by making a
90 degree turn) and then the trailer length
category (example 10-20 ft (3 m to 6 m)) will be
displayed. This can take up to 30 seconds after
completing the turn.
NOTE:
During the same ignition cycle, if the vehicle is at a
standstill for a minimum of 90 seconds, a new
“trailer detection request” is enabled by the
system once the vehicle resumes motion.
The maximum trailer length supported by the
Trailer Merge Assist feature is 39.5 ft (12 m).
Trailer length is considered the forward most
portion of the trailer hitch to the rearward most
portion of the body, fascia/bumper, or ramp of
the trailer.
The maximum width supported by the Trailer
Merge Assist feature is 8.5 ft (2.59 m). Trailer
width is measured at the widest portion of the
trailer and may include wheels, tires, finders,
or rails.
NOTE:
Fifth wheel or gooseneck trailers are not supported
by Trailer Merge Assist.
NOTE:
The ability to detect a trailer may be degraded in
crowded or busy environments. Busy parking lots,
narrow areas surrounded with trees, or any other
crowded area may prevent the radar sensors from
being able to adequately detect the trailer. The
system will try to detect a trailer at every ignition
cycle or 90 seconds of standstill.
Trailer Length Detection
1 — Trailer Length
2 — Trailer Hitch
3 — Trailer Width
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 332
SAFETY 333
Trailer length will be identified and placed into one
of the following categories:
Trailer length up to 10 ft (3 m) — Blind spot zone
will be adjusted to 10 ft (3 m) .
Trailer length between 10 ft to 20 ft
(3 m to 6 m) — Blind spot zone will be adjusted
to 20 ft (6 m) .
Trailer length between 20 ft to 30 ft
(6 m to 9 m) — Blind spot zone will be adjusted
to 30 ft (9 m) .
Trailer length between 30 ft and 39.5 ft
(9 m to 12 m) — Blind spot zone will be adjusted
to Max distance .
NOTE:
Trailer length is determined within +/- 3 ft (1 m) of
actual length. Trailers that are the same size as the
category limit, 10/20/30 ft (3/6/9 m), could be
subject to being placed in the category above or
below the correct one.
Trailer Merge Warning
Trailer Merge Warning is the extension of the blind
spot function to cover the length of the trailer, plus
a safety margin, to warn the driver when there is a
vehicle in the adjacent lane. The driver is alerted by
the illumination of the BSM Warning Light located
in the outside mirror on the side the other vehicle
is detected on. In addition, an audible (chime) alert
will be heard and radio volume will be reduced
Ú page 331.
NOTE:
The Trailer Merge Alert system DOES NOT alert
the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles
that are outside the detection zones.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience drop outs (blinking on and off) of the
side mirror warning indicator lamps when a
motorcycle or any small object remains at the
side of the vehicle for extended periods of time
(more than a couple of seconds).
Crowded areas such as parking lots, neighbor-
hoods, etc. may lead to an increased amount of
false alerts. This is normal operation.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with
audible warnings, visual warnings (within the
instrument cluster display), and may apply a brake
jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential
frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking
are intended to provide the driver with enough time
to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
forward collision. When the system determines
that a forward collision is probable, the driver will
be provided with audible and visual warnings as
well as a possible brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide
a limited level of active braking to help slow the
vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision.
If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and
the system determines that the driver intends to
avoid the collision by braking but has not applied
sufficient brake force, the system will compensate
and provide additional brake force as required.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
to help detect objects in the blind spot zones.
The BSM system is not designed to detect
pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your
vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always
check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
6
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 333
334 SAFETY
If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed
below 32 mph (52 km/h), the system may provide
the maximum braking possible to mitigate the
potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision
Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle
completely, the system will hold the vehicle at
standstill for two seconds and then release the
brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated Ú page 490.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
3 mph (5 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guardrails or sign
posts based on the course prediction. This is
expected and is a part of normal FCW activation
and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent
such misuse of the system, after four Active
Braking events within a key cycle, the Active
Braking portion of FCW will be deactivated until
the next key cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent unnec-
essary warnings to the surroundings.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects
not in the path of the vehicle, stationary objects
that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading
vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the
unavailable screens.
Turning FCW On Or Off
The FCW button is located in the Uconnect display
in the control settings Ú page 238.
To turn the FCW system on, press the forward
collision button once.
To turn the FCW system off, press the forward
collision button once.
NOTE:
When the FCW is “on”, this allows the system to
warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front.
When the FCW is “off”, this prevents the system
from warning the driver of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front. If the FCW is set to “off”,
“FCW OFF” will be displayed in the instrument
cluster display.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended
to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW
detect every type of potential collision. The driver
has the responsibility to avoid a collision by
controlling the vehicle via braking and steering.
Failure to follow this warning could lead to
serious injury or death.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 334
SAFETY 335
When FCW status is set to “Only Warning”, this
prevents the system from providing limited
active braking, or additional brake support if the
driver is not braking adequately in the event of
a potential frontal collision.
When FCW status is set to “Warning and
Braking”, this allows the system to warn the
driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
The FCW system state is defaulted to “Full On”
from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system
is turned off, it will reset to “Full On” when the
vehicle is restarted.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 238.
Far
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Far” setting and the system status is “Only
Warning”, this allows the system to warn the
driver of a possible more distant collision
with the vehicle in front using audible/
visual warnings.
More cautious drivers that do not mind
frequent warnings may prefer this setting.
NOTE:
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of
FCW possible collision warnings experienced.
Medium
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Medium” setting and the system status is
“Only Warning”, this allows the system to
warn the driver of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front using audible/visual
warnings.
Near
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Near” setting and the system status is
“Only Warning”, this allows the system to
warn the driver of a possible closer collision
with the vehicle in front using audible/
visual warnings.
This setting provides less reaction time than
the “Far” and “Medium” settings, which
allows for a more dynamic driving experi-
ence.
More dynamic or aggressive drivers that
want to avoid frequent warnings may prefer
this setting.
NOTE:
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of
FCW possible collision warnings experienced.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
momentarily, there may be a condition that limits
FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
driveable under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the
condition that limited the system performance is
no longer present, the system will return to its full
performance state. If the problem persists, see an
authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
6
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 335
336 SAFETY
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) —
If Equipped
PEB is a subsystem of the FCW system that
provides the driver with audible and visual
warnings in the instrument cluster display, and
may apply automatic braking when it detects a
potential frontal collision with a pedestrian/cyclist.
If a PEB event begins at a speed below 37 mph
(60 km/h), the system may provide braking to
mitigate the potential collision with a pedestrian.
If the PEB event stops the vehicle completely, the
system will hold the vehicle at a standstill for two
seconds and then release the brakes. When the
system determines a collision with the pedestrian/
cyclist in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated.
The minimum speed for PEB activation is 3 mph
(5 km/h).
Turning PEB On Or Off
NOTE:
The default status of PEB is “On.” This allows the
system to warn you of a possible frontal collision
with the pedestrian/cyclist.
The PEB button is located in the Uconnect display
in the controls settings Ú page 238.
To turn the PEB system off, push the Pedestrian
Emergency Braking button once.
To turn the PEB system back on, push the
Pedestrian Emergency Braking button again.
Changing the PEB status to “Off” deactivates the
system, so no warning or active braking will be
available in case of a possible frontal collision with
the pedestrian/cyclist.
NOTE:
The PEB system will retain the last setting selected
by the driver after ignition shut down.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
based on the vehicle recommended cold placard
pressure.
NOTE:
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active
road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will
display a graphic showing the pressure values of
each tire with the low tire pressure values in a
different color, or the Uconnect radio will display a
TPMS message; when this occurs you must
increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS
Warning Light to turn off.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle
is driven — this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
See Ú page 454 on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires.
WARNING!
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can
PEB detect every type of potential collision with
a pedestrian. The driver has the responsibility to
avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via
braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 336
SAFETY 337
(Continued)
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure
warning limit for any reason, including low
temperature effects and natural pressure loss
through the tire Ú page 490.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above
the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the
low TPMS Warning Light illuminates, increase the
tire pressure to the recommended cold placard
pressure in order for the TPMS Warning Light to
turn off. The system will automatically update and
the TPMS Warning Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in
order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
For example, your vehicle may have a
recommended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the
ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the
tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa).
This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn
on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the TPMS
Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the tires
are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
care and maintenance or to provide warning of
a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure, unless
your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Fill Alert
(TFA) system.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may
result when using replacement equipment
that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor
damage.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended
that you take your vehicle to an authorized
dealership to have your sensor function
checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the TPMS
sensor.
CAUTION!
6
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 337
338 SAFETY
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility
to maintain correct tire pressure using an accu-
rate tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination
of the TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual
tire pressure in the tire.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses
wireless technology with wheel rim mounted
electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels.
Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the
valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the
receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low
Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Warning Light will illuminate in
the instrument cluster and a chime will
sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a graphic showing
the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values in a different color. An "Inflate to
XX" message will also be displayed.
Low Tire Pressure Display
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure
condition (those in a different color in the
instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value as shown in the "Inflate to XX" message.
Once the system receives the updated tire
pressures, the system will automatically update,
the graphic display in the instrument cluster will
return to its original color, and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 338
SAFETY 339
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in
order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light off.
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a
"SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum
of five seconds and then display dashes (--) in
place of the pressure value to indicate which
sensor is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the
system fault no longer exists, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will no longer
flash, and the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message
will no longer display, and a pressure value will
display in place of the dashes. A system fault can
occur due to any of the following:
Signal interference due to electronic devices or
driving next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System sensors
Installing aftermarket window tinting that
contains materials that may block radio wave
signals
Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels
or wheel housings
Using tire chains on the vehicle
Using wheels/tires not equipped with
TPMS sensors
A system fault may occur due to an incorrect TPMS
sensor location condition. When a system fault
occurs due to an incorrect TPMS sensor location,
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. The system fault will also
sound a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster
will display a Tire Pressure Temporarily Unavailable
message in place of the tire pressure display
screen. If the ignition switch is cycled, this
sequence will repeat, providing the system fault
still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light”
will no longer flash and the tire pressure display
screen will be displayed showing the tire pressure
values the correct locations.
Vehicles With Non-Matching Full Size Spare Or
Compact Spare
The non-matching full size spare or compact
spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor. There-
fore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
the non-matching full size spare or compact
spare tire.
If you install the non-matching full size spare or
compact spare tire in place of a road tire that
has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning
Light and a “LOW TIRE” message will remain on
and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic
in the instrument cluster will still display a pres-
sure value in a different color and an
“Inflate to XX” message.
After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on solid. In addition, the instrument cluster will
display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a
minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (--) in place of the pressure value.
6
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 339
340 SAFETY
For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a
chime will sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Warning Light will flash on and
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid,
and the instrument cluster will display a
"SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a
minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (--) in place of the pressure value.
Once you repair or replace the original road tire
and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the
non-matching full size spare or compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition,
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light will turn off and the graphic in the
instrument cluster will display a new pressure
value instead of dashes (--), as long as no tire
pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit
in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS
to receive this information.
Tire Fill Alert
This feature notifies the user when the placard
tire pressure is attained while inflating or
deflating the tire.
You may choose to disable or enable the Tire Fill
Alert feature through use of the Uconnect Settings
in the radio.
NOTE:
Only one tire can be filled at a time when using
the Tire Fill Alert system.
The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if an
existing TPMS fault is set to “active” or if the
system is in deactivation mode (if equipped).
The system will be activated when a positive
increase in tire pressure is detected by the TPMS
while inflating the tire. The ignition must be in the
RUN mode, with the transmission in PARK.
NOTE:
It is not required to have the engine running to
enter Tire Fill Alert mode.
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the
vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire
pressure display screen will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
If the hazard lamps do not come on while inflating
the tire, the TPMS sensor may be out of range
preventing the TPMS sensor signal from being
received. In this case, the vehicle may need to be
moved either forward or backward slightly to exit
the null spot.
Operation:
The horn will sound once to let the user know
when to stop filling the tire, when it reaches
recommended pressure.
The horn will sound three times if the tire is over-
filled and will continue to sound every five
seconds if the user continues to inflate the tire.
The horn will sound once again when enough air
is let out to reach proper inflation level.
The horn will also sound three times if the tire is
then underinflated and will continue to sound
every five seconds if the user continues to
deflate the tire.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TTPMS) — If Equipped
The Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TTPMS) is a feature that displays the trailer tire
pressure values and warns the driver of a low tire
pressure event based on the driver’s set target tire
pressure value, through TTPMS settings found in
the radio.
The TTPMS monitors the pressure of each tire and
warns the driver through the instrument cluster,
when either a low tire pressure condition falls
below 25% of the driver’s set pressure or if a
system malfunction occurs. The instrument cluster
will display the actual tire pressure or dashes for
each of the trailer tires in the correct trailer
position, based on trailer configuration.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 340
SAFETY 341
The TTPMS can support up to 12 trailer tires per
configured trailer on up to four configurable trailers
Ú page 238.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Trailer Tire Pressure Sensor Pairing
In order use this feature, the provided tire pressure
sensors must be installed in the desired trailer
tires and the sensors must be paired to the truck.
If the target trailer requires more than the provided
four sensors, additional sensors can be purchased
at an authorized Ram dealership.
With the sensors installed and the trailer near or
connected to your Ram truck, initiate the pairing
process by entering the settings menu in the radio
and selecting trailer. Select the desired trailer
profile to pair to, open the “Tire Pressure” menu,
and hit “Setup All Tires” Ú page 238.
NOTE:
The vehicle may not be driven until the pairing
process is complete.
Trailer Tire Pressure Settings
Trailer Tire Pressure Pairing
Follow the on screen prompts to select the number
of axles (1-3), the number of trailer tires (2, 4, 6, 8,
or 12), and the set trailer tire pressure. The range
is selectable anywhere between 25-125 psi
(172-862 kPa).
Once psi (kPa) is programmed, the pairing screen
appears. Tire sensors must be paired in order
shown. Starting with Tire 1, deflate tire by 5 psi
(34 kPa) and wait for a horn chirp. It may take up
to three minutes for the chirp to occur, indicating
that the sensor has paired. Repeat process on
each tire, in order, until complete. Do not exit the
pairing screen until process is complete. If pairing
was unsuccessful, a double horn chirp will sound,
and a prompt on the touchscreen will allow you to
retry the procedure; “Retry” will only appear when
setup fails. Each tire must be successfully paired
during a single pairing process to receive the
success screen.
NOTE:
If the pairing process times out after three minutes
of no communication with a sensor, a double horn
chip will occur indicating the pairing has failed and
a message will display on the radio indicating the
process was unsuccessful. Under certain circum-
stances, the double horn chirp may continue to
happen every three minutes indicating the failed
pairing. If this happens, the horn chirping may be
canceled by cycling the ignition button OFF and
then back to RUN position.
6
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 341
342 SAFETY
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low Pressure
Warnings
When a tire pressure low in one or more of the
active road tires is detected, the instrument cluster
will display a message stating “Trailer Tire
Pressure Low”. The instrument cluster will then
display the TTPMS graphic showing the pressure
values of each tire with the low tire pressure values
in a different color.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure
condition (those in a different color in the
instrument cluster graphic) to the customer
programmed target tire pressure value as shown
at the top of the TTPMS instrument cluster graphic.
Once the tire(s) are inflated, the system will
automatically update the graphic display in the
instrument cluster, returning to its original color.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TTPMS to receive the updated information.
Service TTPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the instrument cluster
will display a “Trailer Tire Pressure System Service
Required” message for a minimum of five seconds.
Once the system fault is corrected the "Trailer Tire
Pressure System Service Required" message will
no longer be displayed. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TTPMS to receive the
trailer tire pressure information.
Trailer Tire Pressure System Not Configured
A “Trailer Tire Pressure System Not Configured”
message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster on the TTPMS instrument cluster graphic
when a trailer number is selected that has not had
trailer tire pressure sensors paired. To correct this
condition, see Ú page 238.
Trailer Sensors Detected Do Not Match Active
Trailer
The “Trailer Sensors Detected Do Not Match Active
Trailer” message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster when the trailer sensors being
received by the TTPMS module do not match the
trailer sensors paired to the current trailer number
selected. This message will be displayed when the
sensors being received completely match the
sensors paired to another trailer number
configured in the TTPMS module.
To correct this condition, the correct trailer number
must be selected in the radio Ú page 238.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others.
If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your passengers
as safe as possible.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 342
SAFETY 343
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured in
the appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear seating
position Ú page 363.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint Ú page 363.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with
your child restraint to make sure that you are
using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow the
front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment
occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully
into the space between occupants and the
door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person,
see Ú page 487 for customer service contact
information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver,
even on short trips. Someone on the road may be
a poor driver and could cause a collision that
includes you. This can happen far away from home
or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts
reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of
injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind
the driver and outboard front seat
passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
their seat belts. The BeltAlert feature is active
whenever the ignition switch is in the START or
ON/RUN position.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
6
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 343
344 SAFETY
(Continued)
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime
will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the
START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard
front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when
the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle
speed range and the driver or outboard front seat
passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the
Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning
sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will remain on until the seat belts are
buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence
will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an
animal or other items are placed on the outboard
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat
(if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until the driver and outboard
front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped
with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows
the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely
with you under normal conditions. However, in a
collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk
of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown
out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you
can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be
sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 344
SAFETY 345
(Continued)
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear their
seat belts whether or not an air bag is also
provided at their seating position to minimize
the risk of severe injury or death in the event
of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder
belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no
matter what their size.
WARNING!
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk
of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces
won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones,
but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap
part of your seat belt as low as possible and
keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop-
erly. In a collision, it could even cut into you.
Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body,
without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat
belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized
dealer immediately and have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest
you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too
far forward, increasing the possibility of injury.
Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision. You
are more likely to hit your head in a collision if
you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap
and shoulder belt are meant to be used
together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a
collision, or if you have questions regarding
seat belt or retractor conditions, take your
vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program
facility for inspection.
WARNING!
6
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345
346 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back
and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of
the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear
seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat).
Grab the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the seat belt to go around
your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap
belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to
the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is
no longer twisted.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 346
SAFETY 347
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats,
the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the seat belt away
from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage
button to release the anchorage, and move it up or
down to the position that serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower
position, and if you are taller than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher
position. After you release the anchorage button,
try to move it up or down to make sure that it is
locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature
allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted
in the upward position without pushing or
squeezing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
when the webbing is fully extended and the
adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized
dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender.
The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the
existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different
occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjustments
when the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original
seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt
Extender if, when worn, the distance between
the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender
buckle and the center of the occupant’s body
is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed
can increase the risk of serious injury or death
in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender
when the lap belt is not long enough and only
use in the recommended seating positions.
Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender
when not needed.
6
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 347
348 SAFETY
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of
an accident is reduced for the mother and the
unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips.
Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away
from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt
behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a
collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision.
Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be
replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. The seat belt system has a retractor
assembly that is designed to release webbing in a
controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child
restraint system Ú page 372. The figure below
illustrates the locking feature for each seating
position.
Automatic Locking Retractor — (ALR) Locations
(All Models)
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 348
SAFETY 349
(Continued)
If the passenger seating position is equipped with
an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only
pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR
is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the
seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract
completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child
restraint is installed in a seating position that has
a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old
and under should always be properly restrained in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward
until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and
allow it to retract completely to disengage the
Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others.
If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to
the procedures in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the seat
belt or children who are using booster seats.
The locked mode is only used to install
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints
that have a harness for restraining the child.
6
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 349
350 SAFETY
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in
a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position
or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on
and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system
that may deploy the air bag system even if the
battery loses power or it becomes disconnected
prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight
seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is
first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check,
the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC
detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect
the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the
nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system
is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the igni-
tion switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the
four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In
this condition the air bags may not be ready to
inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have the
air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the
light does not come on as a bulb check when the
ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start
the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have
an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 350
SAFETY 351
(Continued)
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS),
the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate on the instrument panel. The
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until
the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been
detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
comes on intermittently or remains on while driving
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately Ú page 131.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger. The
front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment.
The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the severity and
type of collision as determined by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive
information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag deployment.
A low energy output is used in less severe
collisions. A higher energy output is used for more
severe collisions.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during front air bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfort-
ably extending your arms to reach the steering
wheel or instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
6
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351
352 SAFETY
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or
front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger seat
belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may
adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air
Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front
Air Bags based upon seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front
passenger Occupant Classification System (“OCS”)
that is designed to provide Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant’s
seated weight input, as determined by the OCS.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front
air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front
air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage
by themselves are not good indicators of whether
or not an air bag should have deployed.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the
air bag on the instrument panel or steering
wheel because any such objects could cause
harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe
enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You
may damage the air bags and you could be
injured because the air bags may no longer be
functional. The protective covers for the air
bag cushions are designed to open only when
the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even
though you have air bags.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 352
SAFETY 353
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate
and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air
bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part
of a Federally regulated safety system for this
vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the
occupant’s seated weight, as determined by the
OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists
of the following:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and
Sensor located in the front passenger seat
Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is
located underneath the front passenger seat. The
Sensor is located beneath the passenger seat
cushion foam. Any weight on the seat will be
sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input from
the Sensor to determine the front passenger’s
most probable classification. The OCM
communicates this information to the ORC. The
ORC may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag deployment based on
occupant classification. In order for the OCS to
operate as designed, it is important for the front
passenger to be seated properly and properly
wearing the seat belt.
6
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 353
354 SAFETY
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
if the OCS estimates that:
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very light objects on it; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a small passenger, including a child; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing child restraint; or
The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment. Never allow children to ride in the
front passenger seat and never install a child restraint system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status Front Passenger Air Bag Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deployment
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat* Reduced-power deployment OR full-power deployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment OR reduced-power deployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deployment
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
Children 12 years or younger should always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 354
SAFETY 355
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. The OCS estimates the
seated weight on the front passenger seat and
where that weight is located. The OCS
communicates the classification status to the ORC.
The ORC uses the classification to determine
whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
inflation rate should be adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated
properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
Properly seated passengers are:
Sitting upright
Facing forward
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet
comfortably on or near the floor
Sitting with their back against the seatback and
the seatback in an upright position
Seated Properly
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small
adult, occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS
may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. This does not mean that
the OCS is working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be
properly positioned on the front passenger seat.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury or
death. The OCS determines the most probable
classification of the occupant that it detects. The
OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or
increased seated weight, which may result in an
adjusted inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not mean that
the OCS is working improperly.
Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on
the front passenger seat may result in a
reduced-power deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing the front
passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger
seat may result in a full-power deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating
include:
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm
rest or instrument panel).
The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or
turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full
upright position.
The front passenger carries or holds an object
while seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
Objects are lodged under the front passenger
seat.
Objects are lodged between the front passenger
seat and center console.
Accessories that may change the seated weight
on the front passenger seat are attached to the
front passenger seat.
Anything that may decrease or increase the
front passenger’s seated weight.
6
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 355
356 SAFETY
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. If an occupant in the front
passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant
may provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different from the occupant’s properly seated
weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
WARNING!
If a child restraint system, child, small teen-
ager or adult in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide
an output signal to the OCS that is different
from the occupant’s properly seated weight
input. This may result in serious injury or death
in a collision.
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly,
with the seatback in an upright position, your
back against the seatback, sitting upright,
facing forward, in the center of the seat, with
your feet comfortably on or near the floor.
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., back-
packs, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front
passenger seat. Holding an object may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different than the occupant’s properly seated
weight input, which may result in serious injury
or death in a collision.
Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from
working properly, which may result in serious
injury or death in a collision. Do not place any
objects on the floor under the front passenger
seat.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 356
SAFETY 357
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument
panel will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to
classify the front passenger seat status. A
malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation of
the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come on,
or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes
on as you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer for service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
components that may affect the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the
OCS to properly classify the seated weight of a
front seat passenger, the OCS components must
function as designed. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the
seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any
reason, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Only FCA US LLC approved seat accessories may
be used.
The following requirements must be strictly
followed:
Do not modify the front passenger seat
assembly or components in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat
covers or cushions not designated by FCA US
LLC for the specific model being repaired.
Always use the correct seat cover and cushion
specified for the vehicle.
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
At no time should any Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) component or SRS related
component or fastener be modified or replaced
with any part except those which are approved
by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service proce-
dures to the passenger seat assembly, its
related components, seat cover or cushion
may inadvertently change the air bag deploy-
ment in case of a frontal collision. This could
result in death or serious injury to the front
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a colli-
sion. A modified vehicle may not comply with
required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
6
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 357
358 SAFETY
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees
of the driver and front passenger, and position the
front occupants for improved interaction with the
front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
The SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the
outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant
injury during certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the seat
belts and body structure.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The
inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into
the space between the occupant and the door. The
SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a
high force that it could injure occupants if they are
not seated properly, or if items are positioned in
the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side
Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows. The
trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG”
or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos,
citizen band radios, etc.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the
performance could be adversely affected and/or
objects could be pushed into you, causing
serious injury.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 358
SAFETY 359
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the
window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to
injure occupants if they are not belted and seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain side impact events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the severity
and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid
the ORC in determining the appropriate response
to impact events. The system is calibrated to
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not impact
the area of the passenger compartment. The Side
Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal
collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time
than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or
other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering
above the side windows where the SABIC and
its deployment path are located should
remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do
not install any accessory items in your vehicle
which could alter the roof. Do not add an after-
market sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add
roof racks that require permanent attach-
ments (bolts or screws) for installation on the
vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or area
where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appro-
priate) are necessary for your protection in all
collisions. They also help keep you in position,
away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the
best protection from the Side Air Bags, occu-
pants must wear their seat belts properly and
sit upright with their backs against the seats.
Children must be properly restrained in a child
restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
the size of the child.
6
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 359
360 SAFETY
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events. The
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether deployment in a particular rollover event
is appropriate, based on the severity and type of
collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good
indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat
belt pretensioners should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will
not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a
rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is
appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy
the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on
both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain rollover or side impact
events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with electrical Air Bag System Compo-
nents listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli-
sions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent
and normally heal quickly. However, if you
haven’t healed significantly within a few days,
or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have Side Air Bags.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 360
SAFETY 361
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal
by-product of the process that generates the
non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These
airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes,
nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles
settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision,
the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken
to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event, the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response
System perform the following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped)
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as
long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes
from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident
Response System
Unlock the power door locks
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of
these other functions in response to the Enhanced
Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump (if equipped)
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to
the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
from the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
engine compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting
the system and starting the engine. If there are no
fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical devices
(e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the system
by following the procedure described below. If you
have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners
cannot protect you in another collision. Have the
air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat
belt retractor assemblies replaced by an
authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the
Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced
as well.
6
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 361
362 SAFETY
(Continued)
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response
System functions after an event, the ignition switch
must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN
to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel
leaks in the engine compartment and on the
ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the
engine. After an accident, if the vehicle will not
start after performing the reset procedure, the
vehicle must be towed to an authorized dealer to
be inspected and to have the Enhanced Accident
Response System reset.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data
as:
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You
could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to protect you. Do not modify the compo-
nents or wiring, including adding any kind of
badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub
trim cover or the upper passenger side of the
instrument panel. Do not modify the front
fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or add
aftermarket side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone
who works on your vehicle that it has an air
bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air
bag system. The air bag may inflate acciden-
tally or may not function properly if modifica-
tions are made. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for any air bag system
service. If your seat, including your trim cover
and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer
approved seat accessories may be used. If it is
necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
WARNING!
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 362
SAFETY 363
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender,
age, and crash location) are recorded. However,
other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or
the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at
all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you
can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to
crash statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost
large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check
the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you
have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read
and follow all the instructions and warnings in the
child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the
labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that
it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable
Safety Standards. You should also make sure that
you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to
http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-care-
givers
or call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
https://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become
a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required
to hold even an infant on your lap could become
so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for
the child’s size.
6
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 363
364 SAFETY
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who
have not reached the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the
vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat
belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 364
SAFETY 365
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of
child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth
until they reach the weight or height limit of the
infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used
either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle.
Convertible child seats often have a higher weight
limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who
have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less
than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or
height allowed by their convertible child seat.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear
support leg in this vehicle. The floor of this
vehicle is not designed to manage the crash
forces of this type of car seat. In a crash, the
support leg may not function as it was designed
by the car seat manufacturer, and your child may
be more severely injured as a result.
6
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 365
366 SAFETY
(Continued)
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children
should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a
harness for as long as possible, up to the highest
weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s
seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with
knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while
the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The
child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in
the vehicle by the seat belt.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long
enough to bend over the front of the seat when
their back is against the seatback, should use the
seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test
to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s
seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the
back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat while the child is
still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder
belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure
the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming
or slouching can move the belt out of position. If
the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move
the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in
a collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward
or rearward because it can loosen the child
restraint attachments. Remove the child
restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat
position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure
it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH
anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do
not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden
stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
or seatbacks and cause serious personal
injury.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly,
which may result in serious injury or death.
A child must always wear both the lap and
shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 366
SAFETY 367
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
6
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 367
368 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for
installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are
two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seating
position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the
vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may
have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat
belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to
install the child restraint. Please see the following
table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Crew Cab 60/40 Split Bench LATCH Positions
Crew Cab Full Bench, Quad Cab Full Bench
And 60/40 Split Bench LATCH Positions
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 368
SAFETY 369
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach
the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and
the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor
instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used
together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to
attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed by the
booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for more
information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using
the inner LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard
seating positions?
No
Quad Cab or Crew with Full bench rear seat: Use the seat belt and tether
anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common
lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the
center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the
seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat
using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s
manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
6
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 369
370 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback,
below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean into
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
Rear Outboard Seats Driver Side (Example Shown)
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages
located behind each of the rear seats.
Outboard Tether Anchorage
Center Tether Anchorage Over Head Rest
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach
to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the
connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child
restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will
also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether
strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the
top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
All Quad Cabs Or Crew Cab Full Bench Rear Seat:
No Lower Center LATCH Anchorages Available
WARNING!
Do not install a child restraint in the center
position using the LATCH system. This position
is not approved for installing child seats using
the LATCH attachments. You must use the
seat belt and tether anchor to install a child
seat in the center seating position.
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint
Ú page 371.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 370
SAFETY 371
Crew Cab Split Bench Rear Seat: Center LATCH
Anchorages Available
If a child restraint installed in the center position
blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the
outboard position, do not use that outboard
position. If a child seat in the center position blocks
the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not
install a child seat in that outboard position.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as
described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow
the seat belt, following the instructions below. See
Ú page 372 to check what type of seat belt each
seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap of the child seat so that
you can more easily attach the hooks or
connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child
seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in the
selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect
it to the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 374 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the
seat. Remove slack in the straps according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install
a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
being used by other occupants or being used to
secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure
a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the
seat belt retractor. Before installing a child
restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach
more than one child restraint Ú page 371.
6
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 371
372 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap
portion of the seat belt tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking
clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a
locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract back
into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make
a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor.
See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
Ú page 348 for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor — (ALR) Locations
(All Models)
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 372
SAFETY 373
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint)
for using the Tether Anchor with the
seat belt to attach a forward facing
child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a forward
facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the
child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is allowed,
if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be
removed?
No Head restraints may not be removed.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR retractor.
6
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 373
374 SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to
make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in
the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
part of the belt until you have pulled all the
seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then,
allow the webbing to retract back into the
retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear
a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it
is locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat
step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and
the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap
Ú page 374.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car
seat to any location in front of the car seat,
including the seat frame or a tether anchorage.
Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car
seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for
that seating position, located behind the top of
the vehicle seat. For the location of approved
tether anchorages in your vehicle, see
Ú page 368.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 374
SAFETY 375
The top tether anchorages in this vehicle
are tether strap loops located between
the rear glass and the back of the rear
seat. There is a tether strap loop located
behind each seating position. Follow the steps
below to attach the tether strap of the child
restraint.
Right Or Left Outboard Seats:
1. Reach between the rear seat and rear glass
to access the tether strap loop.
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust
the tether strap so that it will reach over the
seat back, through the space between the
head restraint and the seat back, through the
tether strap loop behind the seat and over to
the tether strap loop behind the center seat.
3. Pass the tether strap hook through the space
between the head restraint and the seat back
behind the child seat, through the tether strap
loop behind the seat and over to the center
tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop
4. Attach the hook to the center tether strap loop
(see diagram). Tighten the tether strap
according to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop And
Attached To Center Tether Strap Loop
NOTE:
If there are child seats in both of the outboard (left
and right) seating positions, the tether strap hooks
of both child seats should be connected to the
center tether strap loop. This is the correct way to
tether two outboard child seats.
Center Seat:
1. Reach between the rear seat and rear glass
to access the tether strap loop.
Center Tether Strap Loop Location
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust
the tether strap so that it will reach over the
seat back and headrest, through the tether
strap loop behind the seat and over to the
tether strap loop behind either the right or left
outboard seat.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front
of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a
rear-facing child restraint.
6
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 375
376 SAFETY
3. Pass the tether strap hook over the headrest
behind the child seat, through the tether strap
loop behind the seat and over to the right or
left outboard tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap
loop (see diagram). Tighten the tether strap
according to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop And
Attached To Outboard Tether Strap Loop
Installing Three Child Restraints:
1. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear
seat. Route the tether straps following the
directions for right and left seating positions,
above.
2. Attach both hooks to the center tether strap
loop, but do not tighten the straps yet.
3. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat.
Route the tether strap following the directions
for the center seating position, above.
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether
strap loop.
Outboard And Center Seating Positions Shown
5. Tighten the tether straps according to the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions, tightening
the right and left tether straps before the
center tether strap.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible
injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
position directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip
into the opening between the seatbacks as
you remove slack in the strap.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 376
SAFETY 377
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about
and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during
panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat
(if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts.
CONNECTED VEHICLES
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully
intercept information and private communications
without your consent. For further information, refer
to “Data Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement or “Onboard
Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity”
Ú page 142.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you
have questions regarding the seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
sion, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle
systems, including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
6
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 377
378 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check
when the ignition switch is first placed in
the ON/RUN position. If the light is either
not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an
authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the
bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has
been detected. It will stay on until the fault is
removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately.
See Ú page 342 for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should
be able to feel the air directed against the
windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if
your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the
operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals. Only use a floor mat that is securely
attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot
slip out of position and interfere with the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and
cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor
mat using the floor mat fasteners.
DO NOT install your floor mat upside
down or turn your floor mat over.
Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the
floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING
FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other floor mat.
NEVER install or stack an additional
floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot
be properly attached and secured to your
vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced,
only use a FCA approved floor mat for the
specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for interfer-
ence, with the vehicle properly parked with the
engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the
brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to
check for interference. If your floor mat inter-
feres with the operation of any pedal, or is not
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from
the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
WARNING!
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 378
SAFETY 379
(Continued)
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or
other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall.
Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect
sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the
lug nut/bolt torque for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should
be located and corrected immediately.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
into the driver’s side floor area when the
vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
change the position of the floor mat and may
cause interference with the accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to
the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are
secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress
each pedal to check for interference with the
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then
re-install the floor mats.
WARNING!
It is recommended to only use mild soap and
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
always check your floor mat has been properly
installed and is secured to your vehicle using
the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING!
6
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 379
380 SAFETY
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside
or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have an
authorized dealer inspect the complete exhaust
system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust
system each time the vehicle is raised for
lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to
move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/lift-
gate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running, adjust your heating or
cooling controls to force outside air into the
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent
carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a
closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in
a parked vehicle with the engine running for
an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in
an open area with the engine running for more
than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the
vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system
inspected every time the vehicle is raised.
Have any abnormal conditions repaired
promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 380
381
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on
the upper switch bank just below the radio.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a 12–inch
Uconnect display, the Hazard Warning Flashers
button is located above the display.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button with 12-inch display
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the button is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to
warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the
button a second time to turn off the Hazard
Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should
not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use only
when your vehicle is disabled or signaling a safety
hazard warning for other motorists.
When leaving the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate
even though the ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
NOTE:
With extended use the Hazard Warning Flashers
may wear down your battery.
7
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 381
382 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Buttons
If equipped, the overhead console contains an
ASSIST and a SOS button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber Ú page 490.
The ASSIST and SOS buttons will only function if
you are connected to an operable 4G (data)
network, which comes as a built in function.
Other Uconnect services will only be operable if
your SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active and
connected to an operable 4G (data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and
you’ll be connected to someone who can help.
Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle
you’re driving and its location. Additional fees
may apply for roadside assistance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle
support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for
Radio, Phone and NAV issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead
console.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a ten second delay before the
SOS Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator.
To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the
SOS call button on the overhead console or press
the cancellation button on the Device Screen.
Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green
LED light on the overhead console.
2. The LED lights located within the ASSIST and
SOS buttons on the overhead console will turn
green once a connection to a SOS operator has
been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a
SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system
may transmit the following important vehicle
information to a SOS operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a
SOS Call
The vehicle brand
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system to
determine if additional help is needed.
1 — ASSIST Button
2 — SOS Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 382
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 383
(Continued)
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open
a voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
mine if additional help is needed. Once the
SOS operator opens a voice connection with
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occur-
ring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call
system will attempt to remain connected
with the SOS operator until the SOS oper-
ator terminates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road
conditions or location), do not wait for voice
contact from an Emergency Services Agent. All
occupants should exit the vehicle immediately
and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable network and GPS antennas. You
could prevent operable network and GPS
signal reception, which can prevent your
vehicle from placing an emergency call.
An operable network and GPS signal reception
is required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add after-
market electrical equipment to the vehicle’s
electrical system. This may prevent your
vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an
emergency call. To avoid interference that can
cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile
radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the
antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE
LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON
(INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to fail
when you need it. You could be injured if the
air bag system is not there to help protect you.
WARNING!
7
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 383
384 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico
may not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any
of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The overhead console lights located within the
ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously illumi-
nate red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message: “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle
device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent
or stop the SOS Call system operation. These
include, but are not limited to, the following
factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware
are damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
4G (data) network and/or Global Positioning
Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
4G (data) network congestion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s 4G
(data) and GPS antennas. You could prevent 4G
(data) and GPS signal reception, which can
prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable 4G (data) network connection
and a GPS signal is required for the SOS Call
system to function properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
WARNING!
Ignoring the overhead console light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services.
If the overhead console light is illuminated,
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
Call system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns
on the air bag Warning Light on the instrument
panel if a malfunction in any part of the
system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning
Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service the Occupant Restraint Control system
immediately.
WARNING!
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 384
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 385
(Continued)
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that
can immediately connect you with help in the event
that your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to
your provided radio supplement for complete
information.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with an air suspension
system, there is a feature which allows the auto-
matic leveling to be disabled to assist with
changing a tire. This feature can be activated
through the Uconnect system Ú page 259.
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with Air Suspension, you
will need to enable Tire Jack Mode in the Uconnect
system Ú page 167 before changing the tire.
1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Shift the transmission into Park (P).
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of the jacking position.
For example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked Example
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when
the vehicle is being raised or lifted.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid the danger of
being hit when operating the jack or changing
the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on
you. You could be crushed. Never put any part
of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack.
If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take
it to a service center where it can be raised on
a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle
is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
WARNING!
7
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 385
386 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JACK LOCATION
The jack and tools are stored under the front
passenger seat.
REMOVAL OF JACK AND TOOLS
To access the jack and tools, you must remove the
plastic access cover located on the side of the
front passenger’s seat. To remove the cover, pull
the front part of the cover (closest to the front of
the seat) toward you to release a locking tab. Once
the front of the cover is loose, slide the cover
toward the front of the seat until it is free from the
seat frame.
Pull Jack Access Cover From Front
Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt
counterclockwise. After removing the wing bolt,
slide the assembly out from under the seat.
Jack And Tools
Release the tool bag straps from the jack and
remove tools from bag.
Jack And Tool Bag
There are two ways to assemble the tools:
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
1 — Lug Wrench
2 — Long Extension Without Spring Clip #2
3 — Long Extension With Spring Clip #3
4 — Long Extension With Spring Clip #4
5 — Short Extension #5
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 386
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 387
NOTE:
If the tailgate is lowered, adding the shorter
extension #5 to jack extension #4 will enable
lowering the spare tire without having to raise the
tailgate.
Assembled For Jack Operation
Assembled For Jack Operation
REMOVING THE SPARE TIRE
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to
jack up the truck. Attach the lug wrench to the
extension tubes with the curved angle facing
away from the vehicle.
2. Remove the protective cover over the access
hole for the winch mechanism by sliding the
cover upward.
Access Hole Cover Location
CAUTION!
The lug wrench can only be attached to
extension #2.
When attaching the tool to the winch mecha-
nism be sure the large flared end opening on
extension #4 is positioned correctly over the
winch mechanism adjusting nut.
Damage to the lug wrench, extensions and
winch mechanism may occur from improper
tool assembly.
1 — Lug Wrench
2 — Long Extension #2
3 — Long Extension #3
4 — Long Extension #4
5 — Short Extension #5
6 — Extension With Hook
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall
them in the original carrier and location. While
driving you may experience abrupt stopping,
rapid acceleration or sharp turns. A loose jack,
tools, bracket or other objects in the vehicle may
move around with force, resulting in serious
injury.
7
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 387
388 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Insert the extension tube through the access
hole between the lower tailgate and the top of
the fascia/bumper and into the winch
mechanism tube.
Winch Mechanism Tube
Inserting The Extension Tubes Into The Access Hole
4. Rotate the lug wrench handle counter-
clockwise until the spare tire is on the ground
with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it
out from under the vehicle.
Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle
5. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to
gain access to the spare tire retainer.
Pulling The Spare Tire Out
6. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give
clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the
cable.
7. Pull the retainer through the center of the
wheel.
Disengaging The Retainer
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the jack extension tube only. Use of an air
wrench or other power tools is not
recommended and can damage the winch.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 388
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 389
(Continued)
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
Jack Warning Label
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from
the stored location.
2. Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel nuts
(but do not remove), by turning them counter-
clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on
the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. Connect
the jack handle driver to the extension, then to
the lug wrench.
Assembled Jack And Tools
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before
raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel
to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle
on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is
on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be
raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with
the valve stem facing the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
WARNING!
7
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 389
390 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Placement for the front and rear jacking
locations are critical. See the following images
for proper jacking locations.
Jack / Extensions Placement
Front Jacking Location
When changing a front wheel, place the scis-
sor jack under the rear portion of the lower
control arm as shown. Access the front jacking
location from behind the front tire.
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Location
Operate the jack using the extension with jack
hook and the lug wrench. The extension tubes
may be used but are not required.
When changing a rear wheel, assemble the ex-
tension with jack hook to the jack and connect
the extension tubes. Access the rear jacking lo-
cation from behind the rear tire. Place the jack
under the Jack Lifting Point located on the rear
axle lower control arm bracket. Then locate the
slot in the jack lift plate onto the rear axle Jack
Lifting Point. Attach the extension with jack
hook extending to the rear of the vehicle.
Rear Lifting Point
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 390
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 391
Rear Jacking Location
Connect the long extensions to the lug wrench.
5. By rotating the lug wrench clockwise, raise the
vehicle until the wheel just clears the ground
surface.
6. Remove the lug nuts and pull the wheel off.
Install the spare wheel and lug nuts with the
cone shaped end of the lug nuts toward the
wheel. Hand tighten the lug nuts with the
vehicle lifted. To avoid the risk of forcing the
vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the lug
nuts until the vehicle has been completely
lowered.
7. Lower the vehicle to the ground and finish
tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench handle for increased leverage. Tighten
the lug nuts in a star pattern until each lug nut
has been tightened twice Ú page 476. If in
doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or at a service station.
8. If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel center
cap, install the cap and remove the wheel
blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum
wheel center caps on the spare wheel. This
may result in cap damage.
9. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow
the replaced tire, and secure the jack and tools
in the proper location.
10. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
TO STOW THE FLAT OR SPARE
1. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give
clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the
cable.
2. Position the wheel behind the rear fascia/
bumper facing outward. Push the end of the
winch’s cable, spring and steel sleeve through
the back of the road wheel. Making sure the
valve stem is facing the ground when the
wheel is stowed.
Reinstalling The Retainer
CAUTION!
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make
sure that the jack will not damage surrounding
truck parts and adjust the jack position as
required.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the
jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle
only enough to remove the tire.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop, could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
spare tire in the places provided.
7
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 391
392 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Remove the extension with the hook and
reattach the short extension #5 Ú page 386.
Attach the lug wrench to the extension tubes
with the curved angle facing away from the
vehicle. Insert the extension tubes through the
access hole between the lower tailgate and
the top of the fascia/bumper and into the
winch mechanism tube.
Reinstalling The Flat Or Spare Tire
4. Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise until
the wheel is drawn into place against the
underside of the vehicle. Continue to rotate
until you feel the winch mechanism slip, or
click three or four times. It cannot be
overtightened. Push against the tire several
times to ensure it is firmly in place.
Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle
NOTE:
Have the flat tire repaired or replaced immediately.
REINSTALLING THE JACK AND TOOLS
1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning
the jack turn-screw counterclockwise until the
jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tool bag. Make sure the
lug wrench is under the jack near the jack
turn-screw.
Jack And Tool Bag
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the jack extension tube only. Use of an air
wrench or other power tools is not
recommended and can damage the winch.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
spare tire in the places provided. Have the
deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 392
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 393
3. Secure the tool bag straps to the jack.
Jack And Tools Tied
4. Place the jack and tools in the storage position
holding the jack by the jack turn-screw, slip the
jack and tools under the seat so that the
bottom slot engages into the fastener on the
floor.
NOTE:
Ensure that the jack slides into the front hold
down location.
5. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the
floor pan. Reinstall the plastic cover.
Jack Hold Down Wing Bolt
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a
battery in another vehicle, or by using a portable
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be
dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the
procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer's operating instructions and
precautions.
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall
them in the original carrier and location. While
driving you may experience abrupt stopping,
rapid acceleration or sharp turns. A loose jack,
tools, bracket or other objects in the vehicle
may move around with force, resulting in
serious injury.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system voltage
greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery,
starter motor, alternator or electrical system
may occur.
7
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 393
394 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of
the engine compartment, behind the left headlight
assembly.
Positive (+) Battery Post Location
NOTE:
The positive battery post may be covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to
the positive battery post. Do not jump off fuses.
Only jump directly off positive post which has a
positive (+) symbol on or around the post.
Follow these steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK,
apply the parking brake and turn the
ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables’ reach, apply the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
4. Pull upward and remove the protective cover
over the positive (+) battery post.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the positive (+)
post of the discharged
vehicle.
NOTE:
Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off
positive post.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be
injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn
your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas
which is flammable and explosive. Keep open
flames or sparks away from the battery.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster
vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 394
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 395
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to a good engine ground. A
“ground” is an exposed metallic/unpainted
part of the engine, frame or chassis, such as
an accessory bracket or large bolt. The ground
must be away from the battery and the fuel
injection system.
Jump Starting Label
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the discon-
nection procedure.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the jumper
cable from the engine ground of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster
battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery, and
reinstall the protective cap.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and charging
system inspected at an authorized dealer.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel for
a Cap-Less Fuel System. The refueling funnel is
located under the passenger’s seat along with the
jack and tools. If refueling is necessary, while using
an approved gas can, insert the refueling funnel
into the filler neck opening. Take care to open both
flappers with the funnel to avoid spills.
Fuel Funnel Location
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting
electrical spark could cause the battery to
explode and could result in personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not connect jumper cable to any of the fuses
on the positive battery terminal. The resulting
electrical current will blow the fuse.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough without
engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
7
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 395
396 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on
the fuel door to break the ice buildup and
re-release the fuel door using the inside release
button. Do not pry on the door.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling:
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors.
A funnel is provided to allow emergency refueling
with a gas can.
See the following steps for refueling:
1. Retrieve funnel from under the passenger’s
front seat.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as
the fuel nozzle.
Inserting Funnel
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper
doors open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior
to putting back in the spare tire storage area.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be
serviced by an authorized dealer.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce
the potential for overheating by taking the
appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the
engine idle speed while preventing vehicle
motion with the brakes.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The
A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling
system and turning the A/C off can help remove
this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the heater
core to act as a supplement to the radiator
and aids in removing heat from the engine
cooling system.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or
the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place fuel
containers on the ground while filling.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 396
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 397
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as
a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is
available.
Follow these steps to activate the Manual Park
Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while
seated in the driver’s seat.
2. Apply the parking brake if possible.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, open
the Manual Park Release cover, which is
located to the lower left of the steering column.
Manual Park Release Access Cover
4. Behind the Manual Park Release access cover
is the orange tether strap. Pull the tether strap
out as far as it will go, then release it. The
tether and lever will remain outside of the trim
panel and the transmission should now be in
NEUTRAL, allowing the vehicle to be moved.
Manual Park Release Tether
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
If you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator
has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator or
coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
the pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear
continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake before activating the Manual Park
Release. In addition, you should be seated in the
driver’s seat with your foot firmly on the brake
pedal when activating the Manual Park Release.
Activating the Manual Park Release will allow
your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the
parking brake, or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on
an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious
injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.
7
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 397
398 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while
seated in the driver’s seat.
2. Pull the tether strap out again, then release it.
3. Allow the tether to retract with the lever back
to its original position.
Manual Park Release Tether
4. Verify the transmission is in PARK.
5. Confirm that the tether has retracted fully
and reinstall the access cover. If the access
cover cannot be reinstalled, repeat steps 1
through 4.
NOTE:
When the lever is locked in the released position
the access cover cannot be reinstalled.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Then shift
back and forth between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE
(R), while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the
least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning
the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or
less. Whenever the transmission remains in
NEUTRAL (N) for more than two seconds, you must
press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or
REVERSE.
Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF”
mode, before rocking the vehicle Ú page 321.
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF
button to restore “ESC On” mode.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
lead to transmission overheating and failure.
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every
five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize
overheating and reduce the risk of transmis-
sion failure during prolonged efforts to free a
stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or
drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too
fast may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not
spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)
while in gear (no transmission shifting
occurring).
CAUTION!
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 398
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 399
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a
disabled vehicle using a commercial towing
service.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable,
disabled vehicles may also be towed as described
on Ú page 231.
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with the Active-Level Four
Corner Air Suspension System must be placed in
Transport mode, before tying them down (from the
body) on a trailer or flatbed truck Ú page 167. If
the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode
(for example, engine will not run), tie-downs must
be fastened to the axles (not to the body). Failure
to follow these instructions may cause fault codes
to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down
tension.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and
tires. A tire could explode and injure someone.
Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping when
you are stuck and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The
Ground
Two-Wheel Drive
Models
Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions
Transmission in PARK
Transfer case in N (Neutral)
Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
7
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 399
400 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars
and other equipment designed for this purpose,
following equipment per FCA US LLC instructions.
Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar
or other towing device to main structural members
of the vehicle, not to fascia/bumpers or associated
brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's battery
is discharged, find Instructions on shifting the
transmission out of PARK in order to move the
vehicle Ú page 397.
TWO-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transmission is operable, the vehicle may be towed
(with front wheels on the ground) under the
following conditions:
The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N).
Instructions on shifting the transmission to
NEUTRAL (N) when the engine is OFF
Ú page 397.
The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h).
The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles
(48 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle
must be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) and
farther than 30 miles (48 km), tow with the rear
wheels OFF the ground. An acceptable method to
tow the vehicle on a flatbed are as follows:
Using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer to hold
the front wheels in the straight position with the
rear wheels raised and the front wheels ON the
ground.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck,
do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may
result from improper towing.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used
(if the remaining wheels are on the ground).
Internal damage to the transmission or
transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel
lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 400
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 401
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow
hooks.
Emergency Tow Hooks
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
takes effect in the event of an impact Ú page 361.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle Ú page 362.
WARNING!
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or
death.
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged,
causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue
a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow
hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing.
You could damage your vehicle.
7
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 401
402
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING — GASOLINE
ENGINE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change indicator
system will remind you that it is time to take your
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips,
trailer tow, and extremely hot or cold ambient
temperatures will influence when the “Oil Change
Required” message is displayed. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled
oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed
by someone other than an authorized dealer, the
message can be reset by referring to the steps
described under Instrument Cluster Display
Ú page 117.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet
customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear
or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irreg-
ular wear, even if it occurs before the oil
indicator system turns on.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder, and fill as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 402
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 403
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the Maintenance Plan for required maintenance. More frequent maintenance may be needed in severe conditions, such as dusty areas and very short
trip driving. In some extreme conditions, additional maintenance not specified in the maintenance schedule may be required.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change the oil and filter.
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses.
Inspect the engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system.
Inspect the engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions, replace the engine air cleaner, as necessary.
Inspect and replace the Evaporative System Fresh Air Filter as necessary; replacement may be more frequent if vehicle is operated in
extreme dusty conditions.
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 403
404 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends,
and replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle surfaces.
If gear oil leakage is suspected, check
the fluid level. If using your vehicle for
police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent
trailer towing, change axle fluid.
X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as
necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 404
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 405
Additional Maintenance
Replace cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
For severe dusty driving conditions,
inspect and replace the Evaporative
System Fresh Air Filter as necessary;
replacement may be more frequent
depending on conditions.
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Replace engine air cleaner. X X X X X
If equipped with Stop/Start, replace
accessory drive belt with OEM grade
Mopar® belt.
X
Replace spark plugs.
1
X
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 405
406 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
X X
Inspect the transfer case fluid, change for
any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or
frequent trailer towing.
X X
Change the transfer case fluid. X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only; yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have
any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 406
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 407
SCHEDULED SERVICING — DIESEL ENGINE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change indicator
system will remind you that it is time to take your
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips,
trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient
temperatures will influence when the “Oil Change
Required” message is displayed. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled
oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed
by someone other than an authorized dealer, the
message can be reset by referring to the steps
described under Instrument Cluster Display
Ú page 117.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or
12 months, whichever comes first.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check the tire inflation pressures and look for
unusual wear or damage.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder, and power steering, and
fill as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 407
408 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE PLAN — DIESEL FUEL UP TO B5 BIODIESEL
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules for required maintenance.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank.
Drain water from fuel filter assembly.
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions. Replace engine air cleaner, as necessary.
At Every Second Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change fuel filter.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 408
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 409
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. If gear oil leakage is
suspected, check the fluid level. If using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing change the axle
fluid.
X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Drain water from fuel filter assembly. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 409
410 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Replace fuel filter and drain water from the fuel filter assembly.
1
Fuel filter replacement intervals should be every second oil change and must not exceed
20,000 miles (32,000 km) if using diesel fuel up to B5.
Replace engine air cleaner. X X X X X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
Replace accessory drive belt(s). X
Inspect the transfer case fluid, change for any of the following:
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
X X
Change transfer case fluid. X
1. Under normal conditions the diesel fuel filter should be replaced every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) (every other oil change). If the vehicle is being used in severe operating conditions,
or in certain geographical areas of the country (Pennsylvania, New York, Ohio, Maryland, West Virginia, Arkansas, Oklahoma, Kansas, Iowa, Missouri and Nebraska) due to fuel
cleanliness issues, it’s recommended to replace the fuel filter every 10,000 miles (16,000 km).
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 410
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 411
ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE — B6 TO
B20 B
IODIESEL
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 8,000 miles (12,875 km) or six
months, whichever comes first when using
biodiesel blends greater than 5% (B5).
The owner is required to monitor mileage for
B6-B20 biodiesel, the automatic oil change
indicator system does not reflect the use of
biofuels.
Fuel filter change interval is maintained at every
second oil change. This is especially important
with biodiesel usage.
For more information on using biodiesel
Ú page 480.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around
a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equip-
ment. If you have any doubt about your ability
to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a
competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunc-
tion and effect vehicle handling and perfor-
mance. This could cause an accident.
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 411
412 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L ENGINE WITH STOP/START
1 — Motor Generator Unit Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap 6 — Battery
2 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap 7 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 412
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 413
5.7L ENGINE WITHOUT STOP/START
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 6 — Battery
2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 413
414 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
5.7L ENGINE WITH STOP/START
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 6 — Battery
2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 414
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 415
3.0L DIESEL ENGINE
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap 6 — Battery
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 415
416 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil
must be maintained at the correct level. Check the
oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel
stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is
about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine
is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low
end of the range and MAX at the high end of the
range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the
MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liter) of oil when the reading is
at the low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil
level to the high end of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and
the fluid level should be checked at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer
solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When
refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and
wipe the wiper blades clean. This will help blade
performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture
that meets or exceeds the temperature range of
your climate. This rating information can be found
on most washer fluid containers.
After the engine has warmed up, operate the
defroster for a few minutes to reduce the
possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on the
cold windshield. Windshield washer solution used
with water as directed on the container, aids
cleaning action, reduces the freezing point to avoid
line clogging, and is not harmful to paint or trim.
MAINTENANCE -FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free
battery. You will never have to add water, and
periodic maintenance is not required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This
could damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or
working around the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or
on skin, flush the area immediately with large
amounts of water Ú page 393.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not
use a booster battery or any other booster
source with an output greater than 12 Volts.
Do not allow cable clamps to touch each
other.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 416
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 417
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in
civil penalties being assessed against you.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection — Gasoline Engine
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluids
Ú page 483.
NOTE:
Hemi engines (5.7L) at times can tick right after
startup and then quiet down after approximately
30 seconds. This is normal and will not harm the
engine. This characteristic can be caused by short
drive cycles. For example, if the vehicle is started
then shut off after driving a short distance. Upon
restarting, you may experience a ticking sound.
Other causes could be if the vehicle is unused for
an extended period of time, incorrect oil, extended
oil changes or extended idling. If the engine
continues to tick or if the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) comes on, see the nearest authorized
dealer.
Engine Oil Selection — Diesel Engine
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluids
Ú page 483.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
hands after handling.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is attached
to the positive post and the negative cable is
attached to the negative post. Battery posts
are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and
are identified on the battery case. Cable
clamps should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is
in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery
cables before connecting the charger to the
battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide
starting voltage.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the pressures
generated by these machines is such that
complete protection against water ingress
cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper
equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle
to a competent mechanic.
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 417
418 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified
by the API. The manufacturer only recommends API
trademark oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies
0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40
and 5W-40 engine oil.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils,
only use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
correct API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity
grade numbers should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
the addition of any additives (other than leak
detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine
oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil
filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a
problem to the environment. Contact an
authorized dealer, service station or governmental
agency for advice on how and where used oil and
oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new
filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used
for replacement. The quality of replacement filters
varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar®
certified filters should be used.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 403.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified
filters should be used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection And
Replacement — Except G/T Model
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or
debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or debris
you should change your engine air cleaner filter.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as
the chemicals can damage your engine. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the
case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless
such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle
with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 418
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 419
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. With suitable tool fully loosen (six) fasteners
on the engine air cleaner filter cover.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access
the engine air cleaner filter.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the
housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the engine air cleaner
filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
housing assembly with the engine air cleaner
filter inspection surface facing downward.
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto
the housing assembly.
3. Tighten the fasteners (six) on the engine air
cleaner filter assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection And
Replacement — G/T Model
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or
debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or debris
you should clean your engine air cleaner filter per
the recommended procedure or replace it.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Release and remove the engine cover from
ball studs by lifting up on each side edge of
the engine cover.
Engine Cover
1 — Fasteners
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
1 — Engine Cover Ball Stud Location
2 — Engine Cover
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 419
420 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. With suitable tool fully loosen (four) fasteners
on the engine air cleaner filter cover.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter cover from
the engine air cleaner filter assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
4. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the
vehicle.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the engine air cleaner
filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter onto the
engine air cleaner filter assembly.
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto
the engine air cleaner filter assembly.
3. Tighten the fasteners (four) on the engine air
cleaner filter assembly.
4. Install the engine cover.
G/T AIR FILTER MAINTENANCE
Clean Engine Air Filter
The scheduled air filter cleaning interval is
30,000 miles (48,280 km), or if in a dusty
environment the engine air filter should be
checked periodically to ensure optimal air flow.
1. Spray the air filter with the recommended
Mopar® air filter cleaner or apply mild
dishwashing detergent and water and let sit
for at least 10 minutes to loosen dirt before
rinsing.
NOTE:
Never use strong detergents, high pressure, or
gasoline on the air filter.
2. Rinse the air filter with cool low-pressure water
applied from the inside (clean side) out in
order to flush the dirt out of the filter. Continue
to rinse the filter until all traces of the cleaner
have been removed.
NOTE:
It may be necessary to repeat steps 1 and 2 if the
air filter is not completely clean.
3. After rinsing the air filter, gently shake off the
excess water and allow air filter to dry
naturally.
NOTE:
Do not use forced air pressure as it may damage
the filtering capabilities of the filter’s microfibers
and also void its warranty.
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Fasteners
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 420
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 421
DRAINING FUEL/WATER SEPARATOR
F
ILTER — DIESEL ENGINE
The fuel/water separator filter housing is located
inside the frame rail, behind the left front wheel.
The best access to this water drain valve is from
under the vehicle.
If water is detected in the water separator while the
engine is running, or while the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN position, the Water In Fuel Indicator
Light will illuminate and an audible chime will be
heard. At this point, you should stop the engine
and drain the water from the filter housing.
Fuel Filter Assembly
If the Water In Fuel Indicator Light comes on and a
single chime is heard while you are driving, or with
the ignition in the ON position, there may be a
problem with your water separator wiring or
sensor. See an authorized dealer for service.
Upon proper draining of the water from the fuel
filter, the Water In Fuel Indicator Light will remain
illuminated for approximately 10 seconds. If the
water was drained while the engine was running,
the Water In Fuel Indicator Light may remain on for
approximately three minutes.
NOTE:
Care should be taken in disposing of used fluids
from your vehicle. Used fluids, indiscriminately
discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact an authorized dealer,
service station, or government agency for advice
on recycling programs and for where used fluids
and filters can be properly disposed of in your area.
Drain the fuel/water separator filter when the
Water In Fuel Indicator Light is ON. Within
10 minutes of vehicle shutdown, turn the filter
drain valve (located on the bottom of the filter
housing) counterclockwise to drain fuel/water,
then turn the ignition switch to the ON position,
and allow any accumulated water to drain. Leave
the drain valve open until all water and
contaminants have been removed. When clean
fuel is visible, close the drain valve by turning it
clockwise, and turn the ignition switch to OFF.
If more than two ounces or 60 milliliters of fuel
have been drained Ú page 422.
CAUTION!
Do not drain the fuel/water separator filter
when the engine is running.
Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appropriate
container.
1 — Water In Fuel Drain Valve
CAUTION!
If the Water In Fuel Indicator Light remains on,
DO NOT START the engine before you drain water
from the fuel filter to avoid engine damage.
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 421
422 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
UNDERBODY MOUNTED FUEL FILTER
R
EPLACEMENT — DIESEL ENGINE
NOTE:
Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manufac-
turer’s filtration and water separating require-
ments can severely impact fuel system life and reli-
ability. Under normal conditions the diesel fuel
filter should be replaced every 20,000 miles (every
other oil change). If the vehicle is being used in
severe operating conditions, or in certain
geographical areas of the country (Pennsylvania,
New York, Ohio, Maryland, West Virginia, Arkansas,
Oklahoma, Kansas, Iowa, Missouri and Nebraska)
due to fuel cleanliness issues, it’s recommended
to replace the fuel filter every 10,000 miles.
Fuel Filter Assembly
1. Turn engine off.
2. Place a drain pan under the fuel filter
assembly.
3. Open the water drain valve, and let any
accumulated water drain.
4. Close the water drain valve.
5. Remove bottom cover using a strap wrench.
Rotate counterclockwise for removal. Remove
the used o-ring and discard it.
6. Remove the used filter cartridge from the
housing and dispose of it according to your
local regulations.
7. Wipe the sealing surfaces of the lid and
housing clean.
8. Install a new o-ring into the ring groove on the
filter housing and lubricate with clean engine
oil.
PRIMING IF THE ENGINE HAS RUN OUT
O
F FUEL — DIESEL ENGINE
1. Add a substantial amount of fuel to the tank,
approximately 2 to 5 gal (8 L to 19 L).
2. Press ignition switch twice without your foot on
brake to put vehicle in ON/RUN position. This
will activate the in tank fuel pump for approxi-
mately 30 seconds. Repeat this process twice.
CAUTION!
Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appropriate
container.
Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a
new fuel filter. There is a possibility debris
could be introduced into the fuel filter during
this action. It is best to install the filter dry and
allow the in-tank lift pump to prime the fuel
system.
1 — Water In Fuel Drain Valve
2 — Fuel Filter Access
WARNING!
Do not open the high pressure fuel system with
the engine running. Engine operation causes
high fuel pressure. High pressure fuel spray can
cause serious injury or death.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 422
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 423
3. Start the engine using the “Normal Starting”
procedure Ú page 148.
NOTE:
The engine may run rough until the air is forced
from all the fuel lines.
NOTE:
Use of biodiesel mixture in excess of 20% can
negatively impact the fuel filter's ability to sepa-
rate water from the fuel, resulting in high pres-
sure fuel system corrosion or damage.
In addition, commercially available fuel addi-
tives are not necessary for the proper operation
of your diesel engine.
For extreme cold conditions, "Mopar® Premium
Diesel Fuel Treatment" is recommended to
assist with cold starting.
INTERVENTION REGENERATION
S
TRATEGY — MESSAGE PROCESS FLOW
(D
IESEL ENGINE)
This engine meets all required diesel engine
emissions standards. To achieve these emissions
standards, your vehicle is equipped with a
state-of-the-art engine and exhaust system. These
systems are seamlessly integrated into your
vehicle and managed by the Powertrain Control
Module (PCM). The PCM manages engine
combustion to allow the exhaust system’s catalyst
to trap and burn Particulate Matter (PM)
pollutants, with no input or interaction on your part.
Additionally, your vehicle has the ability to alert you
to additional maintenance required on your vehicle
or engine Ú page 117.
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) sometimes known
simply by the name of its active component,
UREA—is a key component of Selective Catalytic
Reduction (SCR) systems, which help diesel
vehicles meet stringent emission regulations.
DEF is a liquid reducing agent that reacts with
engine exhaust in the presence of a catalyst to
convert smog-forming Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) into
harmless nitrogen and water vapor.
Refer to Engine Fluids And Lubricants Ú page 483
for further information.
CAUTION!
The starter motor will engage for approximately
30 seconds at a time. Allow two minutes
between cranking intervals.
WARNING!
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending
agent. They can be unstable under certain
conditions and be hazardous or explosive when
mixed with diesel fuel.
CAUTION!
Due to lack of lubricants in alcohol or gasoline,
the use of these fuels can cause damage to the
fuel system.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn, such as grass or
leaves, and those items that come into contact
with your exhaust system. Do not park or
operate your vehicle in areas where your
exhaust system can contact anything that can
burn.
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 423
424 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized
dealer at the start of each warm season. This
service should include cleaning of the condenser
fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension
should also be checked at this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
Hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. It is recommended that
air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only the manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter Replacement
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 403.
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the
following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all
contents.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for your
air conditioning system. Some unapproved
refrigerants are flammable and can explode,
injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or
lubricants can cause the system to fail,
requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty
Information Book, for further warranty infor-
mation.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines
to be disconnected should be done by an
experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air filter
removed and the blower operating, the blower
can contact hands and may propel dirt and
debris into your eyes, resulting in personal injury.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 424
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 425
2. With the glove compartment door open,
remove the glove compartment tension tether
and tether clip by sliding the clip toward the
face of the glove compartment door. Lift the
clip out of glove compartment door and
release into dash panel.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
3. There are glove compartment travel stops on
both sides of the glove compartment door.
Push inward on both sides of the glove
compartment to release the glove
compartment travel stops.
Glove Compartment
4. Disengage the glove compartment door from
its hinges by opening the glove compartment
past the travel stop and pulling it toward you.
5. Remove the filter cover by pushing in on the
finger tabs on each end of the filter cover.
Filter Cover
Filter Cover Removal
1 — Glove Compartment Door
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
1 — Finger Tabs
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 425
426 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
6. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight
out of the housing.
Cabin Air Filter
7. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on the
filter pointing toward the floor. When installing
the filter cover, press on each end until you
hear an audible click.
8. Reinstall the glove compartment on
the hinges.
9. Pull the tension tether outward and reinstall
the glove compartment past the travel stops by
pushing in on the glove compartment sides.
Glove Compartment
NOTE:
Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
10. Reattach the glove compartment tension
tether by inserting the tether clip in the glove
compartment and sliding the clip away from
the face of the glove compartment door.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across the ribbed surface of the
belt from rib to rib, are considered normal. This is
not a reason to replace the belt. However, cracks
running along a rib (not across) are not normal.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result in
the need to replace it more often.
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive
belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could be
injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or around
a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equip-
ment. If you have any doubt about your ability
to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a
competent mechanic.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 426
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 427
Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has
excessive wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated
from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking
(cracks between two ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
Belt broken
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble
is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
NOTE:
Identify and correct problem before new belt is
installed.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a Stop/Start, belt
must be replaced with an OEM grade Mopar® belt.
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools, we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and
rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and
hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically. Use
a lithium-based grease, such as Mopar® Spray
White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to
protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit;
after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given
to hood latching components to ensure proper
function. When performing other underhood
services, the hood latch release mechanism, and
safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring.
Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant,
such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly
into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice
from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine
oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. If chat-
tering, marks, water lines or wet spots are present,
clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 427
428 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace
the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do
not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is
damaged.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off
of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full
up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, press the release tab on the wiper blade
and while holding the wiper arm with one
hand, slide the wiper blade down towards the
base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the
wiper blade from the wiper arm.
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the
tip of the wiper arm.
3. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the
wiper arm, latch engagement will be
accompanied by an audible click.
4. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm J Hook
3 — J Hook Retainer
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 428
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 429
(Continued)
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of
the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized
technician inspect the complete exhaust system
and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged,
deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
converter will not require maintenance. However, it
is important to keep the engine properly tuned to
assure proper catalyst operation and prevent
possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor
may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off
the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should
be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmis-
sion is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition
components disconnected or removed, such as
when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged
periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning
operating conditions.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
Carbon Monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon-
scious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing CO see Ú page 377.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such mate-
rials might be grass or leaves coming into
contact with your exhaust system. Do not park
or operate your vehicle in areas where your
exhaust system can contact anything that can
burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an
emissions control device and may seriously
reduce engine performance and cause
serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if
your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
condition. In the event of engine malfunction,
particularly involving engine misfire or other
apparent loss of performance, have your
vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera-
tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction
could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter
and vehicle.
WARNING!
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 429
430 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection
every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant is
dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be
drained, flushed and refilled with fresh coolant.
Check the front of the A/C condenser (if equipped)
or radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the A/C
condenser (if equipped) or the back of the radiator
core.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle
rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the
connection at the coolant recovery bottle and
radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.
DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly
could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any
coolant is needed to be added to the system
please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 403.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 483.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
engine coolant, may result in engine damage
and may decrease corrosion protection. OAT
engine coolant is different and should not be
mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is
introduced into the cooling system in an emer-
gency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust
inhibitors or anti-rust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant
and may plug the radiator.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your
radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from
under the hood, do not open the hood until the
radiator has had time to cool. Never open a
cooling system pressure cap when the radi-
ator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away
from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is
raised. The fan starts automatically and may
start at any time, whether the engine is
running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the igni-
tion to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the igni-
tion is in the ON mode.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 430
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 431
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of
propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not
recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be
used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
important that you use the same engine coolant
(OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout
the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032. When adding
engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact
an authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/engine
coolant solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection
in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in the
area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system, please contact an authorized
dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in
an emergency, have an authorized dealer drain,
flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that
engine coolant will return to the radiator from the
coolant expansion bottle/recovery tank (if
equipped).
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 431
432 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there
is any accumulation of foreign material on the
sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal.
Check with your local authorities to determine the
disposal rules for your community. To prevent
ingestion by animals or children, do not store
ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers
or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground,
clean up any ground spills immediately. If ingested,
seek emergency assistance immediately.
Checking Coolant Level — 3.6L Engine
The level of the coolant in the pressurized coolant
bottle should be between the “MIN” and “MAX”
range on the bottle when the engine is cold.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so
there is no need to remove the cap unless
checking for coolant freeze point or replacing
engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service
attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle
need only be checked once a month. When
additional engine coolant is needed to maintain
the proper level, it should be added to the coolant
bottle. Do not overfill.
Checking Coolant Level — 5.7L Engines
With the engine off and cold, the level of the engine
coolant should be between the ADD and SAFE
range on the dipstick.
To check the coolant level:
1. Open the coolant reservoir.
2. Lift and remove the plastic dipstick from the
reservoir neck.
Coolant Reservoir Dipstick
3. Check the coolant level on the dipstick.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so
there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless
checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze
point or replacing engine coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine
operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
WARNING!
Do not open a hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine.
Heat causes pressure to build up in the
cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 432
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 433
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilo-
meters of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment.
This is normally a result of moisture from rain,
snow, or high humidity accumulating on the
radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat
opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the
vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon
dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant needs to be added, the contents of the
coolant expansion bottle must also be protected
against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure
tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corro-
sion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep
the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever neces-
sary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat.
Other designs may result in unsatisfactory
engine cooling performance, poor gas mileage,
and increased emissions.
CHARGE AIR COOLER — INTER-COOLER
(D
IESEL ENGINE)
The charge air cooler is positioned in front of the
radiator and the air conditioner condenser. Air
enters the engine through the air cleaner and
passes through the turbocharger, where it is
pressurized. This pressurized air rapidly reaches
high temperature. The air is then directed through
a hose to the charge air cooler and through
another hose to the intake manifold of the engine.
This cooling process enables more efficient
burning of fuel resulting in fewer emissions.
To guarantee optimum performance of the system,
keep the surfaces of the charge air cooler,
condenser and radiator clean and free of debris.
Periodically check the hoses leading to and from
the charge air cooler for cracks or loose clamps
resulting in loss of pressure and reduced engine
performance.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all
brake system components should be inspected
periodically Ú page 403.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in
abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive
lining wear, and possible brake damage. You
would not have your full braking capacity in an
emergency.
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 433
434 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the brake master cylinder should
be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced, or
immediately if the Brake System Warning Light is
on. If necessary, add fluid to bring level within the
designated marks on the side of the reservoir of
the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top
of the master cylinder area before removing cap.
With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall
as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be
checked when pads are replaced. If the brake fluid
is abnormally low, check the system for leaks
Ú page 486.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
using any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do
not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake
fluid Ú page 486. Using the wrong type of
brake fluid can severely damage your brake
system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is
also identified on the original factory installed
hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep
the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at
all times. Brake fluid in an open container
absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a
lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil
unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This
could result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts,
causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake
fluid can also damage painted and vinyl
surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its
contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contam-
inate the brake fluid. Brake seal components
could be damaged, causing partial or
complete brake failure. This could result in a
collision.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage your
transmission components. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 434
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 435
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required, therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper
fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the
transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid
to ensure optimum transmission performance and
life. Use only the manufacturer recommended
transmission fluid Ú page 486. It is important to
maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level
using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes
should be used in any transmission; only the
approved lubricant should be used.
REAR AXLE AND 4X4 FRONT DRIVING
A
XLE FLUID LEVEL
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are
not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other
reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly
should be inspected. If gear oil leakage is
suspected inspect the fluid level Ú page 486. This
inspection should be made with the vehicle in a
level position.
The fluid level should be even with the bottom of
the fill hole (within 1/4 in (6.4 mm) of edge of hole)
for the front axle and rear axle.
Drain And Refill
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 403.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An authorized
dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid
level accurately.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or
torque converter shudder Ú page 486.
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 435
436 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Lubricant Selection
For further information Ú page 486.
NOTE:
The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
result in corrosion and possible failure of differ-
ential components. Operation of the vehicle in
water, as may be encountered in some off-highway
types of service, will require draining and refilling
the axle to avoid damage.
Limited-Slip Differentials
Rear axles equipped with a Limited Slip Differential
require that 5 oz. (148 ml) Mopar® Limited Slip
Additive be added to the gear lubricant
Ú page 486. The Mopar® Limited Slip Additive
should be added to the gear lubricant whenever a
fluid change is made to an axle equipped with a
Limited Slip Differential.
NOTE:
When refilling a limited slip differential axle which
requires a friction modification additive, the
additive should be added before the gear lubricant
to ensure proper additive fill.
TRANSFER CASE
Fluid Level Check
This fluid level can be checked by removing the
filler plug. The fluid level should be to the bottom
edge of the filler plug hole (or within 1/8 inch of the
bottom) with the vehicle in a level position.
Drain And Refill
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 403.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer recommended fluid
Ú page 486.
FUSES
General Information
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same
amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace
a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indi-
cated may result in a dangerous electrical
system overload. If a properly rated fuse
continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the
circuit that must be corrected. Never replace a
blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit
breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to use
proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 436
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 437
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may
result in vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
Underhood Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This center
contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and
circuit breakers. A description of each fuse and
component may be stamped on the inside cover,
otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is
stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to
the following chart.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems
(air bag system, braking system), power unit
systems (engine system, transmission
system) or steering system blows, contact an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
If it is necessary to wash the engine
compartment, take care not to directly hit the
fuse box, and the windshield wiper motors with
water.
WARNING!
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse
element
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
element (blown fuse)
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure
to do so may allow water to get into the power
distribution center and possibly result in an
electrical system failure.
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 437
438 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Underhood Power Distribution Center
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 438
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 439
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Pump Motor
F02 – – Spare
F03 – 5 Amp Tan MGU *
F04 – – Spare
F05 – – Spare
F06 – 10 Amp Red OUTPUT TO UPFITTER PDC *
F07 – – Spare
F08 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup
F09 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Stop / Turn Lamp Left
F10 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Stop / Turn Lamp Right
F11 – 15 Amp Blue ID/CLEARANCE LIGHTS *
F12 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Park Lamp
F13 – – Spare
F14 – 10 Amp Red AC Clutch
F15 – 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
F16 – – Spare *
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 439
440 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F17 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension
F18 – 15 Amp Blue AGS / Rear Axle Cooling Valve / Active Air Dam
F19 – – Spare
F20 – 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals *
F21 30 Amp Pink – Power Side Step *
F22 50 Amp Red – Air Module *
F23 – – Spare
F24 – 20 Amp Yellow TCM SBW
F25 40 Amp Green – MOD CBC 4 Exterior Lights 2
F26 50 Amp Red – ESP Module
F27 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper
F28 – 10 Amp Red PCM / ECM
F29 40 Amp Green – ESP Module
F30 – – Spare
F31 – – Spare
F32 20 Amp Blue – ECM / PCM
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 440
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 441
F33 30 Amp Pink – Brake Vacuum Pump
F34 – – Spare
F35 – 10 Amp Red
PCM / ECM / Power Pack Unit (PPU) Motor Generator Unit
(MGU) Wake Up * / EPS / ATMM / ESP
F36 – – Spare
F37 – 5 Amp Tan R / S Output to iPDC
F38 – 10 Amp Red DTCM / Active CL TEMP VLV
F39 – 15 Amp Blue MOD ATMM *
F40 40 Amp Green – Starter
F41 – 10 Amp Red IRCAM Heaters
F42 20 Amp Blue – AUX SWITCH #5 *
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow MGU Coolant Pump / ADCM *
F44 – 10 Amp Red Trailer Camera *
F45 – 10 Amp Red ADCM *
F46 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Heater *
F47 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 441
442 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F48 – – Spare
F49 30 Amp Pink – Htr Ctrl *
F50 20 Amp Blue – AUX SWITCH #6 *
F51 25 Amp White – FUEL PUMP MOTOR #1 *
F52 – – Spare
F53 – 10 Amp Red Supply / Purging Pump *
F54 –
15 Amp Blue PCM *
10 Amp Red Vapor Blocking Valve *
F55 – 15 Amp Blue RT HID Headlamp
F56 – – Spare
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F58 25 Amp White – FUEL PUMP MOTOR #2 *
F59 – 25 Amp Clear Injectors / IGN Coil / Glow Plug Module *
F60 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM / PCM / ACT Short Running Valve / LTR Coolant Pump *
F61 – 15 Amp Blue LT HID Headlamp
F62
60 Amp Blue
–
Glow Plug *
40 Amp Green LTR Coolant Pump *
F63 20 Amp Blue – NOx Sensor *
F64 – 10 Amp Red PM Sensor *
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 442
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 443
Internal Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located under the
driver’s side instrument panel. This center
contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and
circuit breakers.
Fuse Cover Panel
See the following steps for accessing the interior
fuses:
1. Locate and remove the two screws from the
lower portion of the fuse panel cover.
Fuse Panel Screw Locations
2. After removing the screws, gently pull both the
left and right side of the fuse panel cover to
release the fastener clips.
Interior Fuse Box Location
3. Reverse the procedure to reinstall the fuse
panel cover.
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 443
444 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Internal Fuse Chart
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Receptacle
F02 – – Spare
F03 – 20 Amp Yellow Module Seat Heater Front (Pass)
F04 – – Spare
F05 – 20 Amp Yellow Module PPU Cooling Fan *
F06 – – Spare
F07 40 Amp Green – Mod CBC 3 PWR Locks
F08 – – Spare
F09 – – Spare
F10 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower Motor
F11 – 5 Amp Tan
Output to Under-hood Power Distribution Center (UPDC) Run
Coil
F12 – 25 Amp Clear Mod Audio Amplifier / Active Noise Cancellation
F13 – 20 Amp Yellow Mod Seat Heater Front (Driver)
F14 – 15 Amp Blue Mod Seat Heater Front (Steering Wheel)
F15 A&B – – Spare
F16 – – Spare
F17 – 20 Amp Yellow LT Spot Lamp *
F18 30 Amp Pink – Motor Sunshade Sunroof
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 444
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 445
F19 – – Spare
F20 – 20 Amp Yellow Comfort Rear Seat Module (CRSM) (Heat Rear RT)
F21 – – Spare
F22 – – Spare
F23 – – Spare
F24 – 15 Amp Blue Mod RF Hub / Mod Ignition / Mod Cluster CNN
F25 40 Amp Green – Mod Integrated Trailer Brake
F26 – 15 Amp Blue
Mod Cluster CCN / Mod Cyber Security / Trailer Gateway
Module (360 Camera)
F27 – 5 Amp Tan Mod Cluster CCN / Mod SGW
F28 – 10 Amp Red Mod ORC
F29 – 20 Amp Yellow Mod CRSM (Heat Rear LT)
F30 30 Amp Pink – Mod DTCM / Mod Tailgate
F31 30 Amp Pink – Mod CBC 1 Interior Light
F32 – 20 Amp Yellow RT Spot Lamp *
F33 – 10 Amp Red
Assy Overhead Console / Switch 911 / Switch Assist /
Sunshade / HUD
F34 – 15 Amp Blue Frt & RR Ventilated Seat Motor
F35 – 10 Amp Red
Mod Inverter / Mtr Sunshade Sunroof / Mtr Dual Sunroof /
USB Charge Only
F36 40 Amp Green – Mod CBC 2 Exterior Light 1
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 445
446 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F37 – – Spare
F38 – – Spare
F39 – – Spare
F40 20 Amp Blue – Dome Pursuit Vehicle *
F41 A&B – 15 Amp Blue
Lumbar Support & Pass SW / Steering Column Control
Module / HVAC Control Module / ICS Switch Bank / Upper
Switch Bank
F42 A&B – 10 Amp Red
Mod Transfer Case Switch Module (TCSM) / SBW / Electric
Park Brake SW / Module TPM Trailer / Module Gateway Can-C
Trailer TPM / Seat LT & RT Vent
F43 A&B – 10 Amp Red Port Diagnostics / Front & Rear USB
F44 – 20 Amp Yellow
Radio / DCSD / Telematics Box Mod / Trailer Gateway Module
(360)
F45 30 Amp Pink – Mod Door MUX Driver
F46 30 Amp Pink – Mod Door MUX Passenger
F47 – – Spare
F48A – 10 Amp Red
Rearview Mirror / SW Window Passenger / Rear USB /
Wireless Charging Pad Mod
F49 – 15 Amp Blue
Mod CVPM / SNSR Blind Spot / HDLP Adaptive Front Lighting
Sensor (AFLS)
F50A – 10 Amp Red Battery PACK Control Mod (BPCM) *
F51 A&B – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 446
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 447
F52 20 Amp Blue – Direct Battery Feed *
F53 – 10 Amp Red
Trailer Reverse Steering Control / Trailer Steering Control
Knob
F54 A&B – 20 Amp Yellow
Power Outlet Center Seat Battery Feed Position
Power Outlet Center Seat Ignition Feed Position
F55 25 Amp White – Upfitter *
F56 30 Amp Pink – Mod Network Interface *
F57 20 Amp Blue – Direct Battery Feed *
F58 20 Amp Blue – Direct Battery Feed *
F60 50 Amp Red – Mod Inverter
F61 – – Spare
F62 A&B – 10 Amp Red
ITBM / Mod Occupant Class / Mod IAIR Suspension / Mod
HVAC / Snsr In car Temp / Integrated Radar Camera Mod
(IRCM) / Humidity Rain & Light Sensor (HRLS) / Parktronics
System Mod (PTS) / Gateway Can-C Trailer TPM Mod
F63 – – Spare
F64 – – Spare
F65 – 10 Amp Red Mod ORC
F66 – 10 Amp Red Run - Accessory Feed
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 447
448 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Circuit Breakers
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers. All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge
base. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Cavity Circuit Breaker Description
CB1 25 Amp
Driver Window SW Rear PWR Windows / Overhead
SW Rear Defrost
CB2 25 Amp Driver PWR Seat / Driver Seat Memory Mod
CB3 25 Amp
Passenger Power Seat / Passenger Seat Memory
Mod
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Overhead Console Lamps TS 212–9
Dome Lamp 7679
NOTE:
For lighted switches, see an authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 448
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 449
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Low Beam (Halogen Reflector Headlamp – If Equipped) H11LL
High Beam (Halogen Reflector Headlamp – If Equipped) 9005LL
Low & High Beam (LED Reflector Headlamp) LED
Low & High Beam (LED Projector Headlamp) LED
Turn Signal / Front Position (Halogen Reflector Headlamp – If Equipped) 7444NA
Turn Signal / Front Position (LED Headlamps) LED
Front Side Marker (Halogen Reflector Headlamp – If Equipped) W5W
Front Side Marker LED
Front Fog Lamps (Halogen Reflector Headlamp – If Equipped) H11LL
Front Fog Lamps LED
Side Indicators (Front And Side View Mirror – If Equipped) LED
Base Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp 7440LL/W21WLL
Premium Rear Tail/Turn/Backup and Stop Lamp LED
Base Backup Lamp 7440/W21W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) 921
Cargo Lamp 921
Rear License Plate Lamp LED
Base Turn Lamp 7440NA / WY21W
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 449
450 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
BASE QUAD: LOW BEAM HEADLAMP,
HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP, FRONT PARK
AND TURN — IF EQUIPPED
Low Beam
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative
battery cable.
3. Locate the low beam access cover, which can
be found on the back side of the headlamps.
Low Beam Headlight Cover
NOTE:
It may be necessary to remove/reposition Air
Cleaner Assembly to access passenger side
headlamp/side marker light bulbs.
4. Disengage the bulb access cover by rotating
counterclockwise.
5. Disconnect the internal lamp wiring harness
connector from the low beam bulb.
6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter
turn to unlock the bulb from the lamp.
7. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
8. Reverse the procedure for installation of new
bulb and covers.
High Beam
High Beam Headlight Cover
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
cable.
3. Locate the high beam access cover, which can
be found on the back side of the headlamps.
NOTE:
It may be necessary to remove/reposition Air
Cleaner Assembly to access passenger side
headlamp/side marker light bulbs.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching
it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact
other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will
result.
Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type
may overheat and cause damage to the lamp,
the bulb socket, or the lamp wiring.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 450
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 451
4. Reach behind the headlamp and disengage
the access cover by rotating counterclockwise.
5. Disconnect the internal lamp wiring harness
connector from the high beam bulb.
6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter
turn to unlock the bulb from the lamp.
7. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
8. Reverse the procedure for installation of new
bulb and cover.
Front Park And Turn
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
cable.
3. Locate the park and turn socket, which can be
found on the back side of the headlamps.
Park And Turn Socket
4. Reach behind the headlamp and unlock the
park and turn socket from the lamp by rotating
counterclockwise a quarter turn.
5. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
6. Separate the bulb from the socket without
twisting.
7. Reverse the procedure for installation of new
bulb and covers.
Side Marker Lamp
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
cable.
3. Locate the side marker lamp, which can be
found on the back side of the headlamps.
Side Marker Lamp
4. Disengage the side marker socket by rotating
counterclockwise a quarter turn.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching
it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact
other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will
result.
Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type
may overheat and cause damage to the lamp,
the bulb socket, or the lamp wiring.
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 451
452 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
5. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the
housing.
6. Separate the bulb from the socket without
twisting.
7. Reverse the procedure for installation of new
bulb and covers.
FOG LAMPS — IF EQUIPPED
Please see an authorized dealer for service on
LED and Halogen front fog lamps.
Halogen
See the following steps to replace:
1. Reach under and behind the front
fascia/bumper to access the back of the front
fog lamp housing.
2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness
connector from the fog lamp bulb.
Fog Lamp Bulb
3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter
turn to unlock the bulb from the housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
5. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and
cover.
REAR TAIL/STOP, TURN SIGNAL AND BACKUP
LAMPS
1. Remove the two screws and push pin
retainers that pass through the bed sheet
metal.
Tail Lamp Locations
2. Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward far
enough to unsnap the two receptacles on the
outboard side of the lamp housing from the
two plastic snap post retainers in the outer box
side panel.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
1 — Tail Lamp
2 — Fasteners
3 — Push - Pin Retainers
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 452
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 453
Tail Lamp Removal
3. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors
from the bulb socket.
Wiring Harness Connector
4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise a
quarter turn to unlock it from the housing.
5. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
6. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and
housing.
CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP (CHMSL)
WITH CARGO LAMP
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the four screws holding the housing/
lens to the body as shown.
CHMSL Mounting Screw Locations
2. Separate the connector holding the housing
and wiring harness to the body.
CHMSL Bulb Location
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 453
454 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. Turn the desired bulb socket a quarter turn
counterclockwise and remove the socket and
bulb from housing.
4. Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket.
Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
Inside Bulb: Center High Mounted Stop
Lamp
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs
and housing.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-
pean design standards. Tires designed to this
standard have the tire size molded into the side-
wall beginning with the section width. The letter
"P" is absent from this tire size designation.
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. The size designation for
LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high
pressure compact spare tires have the letter “T”
or “S” molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall.
Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contract
other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will
result.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera-
ture Grades
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 454
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 455
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading,
road conditions, and posted speed limits)
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 455
456 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The Tire Identification Number (TIN) may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls
will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 456
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 457
Tire Terminology And Definitions
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could
represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum
of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa
(kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure The manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
EXAMPLE:
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 457
458 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including
the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and
inflate to the recommended pressure for your
vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the
vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your
vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying
capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions,
tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified
on the Tire and Loading Information placard in
Vehicle Loading Ú page 215.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading,
and trailer towing Ú page 215.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 458
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 459
To determine the maximum loading conditions of
your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading
Information placard. The combined weight of
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue
weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and
there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as
shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
capacities of your vehicle with varying seating
configurations and number and size of occu-
pants. This table is for illustration purposes only
and may not be accurate for the seating and
load carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
865 lbs (392 kg).
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 459
460 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 460
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 461
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the
steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
uncomfortable ride.
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous.
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle
handling, and increase your stopping distance.
Use tires of the recommended load capacity for
your vehicle. Never overload them.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can
result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes
can cause damage that result in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to
drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 461
462 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's
side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgment when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated
even when they are underinflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change.
Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure
inside a garage, especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased
by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for
every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature
condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure
will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct
tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased
tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be
required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if
it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat
The damage is only on the tread section of your
tire (sidewall damage is not repairable)
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm)
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain
on your tires could cause them to fail. You could
have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle
loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 462
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 463
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
size and service description (Load Index and
Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor
as well as it is not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of
inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run
Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is
of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire
reaches the Run Flat mode it has limited driving
capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run Flat
tire is changed after driving with underinflated tire
condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it is
not designed to be reused when driven under Run
Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
The TPMS Sensor must be replaced after driving
the vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at
full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the
Run Flat mode.
For more information Ú page 336.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions,
do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping.
For further information Ú page 398.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires
should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the tire should be replaced.
For further information Ú page 464.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 463
464 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement
Distance driven
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating
of V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a
reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per
the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly
recommended
NOTE:
Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing
tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as
little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires
from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of
many characteristics. They should be inspected
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation
pressures. The manufacturer strongly
recommends that you use tires equivalent to the
originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed Ú page 463. Refer to the
Tire and Loading Information placard or the
Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation
of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for
your tire will be found on the original equipment
tire sidewall.
For more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire Ú page 455.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or
two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever
replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s
specifications match those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement
tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and
ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Failure to follow this warning can result in
sudden tire failure. You could lose control and
have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for your
vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved
tires and wheels may change suspension
dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpre-
dictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a
smaller load index could result in tire over-
loading and failure. You could lose control and
have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in
sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 464
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 465
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season tires.
All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S,
M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all
season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in
snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with
Summer tires, be aware these tires are not
designed for Winter or cold driving conditions.
Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient
temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads
are covered with ice or snow. For more
information, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the
tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow
tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified
by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire
sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original
equipment tires. Use snow tires only in
sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over
75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and
cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice,
skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces
may be poorer than that of non-studded tires.
Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local
laws should be checked before using these tire
types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
Ú page 223.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different
size may result in false speedometer and
odometer readings.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions.
You could lose vehicle control, resulting in
severe injury or death. Driving too fast for
conditions also creates the possibility of loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car
wash with a compact or limited use temporary
spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 465
466 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire
rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than one
compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any
given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description
example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump before
lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to
do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to
do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 466
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 467
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
not. This spare tire may have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire
needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label
located on the limited use spare wheel. This label
contains the driving limitations for this spare. This
tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to
maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion.
Wash wheels with the same soap solution
recommended for the body of the vehicle and
remember to always wash when the surfaces are
not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt
roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to
wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or
a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from
corroding and tarnishing.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive
more than the speed listed on the limited use
spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressures listed on your Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and
reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or
harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel
cleaners and automatic car washes may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar®
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 467
468 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.
Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome
Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for
aluminum or chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with
wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the
brakes to remove the water droplets from the
brake components. This activity will remove the
red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle
vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low
Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance,
the following snow traction devices are
recommended. Follow these recommendations to
guard against damage:
Snow traction device must be of proper size for
the tire, as recommended by the snow traction
device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use
with the snow traction device.
Please follow the table for the recommended
tire size, axle and snow traction device:
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives,
or polishing compounds. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
basis; this is all that is required to maintain
this finish.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 468
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 469
4x2 (2WD)
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(maximum projection beyond tire
profile or equivalent)
HFE
Tradesman
Bighorn Lonestar
Laramie
Rear
275/65R18
275/55R20
S Class
Longhorn
Sport
Limited
Rear 275/55R20 S Class
REBEL Not Chainable
4x4 (4WD)
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(maximum projection beyond tire
profile or equivalent)
Tradesman
Bighorn Lonestar
Laramie
Rear
275/65R18
275/55R20
S Class
Longhorn
Sport
Limited
Rear 275/55R20 S Class
REBEL Not Chainable
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 469
470 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, driving, and braking functions. For these
reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as
those on all season type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow
and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 403.
More frequent rotation is permissible if desired.
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should
be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward
cross” shown in the following diagram. This
rotation pattern does not apply to some directional
tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can cause
unpredictable handling. You could lose control
and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe
the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only traction
devices in good condition are used. Broken
devices can cause serious damage. Stop the
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further
use.
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
Autosock traction devices do not require
retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed of
the device manufacturer’s if it is less than
30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION!
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 470
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 471
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,
or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 471
472 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three
weeks, we recommend that you take the following
steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle's
battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes in the fresh air and high blower
setting. This will ensure adequate system lubri-
cation to minimize the possibility of compressor
damage when the system is started again.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that
make roads passable in snow and ice and those
that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during
other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in
your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your
vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on
which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold
weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody
protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the
corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal
of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible
to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must
be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to
clean the lenses.
Tri-Fold Soft Tonneau Cover Care
For cleaning and protecting the vinyl Tri-Fold
Tonneau cover, use Mopar® Whitewall & Vinyl Top
Cleaner and Mopar® Leather and Vinyl
Conditioner/Protectant.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or
a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar®
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not
scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out
the paint finish.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 472
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 473
Fascia/Bumper Care
The customer is responsible to clean and maintain
the chrome components of the vehicle. Wash away
road debris and salt using an automotive soap.
Fascia/bumpers should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their
luster and to prevent corrosion.
Your fascia/bumpers are susceptible to
deterioration caused by salt, sodium chloride,
magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and
other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Do not use harsh chemicals or
a stiff brush. They can stain or damage the
protective coating that helps keep them from
corroding and tarnishing.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage
at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be
kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protec-
tive coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon
as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
Spray-On Bedliner – If Equipped
During ownership, the shine and luster of the
Spray-On Bedliner can fade from oxidation, road
dirt, heavy-duty hauling and hard water stains.
Weathering and UV exposure will lead to fading.
To help maintain the appearance of your Spray-On
Bedliner, the manufacturer recommends you
periodically rinse all loose dirt from your truck bed
and clean your truck at least twice per year using
the Mopar® Spray-On Bedliner Conditioner
available at a local authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate-
rials such as steel wool or scouring powder
that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal
of paint and decals.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes, or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the bumper’s protec-
tive finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar® Chrome Cleaner, or equivalent
is recommended.
Avoid products or automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions, strong alkaline additives,
or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket cleaners
and automatic car washes may damage the
bumper’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar®
Chrome Cleaner, or equivalent is recom-
mended.
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 473
474 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
To Help Maintain The Appearance Of Your
Spray-On Bedliner
1. Rinse your truck bed out with water to remove
any loose dirt and debris.
2. Mix a mild soap or detergent with water. Then
apply solution with a soft cloth or brush.
3. Rinse bedliner with water.
4. Once dry, apply a small amount of Mopar®
Spray-On Bedliner Conditioner to a moist towel
or sponge and wipe over the entire surface of
the truck bedliner.
Spray-On Bedliners are chemically-resistant to
many different types of chemicals (including
gasoline, oil, hydraulic fluids) for short periods of
time. If a spill occurs on your Spray-On Bedliner,
rinse the truck out as soon as possible to avoid
permanent damage.
Repairing The Spray-On Bedliner
While extremely tough, it is possible to damage a
Spray-On Bedliner. One common condition is when
loading a heavy pallet and dragging that pallet
across the floor of the bed. If a nail or sharp point
is exposed under the weight of the pallet a scratch
or tear is possible. While not covered by your new
vehicle warranty, a cosmetic fix to cover the metal
exposed by the scratch is required. To repair a tear
or gouge, follow the directions provided in the
Mopar® Quick Repair Kit.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery
and carpeting.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure —
If Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
Remove as much of the stain as possible by
blotting with a clean, dry towel.
Blot any remaining stain with a clean,
damp towel.
For tough stains, apply Mopar® Total Clean, or
a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and
remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
For grease stains, apply Mopar® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap
residue.
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form
of protectants on Stain Repel products.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the
fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution
or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from
the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace
the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
NOTE:
If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper turning
loop for soiling. If soiling is present, clean with a
wet soft cloth until all residue is removed.
WARNING!
Do not use silicon-based protection products to
clean your bedliner. Silicon-based products can
become slippery and may result in personal
injury.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and
if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 474
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 475
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning
the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching
the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol content
or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small
particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage
the leather upholstery and should be removed
promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be
removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar® Total
Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not
use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,
detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is
designed for easy cleaning, and the manufacturer
recommends Mopar® Total Clean leather cleaner
applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never
use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning the inside rear window equipped with
electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp
instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner
on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not
spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision,
or if you have questions regarding seat belt or
retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an
authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA
Certified Collision Care Program facility for
inspection.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repel-
lents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the
plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the
interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe
away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather
upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may
result.
8
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 475
476
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is found on the left front corner of the
instrument panel, visible through the windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
If power assist is lost for any reason (for example,
repeated brake applications with the engine off),
the brakes will still function. However, you will
experience a substantial increase in braking effort
to stop the vehicle.
If either the front or rear hydraulic systems lose
normal braking capability, the remaining system
will still function with some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. This will be evident by increased
pedal travel during application, greater pedal force
required to slow or stop, and the Brake Warning
Light and the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light will activate during brake use.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and
reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts
should be torqued using a properly calibrated
torque wrench using a six-sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil
before tightening.
NOTE:
Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do not
substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Torque
Lug Nut/
Bolt Type
**Lug
Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
130 Ft-Lb
(176 N·m)
Cone
M14 x
1.50
22 mm
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 476
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 477
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt
(do not insert it halfway).
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
Four, Five, And Six Lug Nuts/Bolts Torque Pattern
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINE
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use of
gasoline with a lower than recommended octane
number can cause engine failure and may void or
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as
hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand of
gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
3.6L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater
than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
optimum fuel economy and performance
when using high quality unleaded regular
gasoline having a posted octane number of 87 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
higher octane premium gasoline is not required, as
it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline
in these engines.
5.7L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater
than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and
performance when using high-quality
unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to
89 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
89 octane plus gasoline is recommended for
optimum performance and fuel economy.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner-burning gasoline referred to as
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline
contains oxygenates and are specifically blended
to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will
provide improved performance and durability of
engine and fuel system components.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow
this warning may result in personal injury.
9
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 477
478 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents,
corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce
emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to
further aide in minimizing engine and
fuel system deposits. When available,
the usage of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is
recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list
of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials
intended for gum and varnish removal may contain
active solvents or similar ingredients. These can
harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
GASOLINE /OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with
gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of gasoline with higher ethanol content may void
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion.
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane
(LP) may result in damage to the engine,
emissions, and fuel system components. Problems
that result from running CNG or LP are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol,
or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems, damage critical fuel
system components, cause emissions to exceed
the applicable standard, and/or cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please
observe pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 478
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 479
(Continued)
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
M
ANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) I N
G
ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive
that is blended into some gasoline to increase
octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no
performance advantage beyond gasoline of the
same octane number without MMT. Gasoline
blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that
gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The
MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on
the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask the
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE
Federal law requires that you must fuel this vehicle
with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel
(15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of
Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur
maximum) to avoid damage to the emissions
control system.
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable
supplier in your vehicle. For most year-round
service, No. 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM (formerly
known as the American Society for Testing and
Materials) specification D-975 Grade S15 will
provide good performance. If the vehicle is
exposed to extreme cold (below 20°F or -7°C), or
is required to operate at colder-than-normal
conditions for prolonged periods, use Climatized
Number 2 diesel fuel or dilute the Number 2 diesel
fuel with 50% Number 1 diesel fuel. This will
provide better protection from fuel gelling or
wax-plugging of the fuel filters.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair
engine performance and damage the emis-
sions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent
burning odor or some light smoke, your engine
may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may
require immediate service. Contact an autho-
rized dealer for service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recom-
mended. Most of these products contain high
concentrations of methanol. Fuel system
damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
tives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending
agent. They can be unstable under certain
conditions and hazardous or explosive when
mixed with diesel fuel.
9
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 479
480 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water. To
prevent fuel system trouble, drain the
accumulated water from the fuel/water separator
filter using the fuel/water separator drain provided
on the fuel filter housing. If you buy good quality
fuel and follow the cold weather advice above, fuel
conditioners should not be required in your vehicle.
If available in your area, a high cetane “premium”
diesel fuel may offer improved cold-starting and
warm-up performance.
DIESEL FUEL SPECIFICATIONS
This diesel engine has been developed to take
advantage of the high energy content and
generally lower cost Number 2 Ultra Low Sulfur
diesel fuel or Number 2 Ultra Low Sulfur Climatized
diesel fuels.
NOTE:
If you accidentally fill the fuel tank with gasoline
or DEF on your diesel vehicle, do not start the
engine. Damage to the engine and fuel system
could occur. Please call an authorized dealer for
service.
A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting
ASTM specification D-975 may be used with
your diesel engine without any adjustments to
regular service schedules.
Commercially available fuel additives are not
necessary for the proper operation of your
diesel engine.
Number 1 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel should
only be used where extended arctic conditions
(-10°F or -23°C) exist.
BIODIESEL FUEL REQUIREMENTS
A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting ASTM
specification D975 is recommended for use with
your diesel engine. If frequent operation with
Biodiesel blends that are between 6% and 20%
(B6–B20) is desired, the maintenance schedule is
subject to shorter intervals.
The oil and filter change along with fuel filter
replacement is subject to shorter intervals when
operating your engine on biodiesel greater than
5%. Do not use biodiesel greater than 20%.
For regular use of biodiesel blends between
6% and 20% (B6–B20) it is important that you
understand and comply with these requirements.
For further direction Ú page 411.
Biodiesel is a fuel produced from renewable
resources typically derived from animal fat,
rapeseed oil (Rapeseed Methyl Ester (RME) base),
or soybean oil (Soy Methyl Ester (SME or SOME)
base).
Biodiesel fuel has inherent limitations which
require that you understand and adhere to the
following requirements if you use blends of
Biodiesel between 6% and 20% (B6–B20). There
are no unique restrictions for the use of B5.
CAUTION!
If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on,
DO NOT START engine before you drain the water
from the fuel filter(s) to avoid engine damage
Ú page 421.
CAUTION!
Failure to comply with Oil Change requirements
for vehicles operating on biodiesel blends
between 6% and 20% (B6–B20) will result in
premature engine wear. Such wear is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Use of blends greater than 20% is not approved.
Use of blends greater than 20% can result in
engine damage. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 480
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 481
Biodiesel Fuel Properties — Low Ambient
Temperatures
Biodiesel fuel may gel or solidify at low ambient
temperatures, which may pose problems for both
storage and operation. Precautions can be
necessary at low ambient temperatures, such as
storing the fuel in a heated building or a heated
storage tank, or using cold temperature additives.
Fuel Quality — Must Comply With ASTM
Standards
The quality of Biodiesel fuel may vary widely. Only
fuel produced by a BQ9000 supplier to the
following specifications may be blended to meet
Biodiesel blend B6 – B20 fuel meeting ASTM
specification D-7467:
Petrodiesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D-975
and Biodiesel fuel (B100) meeting ASTM
specification D-6751
Fuel Oxidation Stability — Must Use Fuel
Within Six Months Of Manufacture
Biodiesel fuel has poor oxidation stability which
can result in long term storage problems. Fuel
produced to approved ASTM standards, if stored
properly, provides for protection against fuel
oxidation for up to six months.
Fuel Water Separation — Must Use
Mopar® Approved Fuel Filter Elements
Biodiesel fuel has a natural affinity to water and
water accelerates microbial growth. Your Mopar®
filtration system is designed to provide adequate
fuel water separation capabilities.
Fuel In Oil Dilution — Must Adhere To
Required Oil Change Interval
Fuel dilution of lubricating oil has been observed
with the use of Biodiesel fuel. Fuel in oil must not
exceed 5%. To ensure this limit is met your oil
change interval must be maintained within the
suggested schedule. The regular use of biodiesel
between 6% and 20% requires intervals shorter
than the outlined 10,000 miles (16,100 km) and
must not exceed the suggested schedule.
When routinely operating on biodiesel between
6% and 20%, oil and filter replacement intervals
must not exceed 8,000 miles (12,900 km) or six
months, which ever comes first.
Biodiesel Fuel Filter Change Intervals
The use of biodiesel requires more frequent fuel
filter change intervals. When operating on
biodiesel between 6% and 20%, fuel filter
replacement intervals should be every second oil
change, and must not exceed 16,000 miles
(25,750 km).
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (12,875 km) or six
months, if regular operation occurs with 6% - 20%
biodiesel blends. Under no circumstances should
fuel filter replacement intervals exceed every
second oil change and must not exceed
16,000 miles (25,750 km), if regular operation
occurs with 6% - 20% biodiesel blends. Failure to
comply with these oil change and fuel filter require-
ments for vehicles operating on biodiesel blends
up to B20 may result in premature engine wear.
Such wear is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. The engine may suffer severe
damage if operated with concentrations of
biodiesel higher than 20%.
CAUTION!
In the event that the vehicle is filled with
biodiesel and not used for more than a month,
the fuel should either be used up by driving (up
to quarter tank) and filled with standard diesel
blends with less than 5% that is normally
available. This will help prevent the fuel filter
clogging and potential damage to the fuel
injection system due to degraded biodiesel,
which is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
9
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 481
482 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
1500 Regular Cab Shortbed/Crew Quad Cab Models 23 Gallons 87 Liters
1500 Regular Cab Shortbed/Crew Quad Cab Models 26 Gallons 98 Liters
1500 Regular Cab Longbed/Crew Quad Cab Models (Optional) 33 Gallons 121 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
5.7L Engine 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System
3.6L Engine 13.7 Quarts 13 Liters
3.6L Motor Generator Unit 1.8 Quarts 1.7 Liters
5.7L Engine 18.3 Quarts 17.3 Liters
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.0L Turbo Diesel Engine 26 Gallons 98.5 Liters
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank
Tradesman/Rebel Models 5.14 Gallons 19.5 Liters
All Other Models 5.74 Gallons 21.7 Liters
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 482
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 483
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine Oil With Filter
3.0L Turbo Diesel Engine 8.5 Quarts 8.0 Liters
Cooling System
3.0L Turbo Diesel Engine 11.6 Quarts 11 Liters
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Gasoline Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Motor Generator Unit – 3.6L Engine (If Equipped)
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil – 3.6L & 5.7L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which
meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395.
Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the
API Starburst trademark Ú page 418.
Gasoline Engine Oil Filter
We recommend using a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter
is unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter
Performance Requirements.
US Metric
9
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 483
484 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% ethanol (Do not use E-85).
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15%
ethanol (Do not use E-85).
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Diesel Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology).
Engine Oil — 3.0L Turbo
Diesel Engine
We recommend using 5W-40 synthetic engine oil such as Mopar® that meets the manufacturer Material Standard MS-12991
and the API SP engine oil category is required.
Diesel Engine Oil Filter
We recommend using Mopar® engine oil filters. Using an oil filter that does not meet the manufacturer’s filtration
requirements can severely impact engine life and reliability.
Fuel Filters — 3.0L Turbo
Diesel Engine
We recommend using Mopar® fuel filter. Must meet 3 micron rating. Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manufacturer’s
filtration and water separating requirements can severely impact fuel system life and reliability. Under normal conditions the
diesel fuel filter should be replaced every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) (every other oil change). If the vehicle is being used in
severe operating conditions, or in certain geographical areas of the country (Pennsylvania, New York, Ohio, Maryland, West
Virginia, Arkansas, Oklahoma, Kansas, Iowa, Missouri and Nebraska) due to fuel cleanliness issues, it’s recommended to
replace the fuel filter every 10,000 miles (16,000 km).
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 484
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 485
NOTE:
If Climatized or Number 1 ULSD fuel is not available, and you are operating below 20°F (-6°C), in sustained arctic conditions, Mopar® Premium Diesel Fuel
Treatment (or equivalent) is recommended to avoid gelling.
Fuel Selection — 3.0L Turbo
Diesel Engine
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle. Federal law requires that you must fuel this vehicle with
Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel
(500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage to the emissions control system.
For most year-round service, Number 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D-975 Grade S15 will provide good
performance. We recommend you use a blend of up to 5% biodiesel, meeting ASTM specification D-975 with your diesel engine.
This vehicle is compatible with biodiesel blends greater than 5% but no greater than 20% biodiesel meeting ASTM
specification D-7467 provided the shortened maintenance intervals are followed as directed.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Mopar® Diesel Exhaust Fluid (API Certified) (DEF) or equivalent that has been API Certified to the ISO 22241 standard. Use of
fluids not API Certified to ISO 22241 may result in system damage.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Tech-
nology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
9
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 485
486 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case – 48-11 Active On-Demand 2–speed Transfer Case
(With 4WD AUTO)
We recommend using Mobil Fluid LT.
Transfer Case – 48-12 Part Time 2–Speed Transfer Case
(Without 4WD AUTO)
We recommend using Shell Spirax S2 ATF A389.
Front Axle We recommend using Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
Rear Axle (3.21/3.55)
We recommend using Mopar® Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-90
(MS-A0160). Limited-Slip Rear Axles require the addition of 5 oz. (148 ml)
Mopar® Limited Slip Additive (MS-10111).
Rear Axle (3.92)
We recommend using Mopar® Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-140
(MS-8985). Limited-Slip Rear Axles require the addition of 5 oz. (148 ml)
Mopar® Limited Slip Additive (MS-10111).
Max Tow Rear Axle (3.92) We recommend using Dana SAE 80W90 Axle Lubricant.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1709.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 486
487
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the
service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your
vehicle's service history. This can often provide a
clue to the current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an
accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the items
in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you
may obtain a rental vehicle (additional charges
may apply). If you need a rental, it is advisable to
make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be
happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your
vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you
get prompt and high quality service. FCA US LLC's
authorized dealers have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the
latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason
you are still not satisfied, talk to the general
manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They
want to know if you need assistance. If an
authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact FCA US LLC's Customer
Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer
center should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and
office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC C USTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (866) 726-4636
FCA C ANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French
10
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 487
488 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D.F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (866) 726-4636
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties,
FCA US LLC has installed special TDD (Telecommu-
nication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its
customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired
customer, who has access to a TDD or a
conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United
States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by
dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs relay
service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers,
dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay
Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of
unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle
Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended
protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed
by FCA US LLC to provide additional protection
beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you purchased a
Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receive
Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in
the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about the service
contract, call FCA US LLC's Service Contract
National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001
English / (800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after
FCA US LLC’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
ensure that you are absolutely delighted with the
ownership experience.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain, or
emit, chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 488
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 489
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to
this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.mopar.com/om for further information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties
applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.owners.mopar.ca/en for further
information.
For French, refer to
www.owners.mopar.ca/fr for
further information.
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories
and factory filled fluids are available from an
authorized dealer. They are recommended for your
vehicle to keep it operating at its best and maintain
its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON , D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
10
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 489
490 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either
the website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These
manuals make it easy to find and fix problems on
computer-controlled vehicle systems and features.
They show exactly how to find and correct
problems, using step-by-step troubleshooting and
drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and
a complete list of all tools and equipment.
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with
the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA
vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through
Archway at:
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 490
491
INDEX
A
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection .....................426
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(Cruise Control) .................................... 178 , 180
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............431
Adding Fuel .......................................... 210 , 212
Additives, Fuel ...............................................478
Adjust
Down ...........................................................39
Forward ....................................................... 39
Rearward..................................................... 39
Up................................................................ 39
Adjustable Pedals ............................................ 45
Advance Phone Connectivity .........................287
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation ......................................352
Air Bag Warning Light ...................... 350 , 353
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 361, 401
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................401
Front Air Bag .............................................353
If Deployment Occurs ................................360
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................358
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............362
Maintenance ............................................ 362
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ............. 351
Transporting Pets ..................................... 377
Air Bag Light................................131 , 350, 378
Air Cleaner, Engine
(Engine Air Cleaner Filter)
............................. 418
Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 424
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ........................... 424
Air Conditioner System ................................. 424
Air Conditioning .........................................64 , 67
Air Conditioning Filter ..............................70 , 424
Air Conditioning System ...................................69
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................70
Air Filter ............................................... 418 , 420
Air Pressure
Tires ......................................................... 462
Air Suspension ..................................... 167 , 171
Alarm
Security Alarm ....................................28 , 134
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle.........................................................13
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 430 , 482
Disposal ................................................... 432
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 319
Anti-Lock Warning Light ................................ 135
Assist, Hill Start ............................................. 325
Audio Settings ............................................... 275
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 237
Auto Down Power Windows ..............................82
Automatic Door Locks ......................................33
Automatic Headlights .......................................57
Automatic High Beams .....................................56
Automatic Tailgate Release .............................88
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..............69
Automatic Transmission .......................157 , 435
Adding Fluid .............................................. 435
Fluid And Filter Change ............................. 435
Fluid Change ............................................. 435
Fluid Level Check ............................. 434 , 435
Fluid Type ........................................435 , 486
Special Additives ...................................... 434
Automatic Transmission Limp
Home Mode .................................................. 160
AutoPark ....................................................... 146
AUX Camera .................................................. 207
Auxiliary Driving Systems .............................. 327
Axle Fluid..............................................435 , 486
Axle Locker System ....................................... 174
Axle Lubrication ............................................ 435
11
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 491
492
B
Back-Up Camera
............................................202
Battery ................................................. 132 , 416
Charging System Light ...............................132
Keyless Key Fob Replacement .................... 21
Battery Saver Feature ...................................... 59
Bed Divider ...................................................... 99
Bed Step .......................................................... 92
Bedliner .........................................................473
Belts, Seat .....................................................377
Blind Spot Monitoring ....................................327
Bluetooth
Connecting To A Particular Mobile
Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing
.....283
Body Builders Guide ........................................ 11
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................427
Bodywork .......................................................472
B-Pillar Location .............................................458
Brake Assist System ......................................320
Brake Control System ....................................320
Brake Fluid .......................................... 434 , 486
Brake System ...................................... 433 , 476
Fluid Check ...............................................434
Master Cylinder .........................................434
Parking ......................................................153
Warning Light ............................................132
Brake/Transmission Interlock .......................157
Bulb Replacement .........................................448
Bulbs, Light .......................................... 379 , 448
C
Camera ......................................................... 202
Camera, AUX ................................................. 207
Camera, Rear ................................................ 202
Camera, Surround View ................................ 204
Camera, Trailer 360 ...................................... 207
Capacities, Fuel ............................................ 482
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ............................................... 412
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ..................... 431
Car Washes................................................... 472
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............................ 380
Care And Maintenance ................................. 472
Cargo Light.......................................................58
CD................................................................. 277
Cellular Phone .............................................. 309
Center High Mounted Stop Light ................... 453
Center Seat Storage Compartment ..................72
Charge Air Cooler .......................................... 433
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................................... 455
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) ......................... 143
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 377
Checks, Safety .............................................. 377
Child Restraint .............................................. 363
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ........................................... 366
Child Seat Installation ..................... 372 , 374
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 371
Infant And Child Restraints ....................... 365
Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............. 370
Lower Anchors And Tethers
For Children
.......................................... 368
Older Children And Child Restraints .......... 366
Seating Positions ...................................... 367
Clean Air Gasoline ......................................... 477
Cleaning
Wheels
...................................................... 467
Climate Control ................................................64
Automatic ....................................................64
Manual ........................................................67
Cold Weather Operation ................................ 149
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 466
Connected Services ...................................... 289
Connected Services FAQ ............................... 304
Connected Services Features ....................... 292
Connected Services, Getting Started ............ 291
Connected Services, Introduction ................. 289
Contract, Service ........................................... 488
Controls ........................................................ 269
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 431
Cooling System ............................................. 430
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 431
Coolant Level ................................... 430 , 432
Cooling Capacity ....................................... 482
Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 432
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 430
Inspection ................................................. 432
Points To Remember ................................ 433
Pressure Cap ............................................ 431
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 492
493
Radiator Cap
.............................................431
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze)
........................ 430 , 482, 483
Corrosion Protection ......................................472
Cruise Control
Accel/Decel
...............................................179
Cancel .......................................................180
Resume .....................................................180
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ............ 178 , 180
Cruise Light ...................................................141
Customer Assistance .....................................487
Cybersecurity .................................................237
D
Daytime Running Lights
................................... 56
Dealer Service ...............................................417
Defroster, Windshield ......................64 , 67, 378
Deleting A Phone ...........................................283
Diagnostic System, Onboard .........................142
Diesel Exhaust Fluid ......................................213
Adding .......................................................213
Fill Procedure ............................................213
Storage......................................................213
Diesel Fuel .....................................................479
Diesel Fuel Requirements .............................479
Bulk Storage Of .........................................212
Diesel Fuel System, Re-Priming .....................422
Differential, Limited Slip ................................175
Dimmer Control Switch .................................... 61
Disable Vehicle Towing ..................................399
Disc Drive ..................................................... 277
Disconnecting ............................................... 283
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...................... 432
Disturb .......................................................... 286
Door Ajar .............................................. 132 , 134
Door Ajar Light ..................................... 132 , 134
Door Locks
Automatic ....................................................33
Doors ...............................................................29
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter ............ 421
Driver Memory Presets ................................. 275
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ......................................36
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water
.................................... 235
Driving Tips ................................................... 235
Dual Rear Wheels ......................................... 476
E
Electric Brake Control System ....................... 320
Anti-Lock Brake System ............................ 319
Electronic Roll Mitigation ................. 321 , 326
Electric Parking Brake ................................... 153
Electric Power Steering ................................. 175
Electrical Power Outlets ...................................78
Electronic Range Select (ERS) ...................... 160
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................. 321
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ...... 133
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case .... 162, 164
Emergency Braking ....................................... 336
Emergency Gas Can Refueling ...................... 395
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ..................... 398
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 381
Jump Starting ........................................... 393
Emission Control System Maintenance ......... 143
Engine ........................................................... 412
Air Cleaner ................................................ 418
Block Heater ............................................. 152
Break-In Recommendations ..................... 153
Compartment ............... 412 , 413, 414, 415
Compartment
Identification ............ 412, 413, 414, 415
Coolant (Antifreeze) .................................. 483
Exhaust Gas Caution ................................ 380
Fails To Start ............................................. 147
Flooded, Starting ...................................... 147
Fuel Requirements ..........................477 , 482
Idling......................................................... 151
Jump Starting ........................................... 393
Oil ...........................................417 , 482, 483
Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 412
Oil Filter .................................................... 418
Oil Selection.....................................417 , 482
Oil Synthetic .............................................. 418
Overheating .............................................. 396
Starting ............................................ 145 , 148
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature
................................................361 , 401
11
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 493
494
Entry System, Illuminated
................................ 62
Ethanol ..........................................................478
Exhaust Gas Cautions ....................................380
Exhaust System ................................... 380 , 429
Exterior Lights .........................................55 , 379
F
Family Alerts
..................................................303
Filters
Air Cleaner .................................................418
Air Conditioning ..................................70 , 424
Engine Fuel ...............................................421
Engine Oil ........................................ 418 , 483
Engine Oil Disposal ...................................418
Flashers
Turn Signals .................................... 141 , 379
Flash-To-Pass .................................................. 57
Flat Tire Stowage ...........................................391
Fluid Capacities .............................................482
Fluid Leaks ....................................................379
Fluid Level Checks
Brake
........................................................434
Fluid, Brake ...................................................486
Fog Lights ...............................................58 , 452
Fold-Flat Seats ................................................. 36
Forward Collision Warning .............................333
Four Wheel Drive ...........................................162
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ...............................381
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .................................398
Front Axle (Differential) ..................................435
Fuel............................................. 212 , 477, 479
Adding ............................................. 210 , 212
Additives ................................................... 478
Clean Air ................................................... 477
Ethanol ..................................................... 478
Filter ......................................................... 421
Gasoline ................................................... 477
Light ......................................................... 135
Materials Added ....................................... 478
Methanol .................................................. 478
Octane Rating .................................. 477 , 483
Requirements .........................477 , 479, 482
Specifications ........................................... 480
Tank Capacity ........................................... 482
Fuel Saver Technology .................................. 176
Fuses ............................................................ 436
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....................50
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................ 477
Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 477
Gauges
Voltage ..................................................... 149
Glass Cleaning .............................................. 475
Grocery Bag Retainer .......................................42
Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................. 217
Gross Combination Weight Rating ................ 217
Gross Trailer Weight ..................................... 216
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................... 216
Guide
Body Builders ...............................................11
GVWR ............................................................ 215
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising,
Or Shallow Standing Water
................... 235
Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 381
Head Restraints ...............................................42
Head Rests ......................................................42
Headlights ..................................................... 450
Cleaning.................................................... 472
Delay ...........................................................57
High Beam ...................................................56
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........56
Lights On Reminder .....................................57
On With Wipers ............................................57
Passing ........................................................57
Switch ..........................................................55
Heads Up Display (HUD) ....................... 124 , 126
Heated Mirrors .................................................50
Heated Seats ...................................................40
Heated Steering Wheel ....................................34
Heater, Engine Block ..................................... 152
High Beam/Low Beam Select
(Dimmer) Switch
..............................................56
Hill Descent Control ...................................... 324
Hill Descent Control Indicator ....................... 324
Hill Start Assist .............................................. 325
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 494
495
Hitches
Trailer Towing
............................................219
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .................... 50
Hood Release ..................................................87
HUD ..................................................... 124 , 126
I
Ignition
............................................................ 23
Switch ......................................................... 23
Ignition Park Interlock ....................................157
Illuminated Entry ............................................. 62
Inside Rearview Mirror ............................46 , 382
Instrument
Cluster ............ 108, 110, 112, 113, 115, 116
Descriptions ..................109, 111, 113, 116
Display ......................................................117
Engine Oil Reset ........................................118
Location And Controls ...............................117
Menu Items ...............................................119
Instrument Cluster Display
Audio .........................................................124
Driver Assist ..............................................120
Fuel Economy ............................................123
Off-Road ....................................................119
Speedometer ............................................119
StopStart ...................................................123
Stored Messages ......................................124
Trailer Tow .................................................124
Trip ............................................................123
Vehicle Info ...............................................119
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................... 475
Integrated Trailer Brake Control ................... 224
Interior Appearance Care .............................. 474
Interior Lights ...................................................60
Intervention Regeneration Strategy ..... 127, 423
Inverter Outlet (115V) ......................................80
J
Jack Location ................................................ 385
Jump Starting ............................................... 393
K
Key Fob............................................................19
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............22
Key Fob Battery Replacement .........................21
Key Fob Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry)
....................................22
Keyless Enter-N-Go .................................31 , 145
Passive Entry ...............................................31
Keys.................................................................19
L
Lane Change Assist
.........................................58
LaneSense .................................................... 199
Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................................... 344
Latches ......................................................... 379
Hood............................................................87
Lead Free Gasoline ....................................... 477
Leaks, Fluid .................................................. 379
Life Of Tires ................................................... 464
Light Bulbs ...........................................379 , 448
Lights ............................................................ 379
4WD.......................................................... 139
Air Bag ....................................131 , 350, 378
Air Suspension Fault ................................. 135
Brake Assist Warning ................................ 323
Brake Warning .......................................... 132
Bulb Replacement .................................... 448
Cargo ................................................. 58 , 138
Center Mounted Stop ............................... 453
Courtesy/Reading ........................................60
Cruise ....................................................... 141
Daytime Running .........................................56
ECO Mode ................................................. 140
Electric Power Steering ............................. 133
Electronic Stability Program(ESP)
Indicator ............................................... 133
Exterior .............................................. 55 , 379
Fog................................................... 140 , 452
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 381
Headlights ............................................55 , 57
High Beam ......................................... 56 , 142
High Beam/Low Beam Select ......................56
Hill Descent Control Indicator ..........141, 324
Hood Open ................................................ 133
Illuminated Entry .........................................62
Interior .........................................................60
LaneSense ................................................ 140
Lights On Reminder .....................................57
Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid .......................... 138
11
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 495
496
NEUTRAL
...................................................139
Oil Temperature ........................................134
Park...........................................................140
Passing........................................................ 57
Rear Axle Lock ................................. 136 , 139
Rear Tail Lamps ........................................452
Seat Belt Reminder ...................................134
Security Alarm ...........................................134
Service ......................................................448
Service Forward Collision ..........................136
Service LaneSense ....................................135
Service Stop Start .....................................136
Stop Start Active ........................................141
Traction Control .........................................323
Trailer Brake Disconnected .......................134
Transmission Temperature .......................134
Turn Signals ..............................................450
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions ................................ 131 , 133
Water In Fuel .............................................140
Limited-Slip Differential ....................... 175 , 436
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode .....................130
Load Shed Battery Saver On ..........................130
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ............130
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ............130
Loading Vehicle .............................................215
Tires ..........................................................458
Locks
Automatic Door ........................................... 33
Child Protection ........................................... 33
Power Door ..................................................30
Low Tire Pressure System ............................. 336
Lubrication, Body .......................................... 427
Lug Nuts ....................................................... 476
Lug Nuts/Bolts .............................................. 476
M
Maintenance
.............................................85 , 87
Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 416
Maintenance Schedule ............... 402, 407, 408
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine)
.............................................. 136
Manual
Service ..................................................... 490
Media Hub .......................................................76
Media Mode .................................................. 277
Memory Seat ...................................................35
Memory Settings ..............................................35
Methanol ...................................................... 478
Mirrors .............................................................46
Automatic Dimming .....................................46
Digital ..........................................................47
Electric Powered ..........................................48
Heated.........................................................50
Manual Dimming .........................................46
Memory .......................................................35
Outside ........................................................48
Power Folding ..............................................49
Rearview.............................................46 , 382
Tilt Side In Reverse ......................................50
Trailer Towing ..............................................50
Vanity...........................................................47
Mobile App .................................................... 291
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle
.........................................................13
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...................... 336
Mopar Parts .................................................. 489
MP3 Control .....................................................76
Multi-Function Control Lever ............................56
Multifunction Tailgate ......................................89
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period
......................... 153
O
Occupant Restraints ..................................... 342
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ...................... 477
Off Road Pages ............................................. 313
Accessory Gauges ..................................... 316
Pitch And Roll ........................................... 317
Status Bar................................................. 314
Vehicle Dynamics ..................................... 315
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) ................... 236
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) ................... 236
Oil Filter, Change ........................................... 418
Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 418
Oil Pressure Light .......................................... 133
Oil, Engine ............................................417 , 483
Capacity .................................................... 482
Dipstick..................................................... 416
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 496
497
Disposal
....................................................418
Filter ................................................ 418 , 483
Filter Disposal ...........................................418
Identification Logo .....................................418
Materials Added To ...................................418
Pressure Warning Light .............................133
Recommendation ............................ 417 , 482
Synthetic ...................................................418
Viscosity ....................................................482
Onboard Diagnostic System ..........................142
Operating Precautions ...................................142
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual
........................................490
Outside Rearview Mirrors ................................ 48
Overheating, Engine ......................................396
P
Paddle Shifters
..............................................161
Paint Care ......................................................472
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A
Mobile Phone
b
.........................................281
Parallel Parking .............................................196
Parking Brake ................................................153
Parking Lights ..................................................57
ParkSense Active Park Assist ........................195
ParkSense System, Rear ...............................189
Passive Entry ................................................... 31
Pedals, Adjustable ........................................... 45
Pedestrian Warning System ..........................336
Performance Features ...................................120
Pets .............................................................. 377
Phone Mode ................................................. 279
Pickup Box ................................................94 , 96
Pinch Protection .......................................85 , 87
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 458
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) .............. 437 , 443
Door Locks ..................................................30
Mirrors .........................................................48
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .........78, 80
Seats ...........................................................38
Side Steps ...................................................30
Sliding Rear Window ....................................83
Steering .................................................... 175
Sunroof.................................................84 , 85
Windows ......................................................82
Power Seats
Down
...........................................................39
Forward .......................................................39
Rearward .....................................................39
Recline ........................................................39
Tilt ...............................................................39
Up................................................................39
Power Steering ............................................. 175
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .................. 348
Presets ......................................................... 275
Pressure Washing ......................................... 417
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ................................................. 348
Profile Settings ............................................. 239
R
Radial Ply Tires .............................................. 462
Radiator Cap
(Coolant Pressure Cap) ........................ 430 , 431
Radio
Off Road Pages
......................................... 313
Presets ..................................................... 275
Settings .................................................... 238
Sound Setting ........................................... 261
Radio Controls .............................................. 269
Radio Mode................................................... 269
Radio Operation ...................................269 , 309
Radio Remote Controls ................................. 269
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...........................63
RamBox ...........................................................96
RamBox Safety .................................................99
Rear Axle (Differential) .................................. 435
Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails ............................95
Rear Cross Path ............................................ 330
Rear ParkSense System ................................ 189
Rear Window, Sliding .......................................83
Reclining Rear Seats ........................................38
Recreational Towing ...................................... 231
Four-Wheel Drive Models .......................... 232
Shifting Into Transfer Case
Neutral (N)
............................................ 233
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
Neutral (N)
............................................ 234
Two-Wheel Drive Models .......................... 232
Reformulated Gasoline ................................. 477
11
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 497
498
Refrigerant
....................................................424
Registering SiriusXM Guardian ......................290
Release, Hood ................................................. 87
Release, Tailgate ............................................. 88
Reminder, Seat Belt ......................................343
Remote Features, Door
Lock/Unlock ........................................ 296 , 304
Remote Features, Horn And Lights ................298
Remote Features, Starting .................. 297 , 306
Remote Keyless Entry
Programming Additional Key Fobs
.............. 22
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control .........269
Remote Start (Diesel) ...................................... 27
Remote Start (Gasoline) .................................. 24
Remote Starting
Comfort Systems
......................................... 26
Exit Remote Start Mode .............................. 26
Remote Starting System ........................... 24 , 27
Remove, Tailgate ............................................. 90
Replacement Bulbs .......................................448
Replacement Tires .........................................464
Reporting Safety Defects ...............................489
Restraints, Child ............................................363
Restraints, Head .............................................. 42
Roadside Assistance ........................... 298 , 305
Rotation, Tires ...............................................470
S
Safety ........................................................... 268
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ........................ 377
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ..................... 379
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................. 489
Safety Features ............................................. 268
Safety Information, Tire ................................ 454
Safety Tips .................................................... 377
Safety, Exhaust Gas ...................................... 380
Satellite Radio .............................................. 271
Saved Radio Stations ................................... 275
Schedule, Maintenance ..............402, 407, 408
Seat Belt Reminder ....................................... 134
Seat Belts ............................................ 343 , 377
Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................... 347
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 347
Adjustable Upper Shoulder
Belt Anchorage
..................................... 347
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 348
Child Restraints ........................................ 363
Energy Management Feature ................... 348
Extender ................................................... 347
Front Seat...............................343 , 344, 346
Inspection................................................. 377
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................... 346
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................... 346
Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................. 344
Operating Instructions .............................. 346
Pregnant Women ...................................... 348
Pretensioners ........................................... 348
Rear Seat.................................................. 344
Reminder .................................................. 343
Seat Belt Extender .................................... 347
Seat Belt Pretensioner .............................. 348
Seat Belt Reminder .................................. 343
Untwisting Procedure ................................ 346
Seat Belts Maintenance ................................ 474
Seats..................................................36 , 38, 39
Adjustment ...........................................36 , 39
Easy Entry ....................................................40
Head Restraints ...........................................42
Memory .......................................................35
Power...........................................................38
Rear Folding ................................................36
Reclining Rear .............................................38
Tilting ...........................................................36
Second Row USB .............................................76
Security System ..................................... 28 , 134
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .................. 483
Send & Go ............................................ 299 , 305
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..................................23
Service Assistance ........................................ 487
Service Contract ............................................ 488
Service Manuals ........................................... 490
Settings, Audio .............................................. 275
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 498
499
Shifting
..........................................................156
Automatic Transmission ............................157
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer
Case Neutral (N) ...................................233
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer
Case Neutral (N)
...................................234
Shoulder Belts ...............................................344
Side Steps, Power ............................................ 30
Signals, Turn ..................................58 , 141, 379
Sirius Satellite Radio .....................................271
Favorites ...................................................274
Replay .......................................................272
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM ..........................................274
Favorites ...................................................274
Replay .......................................................272
Sliding Rear Window, Power ............................ 83
Smart Watch ..................................................303
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .............................468
Snow Plow .....................................................229
Snow Tires .....................................................465
SOS Call............................................... 292 , 304
Spare Tires ................................. 465 , 466, 467
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......................180
Starting ....................................... 144 , 145, 148
Automatic Transmission ............................145
Button ......................................................... 23
Cold Weather ............................................149
Engine Fails To Start .................................147
Starting And Operating ......................... 145 , 148
Starting Procedures ............................. 145 , 148
Steering
Power ....................................................... 175
Tilt Column ..................................................34
Wheel, Heated .............................................34
Wheel, Tilt....................................................34
Wheel, Voice Recognition ............................44
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ..................... 269
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System ...... 269
Steps, Power Side ............................................30
Stolen Vehicle Assistance .................... 300 , 306
Stop/Start ..................................................... 176
Storage ............................................................71
Below Seat ..................................................76
Door ............................................................71
Front Bench Seat .........................................74
Glove Compartment ....................................71
In Floor ........................................................75
Rear Console ...............................................75
Storage Compartment, Center Seat .................72
Storage, Vehicle ......................................70 , 472
Store Radio Presets ...................................... 275
Storing Your Vehicle ...................................... 472
Sun Roof ............................................ 84 , 85, 87
Sunglasses Storage .........................................74
Sunshade Operation ................................. 85 , 86
Surround View Camera ................................. 204
Suspension
Air .................................................... 167 , 171
Sway Control, Trailer ..................................... 327
Symbol Glossary ...............................................13
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 418
T
Tailgate
............................................................88
Tailgate Removal .............................................90
Tailgate, Electronic Lowering ...........................88
Tailgate, Multifunction .....................................89
Telescoping Steering Column ...........................34
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .............69
Tilt
Down
...........................................................39
Up ................................................................39
Tilt Steering Column .........................................34
Tip Start ........................................................ 145
Tire And Loading Information Placard ........... 458
Tire Identification Number (TIN) .................... 456
Tire Markings ................................................ 454
Tire Safety Information .................................. 454
Tire Terminology And Definitions ................... 457
Tires ......................... 379 , 461, 465, 466, 471
Aging (Life Of Tires) ................................... 464
Air Pressure .............................................. 461
Chains ...................................................... 468
Compact Spare ......................................... 466
11
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 499
500
Dual
...........................................................476
General Information ............... 461, 465, 466
High Speed ................................................462
Inflation Pressure ......................................462
Life Of Tires ...............................................464
Load Capacity ............................................458
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
........................................ 137 , 336
Quality Grading ..........................................471
Radial ........................................................462
Replacement .............................................464
Rotation ....................................................470
Run Flat.....................................................463
Safety .............................................. 454 , 461
Sizes..........................................................455
Snow Tires .................................................465
Spare Tires ............................. 465 , 466, 467
Spinning ....................................................463
Trailer Towing ............................................223
Tread Wear Indicators ...............................463
Types.........................................................465
Wheel Nut Torque .....................................476
To Open Hood ..................................................87
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ............. 217 , 220
Tonneau Cover .................................... 101 , 472
Tonneau Cover Cleaning ................................472
Tow/Haul Mode .............................................162
Towing ................................................. 216 , 399
Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 399
Guide........................................................ 220
Recreational ............................................. 231
Weight ...................................................... 220
Towing Behind A Motorhome ........................ 231
Traction......................................................... 235
Traction Control ............................................ 326
Trailer Reverse Steering Control ................... 220
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .................... 217 , 327
Trailer Tire Pressure ...................................... 340
Trailer Towing ............................................... 216
Frontal Area .............................................. 217
Hitches ..................................................... 219
Minimum Requirements ........................... 222
Mirrors .........................................................50
Tips........................................................... 228
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................ 220
Weight Carrying Hitch ............................... 217
Weight Distributing Hitch .......................... 217
Wiring ....................................................... 226
Trailer Towing Guide ..................................... 220
Trailer Weight ................................................ 220
Transfer Case ............................................... 436
Electronically Shifted ....................... 162 , 164
Fluid ......................................................... 486
Transmission................................................. 157
Automatic ........................................157 , 434
Fluid.......................................................... 486
Maintenance ............................................ 434
Shifting ..................................................... 156
Transporting Pets .......................................... 377
Tread Wear Indicators ................................... 463
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover ................................. 101
Cleaning.................................................... 107
Install........................................................ 105
Removal ................................................... 102
Turn Signals .........................58 , 141, 450, 452
U
Uconnect
Phone Call Features
................................. 284
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone
................................... 287
Uconnect Settings .................................... 238
Uconnect (Radio) .......................................... 237
Uconnect 4C Nav With 12-Inch Display ......... 237
Uconnect 4C/4C Nav With 8.4-Inch
Display .......................................................... 237
Uconnect Phone ............................................ 281
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress ..................... 286
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress ................ 285
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 500
501
Bluetooth Communication Link
.................289
Call Continuation .......................................287
Call Controls ..............................................285
Call Termination ........................................287
Cancel Command ......................................281
Connecting To A Particular Mobile
Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing .....283
Help Command .........................................281
Join Calls ...................................................286
Making A Phone Or Audio
A Favorite
..............................................283
Making A Second Call While Current
Call Is In Progress
.................................286
Managing Your Favorites ...........................284
Natural Speech .........................................281
Operation ..................................................280
Overview....................................................279
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A
Mobile Phone ........................................281
Phonebook Download ...............................284
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold ...............286
Power-Up ...................................................289
Recent Calls ..............................................285
Redial ........................................................287
To Remove A Favorite ...............................284
Toggling Between Calls .............................286
Touch-Tone Number Entry .........................285
Transfer Call To And From
Mobile Phone ....................................... 287
Voice Command ....................................... 287
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features
....31, 238
Passive Entry Programming .........................31
Uconnect System .......................................... 266
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .......................... 471
Universal Garage Door Opener
(Homelink®) — If Equipped
b
.......................51
Unleaded Gasoline ....................................... 477
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................... 346
USB..................................................................76
Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area ...........................95
V
Vehicle Finder
...................................... 299 , 305
Vehicle Health Alert ...................................... 301
Vehicle Health Report ................................... 301
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............. 476
Vehicle Loading ................................... 215 , 458
Vehicle Maintenance .................................... 417
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ....................13
Vehicle Notifications ..................................... 302
Vehicle Settings ............................................ 238
Vehicle Storage .......................................70 , 472
Ventilated Seats ..............................................41
Voice Command ...............................................44
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................44
W
Warranty Information .................................... 489
Washers, Windshield .................................... 416
Washing Vehicle ............................................ 472
Water
Driving Through
........................................ 235
Water Separator
Diesel Fuel
................................................ 421
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ........................... 467
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 467
Wi-Fi .............................................................. 300
Wind Buffeting .................................................84
Window Fogging ...............................................70
Window Lockout Switch ...................................83
Windows ..........................................................82
Power...........................................................82
Rear Sliding .................................................83
Reset Auto-Up ..............................................83
Windshield Defroster .................................... 378
Windshield Washers .............................. 62 , 416
Fluid.......................................................... 416
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 427
Windshield Wipers ...........................................62
Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 427
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................63
Wireless Charging Pad .....................................81
11
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 501
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in
an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that
may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation
or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also
dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull
off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It
is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference
for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle,
visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far
below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public
transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when
you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor
vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and
lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary,
service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when
servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle.
This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make
changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself
to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in
substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet by calling 1-866-726-4636 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
THIRD EDITION
22_DT_OM_EN_USC
©2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
2022 RAM 1500
OWNER’S MANUAL
2022 RAM 1500
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing
what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important
extension of your Ram vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go
directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
CANADA
MOPAR.COM/OM
U.S.
